Are you sure?
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
认识科学做一个人聪明的外行人 http://www.jxcad.com.cn/?u=74032
核能发电基本常识
认识科学做一个人聪明的外行人 http://www.jxcad.com.cn/?u=74032
Atoms and Nuclei
Each topic is subdivided into a number of episodes. An episode represents a coherent section of teaching – perhaps one or two lessons. Each episode contains links to a number of activities.
Quantum physics Episode 500: Preparation for quantum physics topic Episode 501: Spectra and energy levels Episode 502: The photoelectric effect
Lasers Episode 503: Preparation for lasers topic Episode 504: How lasers work
Wave particle duality Episode 505: Preparation for waveparticle duality topic Episode 506: Particles as waves Episode 507: Standing waves
Radioactivity Episode 508: Preparation for radioactivity topic Episode 509: Radioactive background and detectors Episode 510: Properties of radiations Episode 511: Absorption experiments Episode 512: Nuclear equations Episode 513: Preparation for exponential decay topic Episode 514: Patterns of decay Episode 515: The radioactive decay formula Episode 516: Exponential and logarithmic equations
Accelerators and detectors Episode 517: Preparation for accelerators and detectors topic Episode 518: Particle accelerators Episode 519: Particle detectors
Rutherford’s experiment Episode 520: Preparation for Rutherford scattering Episode 521: Rutherford’s experiment Episode 522: The Size of the Nucleus
Nuclear stability Episode 523: Preparation for nuclear stability topic. Episode 524: Stable nuclides Episode 525: Binding energy
Nuclear fission Episode 526: Preparation for nuclear fission topic Episode 527: Nuclear transmutation Episode 528: Controlling fission
Xray and neutron diffraction Episode 529: Preparation for Xray and neutron diffraction topic Episode 530: Xray diffraction Episode 531: Neutron diffraction
Particles and antiparticles Episode 532: Preparation for particle physics topic Episode 533: The particle zoo Episode 534: Antiparticles and the lepton family Episode 535: Particle reactions Episode 536: Vector bosons and Feynman diagrams
Quarks Episode 537: Preparation for deep scattering and quarks topic Episode 538: Electron scattering Episode 539: Deep inelastic scattering Episode 540: Quarks and the standard model
资料来源： http://www.iop.org/activity/education/Projects/Teaching%20Advanced%20Physics/Atomic%20and%20 Nuclei/index.html
INDEX
Episode 500: Preparation for the quantum physics topic
It is most likely that this will be a topic that is completely unfamiliar to all students from pre16 level courses. It is also one where the impact on everyday life is apparently very limited and where students think that they have no direct experience of its consequences. Nothing could be further from the truth: e.g. all modern electronics relies on quantum physics. However these very facts make it a most fascinating subject and one whose very novelty should attract the interest of your students.
Episode 501: Spectra and energy levels Episode 502: The photoelectric effect
Main aims
Students will: 1. Know that atoms absorb and emit light as quanta (photons). 2. Explain how this is used to explain emission spectra. 3. Know how to calculate photon energies. 4. Describe the photoelectric effect, and explain it in terms of photons and electrons. 5. Describe an experiment to determine Planck’s constant using the photoelectric effect.
Prior knowledge
Students should be familiar with the nuclear model of the atom. They should know that metals contain ‘free’ (conduction) electrons.
Where this leads
These episodes (and work on lasers) lead on to general ideas about waveparticle duality.
1
INDEX
Episode 501: Spectra and energy levels
Summary
Demonstration: Looking at emission spectra. (20 minutes) Discussion: The meaning of quantisation. (20 minutes) Demonstration: Illustrating quantisation. (10 minutes) Discussion: Energy levels in a hydrogen atom. (10 minutes) Worked example + Student Questions: Calculating frequencies. (20 minutes) Discussion: Distinguishing quantisation and continuity. (5 minutes) Worked example: Photon flux. (10 minutes) Student calculations: Photon flux. (20 minutes) Student experiment: Relating photon energy to frequency. (30 minutes)
Demonstration: Looking at emission spectra
Show a white light and a set of standard discharge lamps: sodium, neon, hydrogen and helium. Allow students to look at the spectrum of each gas. They can do this using a direct vision spectroscope or a bench spectroscope, or simply by holding a diffraction grating up to their eye. What is the difference? (The white light shows a continuous spectrum; the gas discharge lamps show line spectra.)
Emission and absorption spectra
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
2
INDEX
The spectrum of a gas gives a kind of 'finger print' of an atom. You could relate this to the simple flame tests that students will have used at pre16 level. Astronomers examine the light of distant stars and galaxies to discover their composition (and a lot else).
Discussion: The meaning of quantisation
Relate the appearance of the spectra to the energy levels within the atoms of the gas. Students will already have a picture of the atom with negatively charged electrons in orbit round a central positively charged nucleus. Explain that, in the classical model, an orbiting electron would radiate energy and spiral in towards the nucleus, resulting in the catastrophic collapse of the atom. This must be replaced by the Bohr atomic structure – orbits are quantised. The electron’s energy levels are discrete. An electron can only move directly between such levels, emitting or absorbing individual photons as it does so. The ground state is the condition of lowest energy – most electrons are in this state. Think about a bookcase with adjustable shelves. The bookshelves are quantised – only certain positions are allowed. Different arrangement of the shelves represents different energy level structures for different atoms. The books represent the electrons, added to the lowest shelf first etc
Demonstration: Illustrating quantisation
Throw a handful of polystyrene balls round the lab and see where they settle. The different levels on which they end up – the floor, on a desk, on a shelf – gives a very simple idea of energy levels. Some useful clipart can be found below TAP 5011: The emission of light from an atom Resourceful Physics >Teachers>OHT>Emission of Light An energy input raises the electrons to higher energy levels. This energy input can be by either electrical, heat, radiation or particle collision. When the electrons fall back to a lower level there is an energy output. This occurs by the emission of a quantum of radiation.
Discussion: Energy levels in a hydrogen atom
Show a scale diagram of energy levels. It is most important that this diagram is to scale to emphasise the large energy drops between certain levels. The students may well ask the question, “Why do the states have negative energy?” This is because the zero of energy is considered to be that of a free electron 'just outside' the atom. All
3
INDEX
energy states 'below' this – i.e. within the atom are therefore negative. Energy must be put into the atom to raise the electron to the 'surface' of the atom and allow it to escape.
Worked example + student questions: Calculating frequencies
Calculate the frequency and wavelength of the quantum of radiation (photon) emitted due to a transition between two energy levels. (Use two levels from the diagram for the hydrogen atom.) E2 – E1 = hf Point out that this equation links a particle property (energy) with a wave property (frequency). Ask your students to calculate the photon energy and frequency for one or two other transitions. Can they identify the colour or region of the spectrum of this light? Emphasise the need to work in SI units. The wavelength is expressed in metres, the frequency in hertz, and the energy difference in joules. You may wish to show how to convert between joules and electronvolts.
Discussion: Distinguishing quantisation and continuity
The difference between the quantum theory and the classical theory is similar to the difference between using bottles of water (quantum) or water from a tap (classical). The bottles represent the quantum idea and the continuous flow from the tap represents the classical theory. The quantisation of energy is also rather like the kangaroo motion of a car when you first learn to drive – it jumps from one energy state to another, there is no smooth acceleration. It is all a question of scale. We do not 'see' quantum effects generally in everyday life because of the very small value of Planck's constant. Think about a person and an ant walking across a gravelled path. The size of the individual pieces of gravel may seem small to us but they are giant boulders to the ant. We know that the photons emitted by a light bulb, for example, travel at the speed of light (3 × 108 m s1) so why don’t we feel them as they hit us? (Although all energy is quantised we are not aware of this in everyday life because of the very small value of Planck’s constant.) Students may worry about the exact nature of photons. It may help if you give them this quotation from Einstein: ‘All the fifty years of conscious brooding have brought me no closer to the answer to the question, “What are light quanta?”. Of course, today every rascal thinks he knows the answer, but he is deluding himself.’ (Illustrations: resourcefulphysics.org)
Worked example: Photon flux
Calculate the number of quanta of radiation being emitted by a light source.
4
INDEX
Consider a green 100 W light. For green light the wavelength is about 6 × 107 m and so: Energy of a photon = E = hf =hc / λ= 3.3 × 1019 J The number of quanta emitted per second by the light N = 100 × λ / hc = 3 × 1020 s1.
Student calculations: Photon flux
TAP 5012: Photons streaming from a lamp TAP 5013: Quanta
Student experiment: Relating photon energy to frequency
TAP 5014: Relating photon energy to frequency. Students can use LEDs of different colours to investigate the relationship between frequency and photon energy for light.
5
INDEX
TAP 5011: The emission of light from an atom
Electron in orbit round a nucleus in an atom
Energy input. The electron is excited and rises to a higher energy level (shell).
The electron falls back to its original energy level and energy is emitted in the form of radiation. The bigger the drop the greater the energy emitted and the shorter wavelength the radiation has (blue light).
6
INDEX
7
INDEX
TAP 5012: Photons streaming from a lamp
What to do
Complete the questions below on the sheet. Provide clear statements of what you are estimating; show what calculations you are performing and how these give the answers you quote. Try to show a clear line of thinking through each stage.
Steps in the calculation
1. Estimate the power of a reading lamp in watts.
2.
Estimate the average wavelength of a visible photon.
3.
Calculate the energy transferred by each photon.
4.
Calculate the number of photons emitted by the lamp in each second.
8
INDEX
Practical advice
This question, or a substitute for it, needs to come early on in the discussion of photons to avert questions concerning our inability to be aware of single photons. However, single photon detectors are now used in astronomy etc.
Alternative approaches
This may be prefaced or supplemented by such a calculation performed in class. It is well done by linking to other such questions that yield large numbers.
Social and human context
Every time we meet a pervasive quantity like power it is useful to compare it to our place in the Universe (75 W or so as a useful power output over any length of time) and to compare developed and developing countries in this respect.
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2. 3. P = 40 W λ = 5 × 10–7 m Calculate the frequency of the photons corresponding to this wavelength:
f = =
c
λ
3 × 10 8 m s −1 5 × 10 −7 m
= 6 × 1014 Hz.
Now calculate the energy of each photon:
E = hf
= 6 × 10 −34 J s −1 × 6 × 1014 Hz = 4 × 10 −19 J.
4. Energy per second = 40 J s–1 Energy per photon = 4 × 10–19 J. energy per second photons per second = energy per photon
= 40 J s 1 4 × 10 −19 J
= 1× 10 20.
External reference
9
INDEX
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 7, question 20E
10
INDEX
TAP 501 3: Quanta
Speed of electromagnetic radiation in free space (c) = 3.00 x 108 m s1 Planck’s constant (h) = 6.63 x 1034 J s 1. Write down the equation for the quantum energy of a photon in terms of its frequency.
2. Calculate the energies of a quantum of electromagnetic radiation of the following wavelengths: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) gamma rays X rays violet light yellow light red light microwaves radio waves wavelength wavelength wavelength wavelength wavelength wavelength wavelength 103 nm 0.1 nm 420 nm 600 nm 700 nm 2.00 cm 254 m
3. Calculate the wavelengths of quanta of electromagnetic radiation with the following energies: (a) 6.63 x 1019 J
(b)
9.47 x 1025 J
(c)
1.33 x 1018 J
11
INDEX
(d)
3.98 x 1020 J
12
INDEX
Practical advice
Pupils may need to be reminded that a wavelength of 103 nm is 1 x 1012 m and that some students could need help in using their calculators.
Answers and worked solutions
1 2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) 3 (a) (b) (c) (d) λ = hc/E 0.21 m 1.5 x 107 m 5 x 10 m
6
E = hf
f = c/λ
E = hf so E = h c/λ
E = (6.63 x 1034 x 3 x 108) / (1 x 1012) = 1.99 x 1013 J E = 1.99 x 1015 J E = 4.74 x 1019 J E = 3.01 x 1019 J E = 2.84 x 1019 J E = 9.95 x 1024 J E = 7.83 x 1019 J
λ = (6.63 x 1034 x 3 x 108) / 6.63 x 1019 = 3 x 107 m (150 nm)
(300 nm)
13
INDEX
TAP 501 4: Relating energy to frequency
Photons have a characteristic energy
Light of a particular colour is a stream of photons of a specific frequency. Light appears granular when seen at the finest scale. A bright light delivers lots of energy every second. If light is granular then the amount of energy must be related to the number of granules arriving each second. The intensity of the light will also depend on the energy delivered by each granule. This activity relates the energy of each photon to the frequency of that photon.
You will need
multiple LED array peering tube power supply, 5 V (smooth and regulated) multimeter five 4 mm leads
Measuring energy
The energy released by each electron as it travels through the LED is transferred to a photon. To measure the energy released by each electron measure the potential difference across the LED when it just glows. Then we multiply this figure by the charge on the electron (1.6 × 10–19 C). The quantity that characterises the photon is the frequency so we then seek to find a connection between this frequency and the energy. 1. Set up the circuit and check that each LED can be lit by altering the pd
100 Ω select LEDs one at a time by flying lead +5 V
select LED by flying lead
to 5 V power supply
Knob on pot Alter pd so that LED just lights
V
0V 470 nm 502 nm 563 nm 585 nm 620 nm 650 nm
to voltmeter
2.
Calculate the frequency of the LEDs.
14
INDEX
3.
Measure the pd just sufficient to strike each LED. At this pd the energy supplied by the electrons is all transferred to photons. Use the peering tube to cut out room lighting. Look for a pattern connecting energy to frequency (plot a graph!). You should be prepared to remeasure any points that do not fit and to check your results with those from other measurements. See if you can quantify the relationship. By how much does the energy of the photon change for each hertz?
4.
5.
Energy and frequency 1. 2. The energy associated with a photon is related to its frequency. This relationship introduces the important quantity, h, the Planck constant.
Practical advice
We suggest setting up several competing research groups, and actively encouraging students to form a consensus about the relationship between frequency and energy. An appropriate degree of collaboration gets the correct answer; inappropriate degrees yield a work of fiction or no consensus. Thus can physics progress. Students will know about the existence of an LED from previous work on electricity and will know that it conducts in one direction only. Thus electrons, simply introduced as what moves when electricity is conducted, can be presented as meeting an electrical barrier when the LED is reverse biased and falling down that barrier when forward biased. This simple model of the action of an LED is enough for this purpose. Connecting this electrical model to an energetic model requires the notion of potential difference to be reviewed as being likely to be the sensible way of determining the height of the barrier and the energy as being the potential difference times the charge on the electron. Analogies with the energy released in falling down a hill can reinforce this idea. So as to make sure that none of the electrical energy is dissipated we need to insist that we require the smallest pd across the photodiode. This energy, plotted against the frequency of emitted light (taken from the manufacturer's specifications), can then be used. Experience shows that the measurements made by the students may not be so accurate, and that encouragement to settle on a simple pattern, together with the consensual approach suggested above and the ability to make several measurements before deciding on the accurate answer, will be necessary. A class using a graphplotting package may make this review and interaction more likely. Students should easily establish E = h f. A consensus on the value of h should give a value that is far from embarrassing. Students who are red/green or other forms of colour blindness will get different results. Often red/green colour blind students need a higher striking pd to see some light from the LED or may not be able to see particular wavelengths of light.
15
INDEX
Sample results:
LED colour Blue Green Yellow Orange Red Wavelength / nm 470 563 585 620 650 Frequency / 10 Hz 6.38 5.33 5.12 4.83 4.62
14
Striking pd /V 2.38 1.69 1.63 1.48 1.47
Energy /J 0.381 0.270 0.261 0.237 0.235 / 10
h
–34
Js
6.0 5.1 5.1 4.9 5.1
Technician’s information
The array of LEDs is used to make the connection between the frequency at which a photon is emitted and the energy carried by that photon. Measurements are made of the minimum pd required to just turn an LED on and of the wavelength of light from it. The wavelength may be better taken directly from the manufacturer's specification. Each LED emits photons of one characteristic frequency, specified in many catalogues by the peak wavelength emitted by the LED. You need a wide range of wavelengths, fairly evenly spaced, so as to get a reasonable graph of pd against frequency or wavelength. You may find a wider range of LEDs available at lower cost than when this design was first produced, if so then exceeding the range suggested is fine; reducing that range does not yield a reliable graph. To measure the energy carried by each photon students will need to be able to measure the pd applied across each LED in turn. Students then plot energy / frequency. So it may be useful to mark the peak frequencies or wavelengths emitted by the LEDs on the apparatus.
How to make it
The requirement is to be able to apply a variable pd, 0  3 V, across a series of LEDs, one at a time in turn. 5 LEDs are sufficient. Increasing the range of frequencies is more important than adding more LEDs. We suggest that the LEDs be mounted in plastic ducting, a 150 mm length of 40 mm by 25 mm proved sufficient to mount all the components neatly. Here is a circuit diagram:
16
INDEX
100 Ω
select LEDs one at a time by flying lead +5 V
select LED by flying lead
to 5 V power supply
Knob on pot Alter pd so that LED just lights
V
0V 470 nm 502 nm 563 nm 585 nm 620 nm 650 nm
to voltmeter
Variations are, of course possible. You may choose not to have sockets (which enable the current through the LEDs to be measured), or perhaps to have only one return wire so that the LEDs come on one after another as the pd is increased. A suitable protective resistor (roughly equal in value to the resistance of the shortest wavelength LED) in series with the wiper arm of the potentiometer will prevent applying too much pd across the LEDs.
Important features
• • • • Use as wide a range of wavelengths for the LEDs as are currently available. The LEDs should all be mounted in clear plastic, not mounted in coloured plastic. The LEDs should all have approximately the same power output. Provide a narrow opaque tube, about the length of a pencil, through which to peer at each LED, excluding extraneous light, so as to detect when it just comes on, and obtain a good value for the pd needed. Black paper or card is usually sufficient for the tube. The arrangement of the potential divider together with the protective resistor to protect the LEDs allows the apparatus to be driven from a 5 V supply whilst protecting the LEDs. Other arrangements might also work.
•
Alternative approaches
To establish the connection between the energy associated with each click as a Geiger counter detects a gamma ray photon we suggest measuring the energy required to release one photon of light in a lightemitting diode. This has the advantage that we can cheaply try out several frequencies and rapidly obtain a picture of how energy varies with frequency. It is, of course, not the only technique for establishing a link between frequency and energy. You may substitute others. The photoelectric effect has been used for this for many years, as has appeal to the evidence of spectra.
Social and human context
17
INDEX
Studying engineering barriers of different heights to release different amounts of energy takes us into the structures of semiconductor materials and engineering band gaps, which, whilst fascinating, does not contribute to the central understanding sought here. It is, however, central to quantum engineering. This can be used to start a discussion linking the potential barrier to an energetic understanding of the situation.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 7, activity 10E
18
INDEX
Episode 502: The photoelectric effect
This episode introduces an important phenomenon. Light releases electrons from metal surfaces.
Summary
Demonstration: The basic phenomenon. (15 minutes) Discussion: Summarising the phenomenon. (10 minutes) Discussion: An analogy. (5 minutes) Student questions: Using the photoelectric equation. The Millikan experiment: to verify Einstein’s photoelectric relationship (30 minutes) Student experiment: Measuring Planck’s constant. (30 minutes)
Demonstration: The basic phenomenon
Introduce the topic by demonstrating the electroscope and zinc plate experiment. TAP 5021: Simple photoelectric effect demonstration Point out to the students that the photoelectric effect is apparently instantaneous. However, the light must be energetic enough, which for zinc is in the ultraviolet region of the spectrum. If light were waves, we would expect the free electrons to steadily absorb energy until they escape from the surface. This would be the case in the classical theory, in which light is considered as Negatively waves. We could wait all day and still the red charged zinc light would not liberate electrons from the zinc plate Ultra violet plate. light So what is going on? We picture the light as quanta of radiation (photons). A single electron captures the energy of a single photon. The emission of an electron is instantaneous as long as the energy of each incoming quantum is big enough. If an individual photon has insufficient energy, the electron will not be able to escape from the metal.
Discussion: Summarising the phenomenon
Summarise the important points about the photoelectric effect.
19
Gold leaf falls immediately the zinc plate is illuminated with ultra violet light
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
INDEX
There is a threshold frequency (i.e. energy), below which no electrons are released. The electrons are released at a rate proportional to the intensity of the light (i.e. more photons per second means more electrons released per second). The energy of the emitted electrons is independent of the intensity of the incident radiation. They have a maximum KE.
Discussion: An analogy
Try this analogy, which involves pingpong balls, a bullet and a coconut shy. A small boy tries to dislodge a coconut by throwing a pingpong ball at it – no luck, the pingpong ball has too little energy! He then tries a whole bowl of pingpong balls but the coconut still stays put! Along comes a physicist with a pistol (and an understanding of the photoelectric effect), who fires one bullet at the coconut – it is instantaneously knocked off its support. Ask how this is an analogy for the zinc plate experiment. (The analogy simulates the effect of infrared and ultra violet radiation on a metal surface. The pingpong balls represent low energy infrared, while the bullet takes the place of highenergy ultra violet.) Now you can define the work function. Use the potential well model to show an electron at the bottom of the well. It has to absorb the energy in one go to escape from the well and be liberated from the surface of the material.
Units
The electronvolt is introduced because it is a convenient small unit. You might need to point out that it can be used for any (small) amount of energy, and is not confined to situations involving electrically accelerated electrons.
Potential well
It is useful to compare the electron with a person in the bottom of a well with totally smooth sides. The person can only get out of the well by one jump, they can't jump half way up and then jump again. In the same way an electron at the bottom of a potential well must be given enough energy to escape in one 'jump'. It is this energy that is the work function for the material. Now you can present the equation for photoelectric emission: high energy violet quantum Electron leaves metal Electron energy
Quantum energy
Potential well
Work function
20
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
INDEX
Energy of photon E = hf Picture a photon being absorbed by one of the electrons which is least tightly bound in the metal. The energy of the photon does two things. Some of it is needed to overcome the work function φ. The rest remains as KE of the electron.
hf = φ + (1/2) mv2
A voltage can be applied to bind the electrons more tightly to the metal. The stopping potential Vs is just enough to prevent any from escaping:
hf = φ + eVs
Student questions: Using the photoelectric equation
Set the students some problems using these equations. TAP.5022: Photoelectric effect questions TAP 5024: Student Question. The Millikan experiment The Millikan experiment question may best come after TAP 5023: Student experiment: Measuring threshold frequency.
Student experiment: Measuring Planck’s constant
TAP5023: Measuring threshold frequency Students can measure Planck’s constant using a photocell. (Some useful clipart is given here below)
to oscilloscope
21
coloured filter
INDEX
TAP 5021: Simple photoelectric effect demonstration
Resources needed
Gold leaf electroscope or coulomb meter Zinc plate attachment (sandpapered clean to remove oxidation) Laser (class 2) Mains lamp (a desk lamp is ideal) Ultra violet lamp with clear quartz envelope
Safety
A class 2 laser requires a warning: Do not stare down the beam. A shortwave UV lamp must be shielded so that the UV emerges through a hole. The hole is always directed away from eyes. The presence of UV can be demonstrated by showing fluorescence of paper.
Technique
Attach the zinc plate to the top of the electroscope. (A coulomb meter can be used instead of the electroscope.) Charge the plate negatively.
o
No effect
No effect
With U.V. leaf falls immediately (Diagrams: resourcefulphysics.org)
22
INDEX
Shine red laser light onto the cleaned zinc plate – no effect. Use a mains light bulb emitting white light – no effect. Use an ultra violet lamp – the leaf falls immediately.
23
INDEX
TAP 5022: Photoelectric effect questions
hf = φ + (1/2) mv2 and hf = φ + eVs
e = 1.60 x 1019 C, h = 6.63 x 1034 J s, mass of electron = 9.11 x 1031 kg 1 (a) (b) 2 The work function for lithium is 4.6 x 1019 J. Calculate the lowest frequency of light that will cause photoelectric emission. What is the maximum energy of the electrons emitted when light of 7.3 x 1014 Hz is used? Complete the table. Work Function /eV 2.28 3.68 x 1019 2.9 4.1 4.3 7.36 x 1019 1 x 1015 1 x 1015 0.35 x 1019 1.12 x 1019 Work Function /J Frequency used /Hz 6 x 10
14
Metal Sodium Potassium Lithium Aluminium Zinc Copper 3 (a) (b) (c) 4
Maximum KE of Ejected electrons /J 0.32 x 1019
The stopping potential when a frequency of 1.61 x 1015 Hz is shone on a metal is 3 V. What is energy transferred by each photon? Calculate the work function of the metal. What is the maximum speed of the ejected electrons? Selenium has a work function of 5.11 eV. What frequency of light would just eject electrons? (The threshold frequency is when the max KE of the ejected electrons is zero) A frequency of 2.4 x 1015 Hz is used on magnesium with work function of 3.7 eV. What is energy transferred by each photon? Calculate the maximum KE of the ejected electrons. The maximum speed of the electrons. The stopping potential for the electrons.
5 (a) (b) (c) (d)
24
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
1(a)
hf = φ
hf = 4.60 x 1019 f = 4.60 x 1019 / 6.63 x 1034 = 6.94 x 1014 Hz
(b) 2
hf = φ + (1/2) mv2. (6.63 x 1034 x 7.30 x 1014) = 4.60 x 1019 + (1/2) mv2
4.84 x 1019  4.60 x 1019 = (1/2) mv2 = 0.24 x 1019 J
Metal Sodium Potassium Lithium Aluminium Zinc Copper
Work Function / eV 2.28 2.30 2.90 4.10 4.30 4.60
Work Function /J 3.65 x 10
19
Frequency used / Hz 6 x 10
14
Maximum KE of ejected electrons / J 0.35 x 1019 0.32 x 1019 1.99 x 1019 0.35 x 1019 1.12 x 1019 0
3.68 x 1019 4.64 x 1019 6.56 x 1019 6.88 x 1019 7.36 x 1019
6 x 1014 1. x 1015 1.04 x 1015 1.2 x 1015 1 x 1015
For copper 1 x 1015 Hz is below the threshold frequency so no electrons are ejected. 3 (a) (b) (c) 1.07 x 1018 J
hf = φ + eVs, so φ = hf  eVs, so φ = 1.07 x 1018 – (1.6 x 1019 x 3) = 5.9 x 1019 J
eVs = (1/2) mv2 so (1.60 x 1019 x 3) = 0.5 x 9.11 x 1031 x v2 so v2 =1.04 x 1012 and v = 1.02 x 106 m s1
4 5 (a) (b) (d)
1.2 x 1015 Hz
1.6 x 1018 J (1/2) mv2 = 1.x 1018 J (c)
v2 = 1.1 x 1012 so v = 1.1 x 106 m s1
eVs = (1/2) mv2 so eVs = 1.00 x 1018 and Vs = 0.63 V
25
INDEX
TAP502 3: Measuring threshold frequency
Use a white light source and a set of coloured filters to find the threshold frequency, and hence the work function, of the photosensitive material in a photocell. This may well be a standard piece of kit in your school or college. Use a spreadsheet to plot and analyse a graph of your results. This experiment uses a photocell to investigate the photoelectric effect. Light of various frequencies is incident on the cell and photoelectrons are emitted and then form an electric current. A white light source is shone through various coloured filters to produce a series of different frequencies of light falling on the photocell. The current of photoelectrons produced in the cell maybe amplified internally and is measurable on the ammeter. Otherwise an amplifying picoammeter is needed.
The potential divider provides an adjustable voltage. The incident frequency, threshold frequency, and stopping potential are related by the following equation: hf =eV + hfo
Procedure
For each coloured filter, adjust the potential divider until the stopping potential has been reached. Record the stopping potential and the wavelength of light transmitted by the filter. Select the middle of the range as the transmitted frequency. NB: the filter might have written on it the range of wavelengths it transmits measured in
Enter your results of frequency and stopping potential on a spreadsheet and plot a graph of frequency f versus stopping potential V. Use your graph to determine the value of the threshold frequency f and hence calculate the work function φ. Express your result in J and in eV. Estimate the uncertainties in your measurements of V and in the values of f that you have used. Use these estimates to add error bars to your graph and hence estimate the uncertainty in your values of f0 and φ. Decide how you could use your graph to determine the value of Planck's constant if you knew only the value of e and not h.
26
INDEX
Data
Planck constant h = 6.60 x 1034 J s electron charge e = 1.67 x 1019 C speed of light c = 3.00 x 108 m s1 1eV = 1.67 x 1019 J
Practical advice
This section revisits ideas about charge, energy and potential difference and introduces the idea of a stopping potential in order to measure the kinetic energy of photoelectrons. Students need to realise that, if a charged particle is accelerated by a pd, energy is transferred to it, whereas if it moves the other way, it loses kinetic energy, and that the two situations are the exact reverse of each other. Students should appreciate that the work function represents the minimum amount of work that an electron must do in order to get free and that the expression for kinetic energy represents the maximum possible kinetic energy of the photoelectron. This energy is only attainable if the energy transfer from photon to electron is 100% efficient and there is no energy dissipation, e.g. due to heating. This is quite a demanding activity, as it involves a relatively complicated and unfamiliar setup. Make sure students appreciate the use of the potential divider, (as in Episode 118 The Potential Divider). In analysing their results, students need to plot a graph and determine the yintercept. Students will have met graphs of the type y = mx + c before but still might not be very confident in using them, this might need some discussion. We recommend using a spreadsheet graphing package here. Students should also take account of experimental uncertainties; the most significant is likely to be in the frequency, as the filters available do not have a very definite cutoff wavelength. There might also be some uncertainty in deciding exactly the pd at which the photocell current drops to zero.
Einstein's ideas
Albert Einstein explained the photoelectric effect in a paper published in 1905. It was the second of five groundbreaking papers he wrote that year. In the first paper, Einstein explained the mysterious Brownian motion of particles contained in pollen grains as due to the random impact of much smaller particles. This work led to the acceptance of the molecular or atomic nature of matter, which until then had been quite speculative. Einstein's third paper that year is now his most famous. Here Einstein introduced his Special Theory of Relativity which, in a later paper, led to probably the most famous equation in science: E=mc2, which describes the equivalence of mass and energy. But it was Einstein's second paper, that contained his work on the photoelectric effect, that at the time was the most revolutionary of the three, and it was for this work that Einstein was eventually awarded the Nobel Prize, in 1922. (The Nobel Committee works somewhat more slowly than the speed of light!) In this paper Einstein broke away from the idea that light (electromagnetic radiation) is continuous in nature and introduced us to the idea of the quantum (plural quanta) or photon as a `packet' of light. (The term quantum is used for any packet of energy, while a photon is a quantum associated with electromagnetic radiation.) The wave model of light had been fairly conclusively established a century earlier, mainly due to the work of Thomas Young, who demonstrated and explained interference patterns. But the wave model cannot explain the photoelectric effect;
27
INDEX
Einstein realised this and took the bold step of putting forward a completely different model in order to explain the following experimental results: • • • • for any given metal, with radiation below a certain threshold frequency no electrons are released even if the radiation is very intense; provided the frequency is above the threshold, some electrons are released instantaneously, even if the radiation is very weak; the more intense the radiation, the more electrons are released; the kinetic energy of the individual photoelectrons depends only on the frequency of the radiation and not on its intensity.
Einstein was the first to use the equation E = hf to explain the photoelectric effect. It is known as the Planck equation, and h is called Planck's constant, because Max Planck had already proposed that when electromagnetic radiation was absorbed or emitted, energy was transferred in packets. That work earned Planck the 1918 Nobel Prize.
External references
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DIG, activity 30 and the Einstein notes above from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DIG additional sheet 11
28
INDEX
TAP 502 4: The Millikan experiment to verify Einstein’s photoelectric relationship.
The photoelectric effect was – well known by the end of the 19th century. Its explanation was one of Einstein’s first applications of his photon model for light. He devised an equation relating the energy of the photoelectrons to the frequency of the light and the work function of the metal used. In 1916, American physicist Robert Millikan completed some experiments that tested Einstein's equation. Though Millikan had been firmly against quantum theory, the results convinced him that Einstein was right.
In Millikan's photoelectric apparatus, monochromatic light was incident on each of the newlycleaned metal plates in turn. The resulting photoelectrons were collected by electrode C and flowed, via the variable resistor and microammeter, back to the plate assembly. By adjusting the potentiometer, Millikan found the potential difference that was just large enough to stop the electrons moving round the circuit. For each metal, he used radiation of several different frequencies, noting the `stopping voltage' for each. This graph shows some of his results for sodium.
(a) (b) (c)
Use the graph to find the threshold frequency for sodium. Calculate the work function for sodium using your answer to (a). h = 6.63 x 1034 J s. Use your answer to (b) to find the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted from sodium when the frequency of the incident light is 10 x 1015 Hz. Give your answer in joules and in electronvolts. e = 1.6 x 1019 C
29
INDEX
30
INDEX
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DIG, additional sheet 13
Answers and worked solutions
External reference
Answers and worked solutions are taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DIG, additional sheet 14
31
INDEX
Episode 503: Preparation for lasers topic
It is likely that all pupils will have experienced laser technology in their homes or at school but may well not familiar with the range of uses of lasers, their operation and safety. Section TAP 5042 gives details of the safety measures required. Lasers form rather more of a 'tool' and so demonstration experiments are relatively few. However some ideas and an explanation of the workings and other details of a laser are given.
ruby rod
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
Episode 504: How lasers work
Main aims
As regards post16 examinations, the formal requirements laid down are modest, or nonexistent, so that the level of treatment here is not detailed. Students will: 1. Outline the principles of operation of a laser. 2. State some uses of high and low energy lasers.
Prior knowledge
Students should know about the wave nature of light, including interference. They should also know how light is emitted by electron transitions within atoms.
32
INDEX
Episode 504: How lasers work
This episode considers uses of lasers, and the underlying theory of how they work.
Safety:
Ensure that you are familiar with safety regulations and advice before embarking on any demonstrations (see TAP 5042).
Summary
Demonstration: Seeing a laser beam. (10 minutes) Discussion: Uses of lasers. (15 minutes) Discussion: Safety with lasers. (10 minutes) Discussion: How lasers work. (20 minutes) Worked examples: Power density. (10 minutes) Student calculations: (10 minutes)
Demonstration: Seeing a laser beam
A laser beam can be made visible by blowing smoke or making dust in its path. Its path through a tank of water can be shown by adding a little milk. Show laser light passing through a smoke filled box or across the lab and compare this with a projector beam or a focussed beam of light from a tungsten filament light bulb. Show the principle of optical fibre communication by directing a laser beam down a flexible plastic tube containing water to which a little milk has been added. Show a comparison between the interference pattern produced by a tungsten filament lamp (with a 'monochromatic' filter) and that produced by a laser.
Discussion: Uses of lasers
Talk about where lasers are used – ask for suggestions from the class. As far as possible this should be an illustrated discussion with a CD player, a laser pointer, a set of bar codes, a bar code reader and the school’s laser with a hologram available for demonstration. TAP 5041: Uses of lasers Show the list of uses. Invite students to consider the uses shown in the list. Can they say why lasers are good for these? The reasons might be: • A laser beam can be intense.
33
INDEX
• • •
A laser beam is almost monochromatic. A laser beam diverges very little. Laser light is coherent.
Discussion: Safety with lasers
Lasers must be used with care. Use the text as the basis of a discussion of the precautions which must be taken. TAP 5042: Lasers and safety
Discussion: How lasers work
If students are familiar with energy level diagrams for atoms, and of the mechanisms of absorption and emission of photons, you can present the science behind laser action. Point out the difference between: (a) excitation – an input of energy raises an electron to a higher energy level (b) emission  the electron falls back to a lower energy level emitting radiation and (c) stimulated emission – the electron is stimulated to fall back to a lower energy level by the interaction of a photon of the same energy Define population inversion: Usually the lower energy levels contain more electrons than the higher ones (a). In order for lasing action to take place there must be a population inversion. This means that more electrons exist in higher energy levels than is normal (b).
For the lasing action to work the electrons must stay in the excited (metastable) state for a reasonable length of time. If they 'fell' to lower levels too soon there would not be time for the stimulating photon to cause stimulated emission to take place.
(a)
(b)
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
‘Laser’ stands for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. The diagrams in TAP 503 shows the ruby laser and the snowball effect of photons passing down a laser tube, and the diagram above shows the three level laser action. The electrons are first ‘pumped’ up to the higher energy level using photons. They then drop down and accumulate in a relatively stable energy level, where they are stimulated to all drop back together to the ground state by a photon whose energy is exactly the energy difference to the ground state.
34
INDEX
Discuss coherent and noncoherent light. Coherent light is light in which the photons are all in 'step' – in other words the change of phase within the beam occurs for all the photons at the same time. There are no abrupt phase changes within the beam. Light produced by lasers is both coherent and monochromatic (of one 'colour').
Incoherent sources emit light with frequent and random changes of phase between the photons. (Tungsten filament lamps and 'ordinary' fluorescent tubes emit incoherent light)
Worked examples: Power density
The laser beam also shows very little divergence and so the power density (power per unit area) diminishes only slowly with distance. It can be very high. For example consider a light bulb capable of emitting a 100 W of actual light energy. At a distance of 2 m the power density is 100 / 4πr2 = 2 W m2. The beam from a heliumneon gas laser diverges very little. The beam is about 2 mm in diameter 'close' to the laser spreading out to a diameter of about 1.6 km when shone from the Earth onto the Moon! At a distance of 2 m from a 1 mW laser the power density in the beam would be 0.001 / (π × 0.0012) = 320 W m2! This is why you must never look directly at a laser beam or its specular reflection.
Student calculations
Ask the class to calculate the power densities for a 100 W lamp and a 1 mW laser at the Moon. (Distance to Moon = 400 000 km; diameter of laser beam at Moon = 1.6 km)
35
INDEX
TAP 5041: Uses of lasers
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • repairing damaged retinas bar code reader communication via modulated laser light in optical fibres neurosurgery  cutting and sealing nerves sterilization – key hole surgery (microsurgery) laser video and audio discs (CD and DVD) cutting metal and cloth laser pointer laser printer holography  threedimensional images surveying  checking ground levels production of very high temperatures in fusion reactors laser light shows making holes in the teats of babies' bottles cutting microelectronic circuits physiotherapy  using laser energy to raise the temperature of localised areas of tissue e.g. removing tonsure tumours laser lances for unblocking heart valves; removal of tattoos or birth marks laser guidance systems for weapons laser defence systems ('Star Wars') a modification of the MichelsonMorley experiment to check the existence of the ether distance measurement laser altimeters
36
INDEX
TAP 5042: Lasers and safety
The following is an extract from the CLEAPSS Science Publications Handbook Section 12.12:
12.12 Lasers
A lowpower, continuouswave, heliumneon laser is useful for teaching wave optics because it produces a beam of light that is: • • • highly monochromatic (very narrow spread of wavelengths) and coherent (the same phase) both across the beam and with time; of high intensity; of small divergence (typically 1 mm in diameter when it leaves the laser, 5 mm in diameter 4 m away).
Because of its intensity, care must be taken to prevent a beam from a laser falling on the eye directly or by reflection, as it could damage the retina. In fact, it is now known that eyes could be damaged by the beam from the low power Class II lasers used in schools only if a deliberate attempt were made to stare at the laser along the beam or to concentrate the beam from a IIIa laser with an instrument; the normal avoidance mechanism of the body would prevent damage in other cases. Nevertheless, it is good practice to take precautions to avoid a beam falling on the eye. Lasers should be positioned so that beams cannot fall on the eyes of those present, i.e., are directed away from spectators. Ancillary optical equipment must be arranged so that reflected beams cannot reach eyes. Ten years ago, the lasers affordable by schools would work for only a few years and then only if run periodically. Those currently available have longer lives and do not require this.
DES Administrative memorandum 7/70
This advises on the use of lasers in schools and FE colleges. It confines use at school level to teacher demonstration. Safety rules include the avoidance of direct viewing; screening pupils who should be at least 1 m away; keeping background illumination as high as possible (so that eye pupils are as small as possible); displaying warning notices; keeping lasers secure from unauthorised use or theft; use of goggles by the demonstrator. Because of the more recent realisation that the lasers used in schools and colleges will not harm an eye by a beam accidentally falling on it, these rules are not strictly necessary but following them is good training. However, goggles are expensive, impractical and do not reduce hazard as they make it harder for the demonstrator to see the beam, stray reflections etc.
37
INDEX
Episode 505: Preparation for waveparticle duality topic
In the first quarter of the twentieth century physicists began to realise that particles did not always behave like particles – they could behave like waves. They called this waveparticle duality. This theory suggests that there is no basic distinction between a particle and a wave. The differences that we observe arise simply from the particular experiment that we are doing at the time. As with quantum theory, this is a section of the course that candidates will find completely new. They are unlikely to have already met the wave nature of particles or the wave nature of electrons bound within atoms.
Episode 506: Particles as waves Episode 507: Standing waves
Main aims
Students will: 1. Understand that electron diffraction is evidence for wavelike behaviour. 2. Use the de Broglie equation. 3. Identify situations in which a wave model is appropriate, and in which a particle model is appropriate, for explaining phenomena involving light and electrons. 4. Use a standing wave model for electrons in an atom.
Prior knowledge
Students should have an understanding of wave phenomena, including diffraction and interference. They should know how to calculate momentum. This work follows on from a study of the photoelectric effect.
Where this leads
These episodes merely skim the surface of quantum physics. For students who wish to learn a little more, here is some suggested reading: The new quantum universe; Tony Hey and Patrick Walters; CUP Quantum physics: An introduction; J Manners; IoPP You can extend the idea of electronsaswaves further, to the realm of the atom.
38
INDEX
Episode 506: Particles as waves
This episode introduces an important phenomenon: wave  particle duality. In studying the photoelectric effect, students have learned that light, which we think of as waves, can sometimes behave as particles. Here they learn that electrons, which we think of as particles, can sometimes behave as waves.
Summary
Demonstration: Diffraction of electrons. (30 minutes) Discussion: de Broglie equation. (15 minutes) Worked examples: Using the equation. (15 minutes) Student questions: Using the equation. (30 minutes) Discussion: Summing up. (10 minutes) Student questions: Practice calculations. (30 minutes)
Demonstration: Diffraction of electrons
The diffraction of electrons was first shown by Davisson and Germer in the USA and G P Thomson in the UK, in 1927 and it can now be observed easily in schools with the correct apparatus. Show electron diffraction. It will help if students have previously seen an electronbeam tube in use (e.g. the fine beam tube, or e/m tube). Evacuated tube Thin graphite screen Electron gun Diffraction rings
………
Electrons show particle properties Electrons show wave properties
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
TAP 5061: Diffraction of electrons
39
INDEX
Before giving an explanation, ask them to contemplate what they are seeing. It is not obvious that this is diffraction/interference, since students may not have seen diffraction through a polycrystalline material. (Note that the rigorous theory of crystal diffraction is not trivial  waves scattered off successive planes of atoms in the graphite give constructive interference if the path difference is a multiple of a wavelength, according to the Bragg equation. The scattered waves then appear to form a wave that appears to “reflect” off the planes of atoms, with the angle of incidence being equal to the angle of reflection. In the following we adopt a simplification to a 2D case  see TAP 5061) Qualitatively it can help to show a laser beam diffracted by two ‘crossed’ diffraction gratings. Rotate the grating, and the pattern rotates. If you could rotate it fast enough, so that all orientations are present, you would see the array of spots trace out rings. TAP5062: Diffraction of light From their knowledge of diffraction, what can they say about the wavelength of the electrons? (It must be comparable to the separation of the carbon atoms in the graphite.) How does wavelength change as the accelerating voltage is increased? (The rings get bigger; wavelength must be getting smaller as the electrons move faster.)
Discussion: de Broglie equation
In 1923 Louis de Broglie proposed that a particle of momentum p would have a wavelength λ given by the equation: wavelength of particle λ = h/p where h is the Planck constant, or λ = h/mv for a particle of momentum mv. The formula allows us to calculate the wavelength associated with a moving particle.
Worked examples: Using the equation
1. Find the wavelength of an electron of mass 9.00 × 1031 kg moving at 3.00 × 107 m s1. λ = h/p = [6.63 × 1034] / [9.00 × 1031 × 3.00 × 107] = 6.63 × 1034 / 2.70×1023 = 2.46×1011 m = 0.025 nm This is comparable to atomic spacing, and explains why electrons can be diffracted by graphite. 2. Find the wavelength of a cricket ball of mass 0.15 kg moving at 30 m s1. λ = h/p = [6.63 × 1034] / [0.15 × 30] = 1.47×1034 m = 1.5 1034 J s (to 2 s.f.) This is a very small number, and explains why a cricket ball is not diffracted as it passes near to the stumps.
40
INDEX
3.
It is also desirable to be able to calculate the wavelength associated with an electron when the accelerating voltage is known. There are 3 steps in the calculation.
Calculate the wavelength of an electron accelerated through a potential difference of 10 kV. Step 1: Kinetic energy Ek = eV = 1.6 × 1019 × 10000 = 1.6 × 1015 J Step 2: EK = ½ mv2 = ½m (mv) 2 = p2 / 2m, so momentum
p = √2mEk = √2 × 9.1 × 1031 × 1.6 × 1015 = 5.4 × 1023 kg m s1
Step 3: Wavelength λ = h / p = 6.63 × 1034 / 5.4 × 1023 = 1.2 × 1011 m = 0.012 nm.
Student questions: Using the equations
A useful set of questions can be found at Resourceful Physics on the web This can also be accessed from http://resourcefulphysics.org/download/361/waves_and_particles.doc and is available to subscribers.
Discussion: Summing up
You may come across a number of ways of trying to resolve the waveparticle dilemma. For example, some authors talk of ‘wavicles’. This is not very helpful. Summarise by saying that particles and waves are phenomena that we observe in our macroscopic world. We cannot assume that they are appropriate at other scales. Sometimes light behaves as waves (diffraction, interference effects), sometimes as particles (absorption and emission by atoms, photoelectric effect). Sometimes electrons (and other matter) behave as particles (beta radiation etc), and sometimes as waves (electron diffraction). It’s a matter of learning which description gives the right answer in a given situation. The two situations are mutually exclusive. The wave model is use for ‘radiation’ (i.e. anything transporting energy and momentum, e.g. a beam of light, a beam of electrons) getting from emission to absorption. The particle (or quantum) model is used to describe the actual processes of emission or absorption.
Student question: Interpreting electron diffraction patterns
TAP 5063: Interpreting electron diffraction patterns TAP 5064: Electron diffraction question
41
INDEX
TAP 506 1: Diffraction of electrons
Start by setting up the electron diffraction demonstration tube according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Check the connections before switching on as it is easy to burn out the graphite grid unless manufacturer’s instructions are correctly followed.
Wire carefully, no bare conductor above 40 V
School EHT supplied are limited to a maximum output current of less than 5 mA so they are safe, but can still make the user jump. The lead connecting the supply to the anode should have a female connector so that no metal is exposed. You will need two supply voltages: a lowvoltage supply to provide the current to heat the cathode; a highvoltage supply to provide the potential difference between the cathode and the anode, to accelerate the electrons. These are both usually supplied by the EHT unit.
Qualitative experiments
Check that you can identify the following: • the electron gun, which includes the cathode and the anode;
42
INDEX
• •
the graphite target; the fluorescent screen, which will glow when the electrons strike it.
When the cathode has heated up (you will see it glowing), increase the accelerating voltage V. An invisible beam of electrons emerges from the electron gun and passes through the graphite film. To show that there is an electron beam present, bring up a bar magnet close to the tube and observe the pattern shifting. Magnetic fields deflect moving electrons. So this qualitative demo shows both the wave aspects (the diffraction pattern) and the particle aspects (deflection by a magnetic field) in the same equipment. Look for a diffraction pattern on the screen at the end of the tube. What shape is the pattern? Where can you see constructive interference? And destructive interference? Now predict: If you increase the accelerating voltage, how will the energy and speed of the electrons change? How will this affect the diffraction pattern? Test your ideas.
Quantitative experiments
Choose a feature of the diffraction pattern that is easy to measure. It might be the diameter of the first bright ring, or of the first dark ring. We will call this chosen quantity d. Investigate how d depends on V. Make several measurements. Determine the mathematical relationship between d and V. If the relationship is of the form d proportional to Vn, you can find the value of n by plotting a loglog graph. The gradient of the graph is equal to the value of n.
What other information would you need if you were to use this experiment to determine the atomic spacing in graphite?
43
INDEX
Practical advice
It is difficult to present a convincing discussion of wave–particle duality in a few lines. We have adopted the approach that it is an observed phenomenon, witness the diffraction of electrons. The de Broglie equation wavelength = h/p simply allows us to translate between the wave and particle pictures. Increasing the accelerating voltage increase the electrons’ energy and momentum; greater momentum means shorter wavelength, which in turn means that the electrons are diffracted through a smaller angle. Hence the diameters of the diffraction rings get smaller. Students could make measurements of the rings and relate these to the accelerating voltage. A logl graph will reveal the relationship between them. It is reasonable to say that ring diameter is proportional to wavelength; a loglog graph of diameter against voltage will thus be a straight line with gradient (1/2).
Apparatus
electron diffraction tube power supply (6.3 V) for cathode e.h.t. supply (0 – 5000 V dc) with voltmeter connecting leads Great care must be taken to set the tube up correctly. The graphite can be damaged by incorrect connections. Notice that the positive e.h.t supply terminal is used without the protective resistor in some set ups. Take care. As the discussion in this section is almost entirely in terms of electron diffraction, students might get the idea that only electrons exhibit wave–particle duality whereas in fact it applies to all particles. You might like to mention that neutron diffraction is also used as a tool for probing material structure. Large biomolecules have now been diffracted. The chosen method is to introduce wave particle duality via the experiment however a little mathematics may be of use. This mathematics is given so an experimental or theoretical route can be chosen or the mathematics later used to back up the experiment.
E=hf and since fλ = c then E =hc/λ
Taking E = mc2 then mc2 = hc/λ and so mc = h/λ momentum = mass x velocity = p =mc And this gives the de Broglie relation p = h/λ Do notice that the switch from mc to mv has not been justified other than it works. (Note, this derivation really only refers to photons and not to electrons). For the diffraction tube where V is the anode cathode pd and v the electron speed then
44
INDEX
½ mv2 = eV so v = (2eV/m) 1/2 giving mv = m (2eV/m) 1/2 = (2meV) 1/2
p = h/λ = (2meV) 1/2 Tube screen
Graphite Target d
θ
D
Simplifying the Bragg formula into a two dimensional treatment for a transmission grating, for diffraction θ = λ/b (approximately) where b is the separation between the planes of carbon atoms. D, if required, can be obtained from manufacturers details. θ = d/D from geometry so d/D = λ/b or λ proportional to d as diffracting gap size b and target screen distance D are constants.
So using the momentum and accelerating pd equation above then
p = h/λ = (2meV) 1/2
or 1/λ is proportional to V1/2 or
λ is proportional to V1/2
External references
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section PRO, activity 18, with extra material added in the last two sections, adapted from Revised Nuffield Advanced Science Physics teachers guide, book 2, section L2.
45
INDEX
TAP 5062: Diffraction of light
Apparatus
torch bulb in holder with power supply diffraction gratings, 2 each of various spacing, e.g. 100 lines mm1, 300 lines mm1 red, blue and green filters (one of each colour) 2 glass slides (e.g. microscope slides) lycopodium dust
Safety
Lycopodium is dried pollen. Some people are allergic to pollen so, before use, it is wise to check for hayfever sufferer. (See Safeguards in the School Lab 4.4). Lycopodium powder in air will explode so extinguish all flames before using it.
Technique
Observe what happens when light is diffracted by: • • • a grating of parallel lines; a regular grid of crossed lines; a random array of fine dust particles.
Explore the effects of changing the separation of the lines and the wavelength of the light. Set up a small (6 V) lamp. You are going to observe how light from the lamp is diffracted in different situations.
Write down or sketch what you observe.
Hold a diffraction grating and a colour filter close to your eye. Look through it at the lamp. Rotate the grating. (A diffraction grating consists of many parallel, equally spaced lines, as much as several thousands in each centimetre.) Repeat with a finer or a coarser grating (using the same colour filter as before). Now use two diffraction gratings. Place one on top of the other, so that their lines are at 90 degrees to each other. You have made a grid of lines through which the light is diffracted. Look through the grid at the lamp. Try holding the gratings so that their lines cross at a different angle – say, 60° or 45°. Try combining gratings with different line spacing. Finally, sprinkle fine dust (e.g. lycopodium powder) on to a glass slide. Blow off any excess dust. Look through the slide at the lamp. (Now you are looking at light diffracted by a random array of tiny particles.)
46
INDEX
Repeat the above, using a different colour filter. Sum up your observations by saying how the diffraction patterns depend on: • • • the separation of the diffracting objects the geometry of the diffracting objects the wavelength of the light.
Practical advice
This activity is intended to remind students of diffraction effects they may have previously observed. Points to bring out are: • • • • the size of the pattern increases with increasing wavelength (red light is diffracted more than blue) the size of the pattern depends inversely on the spacing of the diffracting objects (the finer the grating, the more widely spaced the diffraction images) the geometry of the diffraction pattern depends on the geometry of the diffracting objects a random arrangement of small obstacles gives rise to a diffraction pattern that is a set of concentric rings.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section PRO, activity 17
47
INDEX
TAP 5063: Interpreting electron diffraction patterns
For this question to make sense, students need to be aware that an obstacle (e.g. a nucleus) is equivalent to a ‘hole’ of the same size. So far they have only met diffraction by ‘gaps’. Use the electron diffraction patterns shown in Figures (a) and (b) to determine the diameters of carbon and oxygen nuclei.
The diffraction patterns represented by the two graphs in Figures (a) and (b) were obtained using electrons accelerated to 420 MV.
By following the steps below, you will get a flavour of how such diffraction data are interpreted. You will also see some of the equations that must be used when electrons are moving at relativistic speeds (that is, close to the speed of light).
48
INDEX
Calculate the kinetic energy Ek of an electron accelerated through 420 MV. To calculate the momentum of the electron, you cannot use p=mv and EK = ½ mv2, because these equations don’t apply to relativistic particles. Instead, it turns out that the electron’s momentum p is related to its kinetic energy by Ek ~ pc where c is the speed of light. Calculate the momentum of the electron. The de Broglie relationship p = hλ applies to relativistic and nonrelativistic electrons because Relativity Theory is used in its derivation. Calculate the electron’s de Broglie wavelength. The angle of the first minimum θmin on the graph is a clearly identifiable point, and this is used to calculate the diameter of the nuclei. From the graphs in Figure (a) and (b), determine the angle of the first minimum for carbon nuclei, and for oxygen nuclei. The smaller the nucleus, the more it diffracts the electrons. From the angles you found, which are smaller, carbon nuclei or oxygen nuclei? Is this what you would expect from their atomic numbers? The diameter d of the nucleus is related to the electron wavelength and the diffraction angle θmin by
Use this relationship to obtain estimates of the diameters of carbon and oxygen nuclei. Explain why your answers are only estimates.
49
INDEX
External references
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section PHM, activity 19 which was an adaptation of Revised Nuffield Advanced Physics section L question 37(L).
Answers and worked solutions
Ek = 420 x 106 x 1.60 x 1019 = 6.72 x 1011 J Ek ~ pc so p = 6.72 x 1011 / 3 x 108 = 2.24 x 1019 N s
λ = h/p = 6.63 X 10 34 / 2.24 x 1019. = 2.96 x 1015 m (a) (b) carbon nuclei, 50° oxygen nuclei. 42°
d = 1.22λ θ min where d is the diameter of the nucleus Remember, the angle should be in radians or use sin θ. (a) (b) carbon d = (1.22 x 2.96 x 1015) / 0.766 = 4.7 x 1015 m oxygen d = (1.22 x 2.96 x 1015) / 0.669 = 5.3 x 1015 m
50
INDEX
TAP 506 4: Electron diffraction questions
1 In an electron diffraction experiment using graphite the larger ring formed by rows of carbon atoms 1.23 x 1010 m apart was formed at an angle of 0.167 radian. What is the wavelength? [θ in radians = λ / b where b is the diffracting object size]
(a)
(b)
Write an expression for the kinetic energy of an electron (½ mv2) in terms of its charge, and accelerating voltage V
(c)
Obtain an expression for momentum, p, in terms of e, V and m.
The accelerating voltage was 5000 V (d) Work out h in mv = h/ λ
51
INDEX
Answers
(a) (b) (c) (d) 0.205 x 1010 m KE = 0.5mv2 = Ve p = mv = (2meV) 1/2 h = 7.78 x 1034 J s (the accepted value is 6.6 x 1034 J s)
External reference
This activity is taken from Revised Nuffield Advanced Physics Unit L question 32.
52
INDEX
Episode 507: Electron standing waves
You could extend the idea of electronsaswaves further, to the realm of the atom.
Summary
Demonstration: Melde’s experiment. (20 minutes) Discussion: Electron waves in atoms. (10 minutes) Demonstration: Standing waves on a loop. (10 minutes) Student Question Electron standing waves (10 mins)
Demonstration: Melde’s experiment
TAP 5071: Standing waves – for electrons?
L
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
In this section we are going to introduce the idea of standing waves within an atom. It is therefore useful first to demonstrate standing waves on a stretched elastic cord. This is known as Melde’s experiment. (A very simple alternative to the vibration generator is an electric toothbrush.) Show that there are only certain frequencies at which standing wave loops occur.
M
Discussion: Electron waves in atoms
The waves on the string are 'trapped' between the two fixed points at the ends of the string and cannot escape. If the electron has wave properties and it is also confined within an atom we could imagine a sort of standing wave pattern for these waves rather like the standing waves on a stretched string. The electrons are 'trapped' within the atom rather like the waves being 'trapped' on a stretched string. The boundaries of these electron waves would be the potential well formed 'within' the atom. This idea was introduced because the simple Rutherford model of the atom had one serious disadvantage concerning the stability of the orbits. Bohr showed that in such a model the electrons would spiral into the nucleus in about 1010 s, due to electrostatic attraction. He therefore proposed that the electrons could only exist in certain states, equivalent to the loops on the vibrating string.
nucleus
electron
53
INDEX
If your students have met the idea of angular momentum, you could tell them that Bohr proposed that the angular momentum of the electrons in an atom is quantised, in line with Planck's quantum theory of radiation. He stated that the allowed values of the angular momentum of an electron would be integral multiples of h/2π. This implied a series of discrete orbits for the electron. We can imagine the electron as existing as a wave that fits round a given orbit an integral number of times.
Demonstration: Standing waves on a loop
The wire loop is a two dimensional analogy of electron waves in an atom. As it vibrates at the correct frequency, an integral number of waves fit round the orbit. These waves represent the electron waves in an atom.
Student question: Electron standing waves
de Broglie waves can be imagined as forming standing waves which fit into an atom TAP 5072: Electron standing waves
54
INDEX
TAP 5071: Standing waves  for electrons?
Electrons have a frequency too
Electrons can be modelled as having a frequency. In another context you have seen how superposition of waves in the laboratory produces standing waves. Here it is useful to put these two together, describing electrons with standing waves, with their wavelength described by de Broglie’s relationship:
λ = h / mv .
Here you look at some consequences of this step. You will need: vibration generator signal generator rubber cord Gclamp wooden blocks
Vibrating a rubber cord
Fre quency Adjust
5 3 7 8
2
1
9
10Hz
100H z
1kHz
10kHz
100 kHz
Frequency ran ge
100 0 100 10
10
100 1
1000
Frequency
10 Hz
power
Wave
Outp uts
A
Make sure that you can get clear patterns with this apparatus. Note that only whole numbers of half wavelengths fit onto the cord. Electrons trapped in an atom are also constrained. Describing them as waves, where the amplitude tells you the chance of find them in any one place, constrains you to draw the waves in a similar way.
55
INDEX
Making links
Putting relationships together with these results allows you to predict that electrons will have certain allowed energy levels only.
simplest pattern L next simplest pattern L
λ 2 λ = 2L
λ 2 λ=L
from diagrams
from de Broglie
λ= h mv
h mv = λ h L
mv =
h 2L
mv =
from kinetic energy
Ek =
1 mv2 2 p = mv
Ek =
p2 2m h2 8mL2 h2 2mL2
Ek =
Ek =
2 ? λ and 4 ? Ek
See if you can continue the series for the next two standing wave patterns that will fit onto the cord. You have 1. Reminded yourself about standing waves. 2. Seen some of the consequences of using standing waves to model electrons in atoms.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 140E
56
INDEX
TAP 5072: Electron standing waves
If an electron is confined in a definite space, the de Broglie waves can be imagined as forming standing waves that fit into that space. h = 6.6 x 1034 J s, charge on electron = 1.6 x 1019 C, mass of electron is 9.1 x 1031 kg
de Broglie standing wave r = 1.0 × 10–10 m
r = 0.1 × 10–10 m
diameter 2.0 × 10–10 m diameter 0.2 × 10–10 m
Suppose the standing wave fits with one halfwavelength across the diameter of the atom. 1. Write down the wavelength of the standing wave if the atom is imagined to have radius
r = 1.0 × 10–10 m.
2.
Write down the wavelength of the standing wave if the atom is imagined ten times smaller, with radius r = 0.1 × 10–10 m.
3.
Other standing waves could fit inside the same diameter. Would their wavelengths be longer or shorter than the waves shown here?
Electron momentum
The momentum of an electron with de Broglie waves of wavelength λ is m v = h / λ. If the wavelength is the largest possible, the momentum must be the smallest possible. 4. Calculate the smallest possible momentum of the electron, if the atom is imagined to have radius r = 1.0 × 10–10 m.
57
INDEX
5.
Calculate, or write down directly from the answer to question 4, the smallest possible momentum of the electron if the atom is imagined to have radius r = 0.1 × 10–10 m.
6.
Write a few lines explaining why an electron confined in a smaller space has a larger minimum momentum.
58
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2. 3. 4. The waves have half a wavelength fitting into the diameter, so λ = 4.0 × 10–10 m. The radius is 10 times smaller so the wavelength is 10 times shorter: λ = 0.4 × 10–10 m. More halfwavelength loops have to be fitted into the same length, so the wavelengths will all be smaller.
mv =
h
λ
6.6 × 10 −34 J s = 4.0 × 10 −10 m = 1.65 × 10 − 24 kg m s −1 .
5. 6. As for question 4 with the wavelength 10 times smaller, so the momentum is 10 times larger: mv = 16.5 × 10–24 kg m s–1. The smaller the space the shorter the wavelength. But the shorter the wavelength the greater the momentum, since mv = h / λ.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, and uses part of question 160s.
59
INDEX
Episode 508 See Episode 513
60
INDEX
Episode 509: Radioactive background and detectors
This episode introduces the ubiquitous nature of radioactivity, and considers its detection. It draws on students’ previous knowledge, and emphasises the importance of technical terminology.
Summary
Demonstration: Detecting background radiation (10 minutes) Discussion: Sources of background radiation (15 minutes) Demonstration: Radioactive dust (10 minutes) Discussion + survey: Sources of radiation – should we worry? (15 minutes) Demonstration + discussion: Am241 source, plus use of correct vocabulary. (10 minutes) Demonstration: Spark detector (10 minutes)
Demonstration: Detecting background radiation
Use a Geiger counter to reveal the background laboratory. What is the ‘signal’ like? (It is discrete, Does it vary from place to place in the room? (No; it this is an opportunity to discuss the need to make longerterm measurements.) Does it vary from time roughly constant.) Count for 30 s to get a total count N; repeat several random variation. Calculate the average value of N. (Note: a good rule of thumb is that the standard so roughly twothirds of values of N will be within ± radiation in the erratic / random.) may appear to; multiple or to time? (No, it’s to scaler/ratemeter times to show deviation is √Nave, √Nave.)
Which is better: 10 counts of 30 s, averaged to get the activity, or one count of 300 s? (They amount to the same thing. The statistics of this is probably beyond most Alevel students.) Calculate the background count rate from the data (typical value is 0.5 counts per second or 30 counts per minute, but this varies a lot geographically.)
Discussion Sources of background radiation
Look at charts showing sources of background radiation. Consider how these might vary geographically, with time, occupation etc.
61
INDEX
Pie chart for background radiations Note that pie charts in text books etc showing relative contributions are often calibrated in units of equivalent dose of
0.4% fallout 0.2% occupational <0.1% nuclear waste 12% internal such as food etc. 10% cosmic rays 0.4% air travel
12% medical, X rays etc.
14% gamma rays from the ground
50% radioactive gases in the home
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
radiation called sieverts (symbol Sv); sievert is a unit which takes account of the effects of different types of radiation on the human body. 1 Sv = 1 J kg1 = 1 m2 s2 TAP 5091: Doses TAP 5092: Whole body dose equivalents
Demonstration: Radioactive dust
Airborne radioactive substances are attracted to traditional computer and TV screens that use a high voltage. Similarly a ‘charged’ balloon will also accumulate radioactive dust and have an activity larger than the average background. The fresh dust in vacuum cleaner bags has a noticeably higher activity too. Set up a Geiger counter to measure the activity of vacuum cleaner dust; don’t forget to measure background rate also. TAP 5093: Radiation in dust
62
INDEX
Discussion + survey: Sources of radiation – should we worry?
So “radiation is all around us”. Indeed, most substances, and things, are radioactive. Students are radioactive! Typically 7000 Bq. So “it’s dangerous to sleep with somebody”! However, most of the resulting radiation is absorbed within the ‘owners’ body. Introduce activity of a sample as a quantity, measured in becquerels (Bq). Mass of typical student = 70 kg, so specific activity = 7000/70 = 100 Bq kg1. The Radiation Protection Division of the Health Protection Agency (formerly the National Radiological Protection Board, NRPB) defines a radioactive substance as having specific activity ≥ 400 Bq kg1. Should we worry about this? Ask students to complete this survey, and then revisit at the end of the topic. For each statement, indicate whether they think it is true or false, or they don’t know. S1 S2 S3 S4 Radioactive substances make everything near to them radioactive. Once something has become radioactive, there is nothing you can do about it. Some radioactive substances are more dangerous than others. Radioactive means giving off radiowaves. now will all be gone
S5 Saying that a radioactive substance has a half life of three days means any produced in six days.
Demonstration + discussion: Am241 source, plus use of correct vocabulary Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body. Place an Am241 source close to the GM tube and measure the count rate, which will be impressive, compared to background. (Some end window GM tubes will not detect alpha emission from AM241 but only weak gamma).
Geiger Muller tube
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
Radioactive source
63
INDEX
From here on, start to use appropriate technical vocabulary, drawing on students’ earlier experience. For example: Substances are radioactive, they emit ‘radiation’ when they decay. Why are some substances radioactive? (They contain unstable nuclei inside their respective atoms.) The unstable nucleus is called the mother and when it (she?) decays a daughter nucleus is produced (it’s not quite like human procreation!). Eventually the activity of a radioactive substance must cease. However, point out that the decay of the americium doesn’t seem to be getting any less. There are a very large number of nuclei in there! Am241 is used in smoke alarms, so it won’t ‘run out’. They are supplied with 33.3 kBq sources. The halflife is 458 years. What particular property does nuclear radiation have – what does it do to the matter through which it passes? (It is ionizing radiation. It creates ions when it interacts with atoms.) What is an ion? (A neutral atom which has lost or gained (at least one) electron.) Simplified diagram of a smoke alarm
Alpha source
Current due to ionisation flows from + to 
Current flow stopped by smoke
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
To knock an electron from an atom, the ionizing radiation transfers energy to the atom – this is how nuclear radiation is detected. It is not difficult to detect the presence of a single ion – electron pair, so it’s easy to detect the decay of single radioactive nucleus. Chemists can detect microgrammes or nanogrammes of chemical substances, physicists can detect individual atomic events.
Demonstration: Spark detector
Show a spark detector responding to the proximity of an alpha source. (NB At first, do not refer to the source as an alpha source.) Move the source away a few centimetres; you do not need much distance in air to absorb this radiation. Ask students to recall which type of radiation is easily absorbed by air. (Alpha.)
64
INDEX
Radioactive source or flame
0V
+ 5000 V
gauze
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
thin wire TAP 5094: Rays make ions
sparking here
Comment that a GM tube is not dissimilar to a spark counter, but rolled up to have cylindrical symmetry. At this point, you could discuss the sophisticated design of a GM tube and associated counter. The end window is usually made of mica and has a plastic cover, with holes, to protect the mica. anode +450 V low pressure neon or argon gas
0V thin end window radioactive particle
anode
65
INDEX
TAP 5091: Doses
Radiation dose measurements and units
activity in becquerel = disintegrations per second
dose in gray
radiation source
energy in different types of radiation
dose in gray = energy deposited per kg
dose equivalent in sievert = dose in gray × quality factor
Radiation quality factors radiation alpha beta gamma xrays neutrons factor 20 1 1 1 10 dose equivalent of 1 gray 20 Sv 1 Sv 1 Sv 1 Sv 10 Sv
66
INDEX
Practical advice
This gives a simple view of the connection between gray and sievert as units of radiation dose measurements. It may be best to change the size of the diagram and use it as an OHT.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, display material 20O
67
Typical whole body dose equivalent per year from various sources (Europe)
Artificial sources 530 µSv 22% of total work 9 µSv Natural sources 1860 µSv 78% of total cosmic and solar radiation 310 µSv gamma radiation from ground and buildings 380 µSv
air travel 8 µSv nuclear power 3 µSv nuclear weapons fallout 10 µSv
medical procedures 500 µSv
TAP 5092: Whole body dose equivalents
68
food and drink 370 µSv
radon gas from ground and buildings 800 µSv
INDEX
INDEX
Practical advice
This shows the breakdown of whole body doses, from different sources. It may be best to change the size of the diagram and use it as an OHT.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, display material 30O.
69
INDEX
TAP 5093: Radiation in dust
Ionisation in the home
Radon gas is present in the atmosphere of our homes; its daughter products can contribute to the background count as constituents of household dust. In this activity you are asked to collect dust and assess its level of radioactivity. You will need two sheets of kitchen paper towel radiation sensor, alpha sensitive (NB not a standard GM tube) stop watch rubber band
What to do
1. Collect some household dust on a sheet of kitchen paper towel. One way to do this is to cover your finger with the paper and then to wipe your finger over the surface of a dusty television or computer monitor screen. Do this for the whole screen, more than one screen if possible – you need a substantial layer of dust. Put the paper carefully to one side. Do not dislodge the dirt. (Incidentally, one reason for suggesting the dust from a television screen is because it is charged. It therefore attracts the ionised daughter products from, amongst other things, radon decays.) 2. Take a new clean piece of identical kitchen paper. Fix it around the thin window end of the sensor using a rubber band. Take a background measurement for a substantial time, several thousand seconds or even overnight if possible. Automating the capture of the data will prove useful. 3. Without changing any other conditions replace the clean paper with the dusty paper. Wrap it around the GM tube with the dust fingerprint side next to the window so that alpha particles are not absorbed by the paper. Take care not to get the dust onto the sensor. 4. Measure the radioactive count from the dust for the same length of time as before. 5. Look critically at the results. Are they significantly different? Remember that variation in a radiation experiment is equal to the square root of the measurement itself. Do the two results differ by substantially more than this?
You have
Measured some of the ambient radiation from a household.
70
INDEX
Practical advice
This experiment needs care but it does yield interesting results. It requires long timings and not a little luck. Household dust has radioactive products from a number of decays. In trials a count for 600 s produced the following results: background count (no paper): about 230 counts; background count (with paper): about 240 counts; dust count: about 295 counts. There was a substantial amount of dust on the paper from three computer monitors.
Alternative approaches
The use of TASTRAK plastic is a possible substitute here. The plastic known as CR39 was developed in 1933 and in 1978 it was found to be an excellent detector of charged particles, which could be revealed by etching the plastic. TASTRAK is a version of CR39 developed specifically to detect alpha particle tracks. It can be used to demonstrate the detection of radon. The suppliers, TASL, offer kits of TASTRAK plastic for class use which may then be returned to the Track Analysis Group for processing free of charge. This arrangement is STRICTLY for UK schools, colleges and universities only. Track Analysis Systems operate a free etching service. It is not recommended that you attempt the etching process yourself. When returning the exposed slides, remember to declare whether you require them to be in microscope or slide projector form. You can find more information about TASTRAK from http://www.tasl.co.uk/schools.htm or Track Analysis Systems Ltd, H H Wills Physics Laboratory, Tyndall Avenue, Bristol. BS8 1TL, U.K. Tel: +44 (0)117 926 0353, Fax: +44 (0)117 925 172
Be safe
Students should wash their hands before eating after collecting the dust.
External references
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, activity 20H.
71
INDEX
TAP 509 4: Rays make ions
The particles and rays that come from radioactive (unstable) nuclei are known generically as ionising radiation. Ionising radiations do just what their name says – they ionise atoms by removing one or more of the electrons outside the nucleus. It is this property that helps us to detect the radiations in many of the instruments that may already be familiar to you. In this activity you will learn to use a simple detector of ionising radiation – the spark detector.
You will need
spark counter EHT power supply, 0 – 5 kV, dc leads almost pure alpha source (The only ‘pure’ alpha source available in schools is Pu239. Am241 emits gammas too. However, since the spark counter only responds to the alphas, any alphaemitting source will do here) forceps or tweezers for handling the radioactive source (or source holder)
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Ionisation and its effects
First, some ideas about ionisation and its effects. Ionisation is the name given to the process in which an atom or molecule gains or loses one or more electrons. In the detection of radioactivity we are normally concerned with the loss of an electron. The mechanism is that radiation is emitted from an unstable nucleus; the particle or ray carries energy away with it. It is this loss of energy that allows the radioactive atom to become more stable. As the particle moves away through the air or a more dense substance it comes close to atoms, sometimes sufficiently close to interact. The particle can simply bounce off the atom – an elastic collision – or it can interact inelastically and transfer some its energy to the atom. This gain of energy by the atom leads to the removal of one of its electrons. You can think of the particle or ray as having knocked the electron free of its atom. Energy taken from the incoming particle or ray is needed for this to occur. Can you think of examples in which ionisation is used to detect radiation?
Getting going
1. Now, before setting it up, look closely at the spark detector. You should be able to see a grid or array of very fine wires running parallel and close to the surface of a metal plate or above a wire. There may also be an arrangement for holding a radioactive source a fixed distance from the wire array. Your power supply will maintain a high potential difference between the plate and the wires. There will be a large electric field in the space between the wires and the plate.
72
INDEX
Wire carefully, EHT supply I use
Although school EHT supplies are currentlimited and safe, using the extra limiting resister (50 MΩ) reduces the shock current to a trivial level. 2. Now connect up the detector to the power supply. Ask for help if you are not certain how to do this. To be safe the wires (the part you are most likely to touch) should be at earth (0 V) potential. Adjust the EHT until sparks just pass, then reduce it slightly. 3. Insert a source of alpha particles into the holder and ensure that the source is pointing array and about 10 mm from it. Take the usual handling precautions with the source.
– +
towards the wire
e.h.t.
0V
+ 5 kV
5 kV 0V
4.
Does an increase in the potential difference make a significant change in the sparking rate?
73
INDEX
The alpha particles ionise the air molecules as they travel from the source. The sparking is a result of what happens when the ionisation occurs in the strong electric field produced by the spark detector. Look at the diagram. The field is directed between the wire and the gauze, or between the wires and the plate. So, once the electron and its ion (the original atom) are separated, the electron moves towards the wire and the ion moves towards the plate. The ion has a large mass and so gains speed slowly. The electron, however, has a low mass so its acceleration is large. (You might want to estimate how large it is: to do this use the distance from wire to plate and the voltage setting to make a reasonable estimate of the electric field strength, hence the force and the acceleration.) If an electron can gain enough energy from the field it will be able to collide with another gas atom and cause a further ionisation. So one electron has now produced two: the original one plus the one from this second ionisation. Both of these can go on to accelerate and ionise again. The number of electrons in the space builds up rapidly and eventually the air contains enough electrons in one region to allow a spark to jump from wire to plate. This is known as a cascade process.
You have seen that
1. Radioactive particles are often detected using ionisation. Examples include the spark Geiger–Müller tube, the cloud and bubble chambers, and photographic detection methods. 2. Such methods show us where the particles have caused ionisation. They are not direct particles themselves. 3. Some methods rely on a cascade process in which ions are multiplied by successive strong electric field. detector, the detections of the ionisations in a
Also try
TAP 519: Particle Detectors
74
INDEX
Practical advice
Students may need close supervision in using this apparatus. They will also need guidance in the correct earth setting to avoid electric shock. The instructions provided in the activity may need to be altered to suit the style of spark detector you have.
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Wire carefully, EHT supply in use
Social and human context
Every time your teeth are xrayed, ionisation processes are used to expose the film. The ubiquitous Geiger–Müller tube involves a controlled cascade between the central wire and the outer cylinder inside the tube. We rely heavily on the ionising effects of radiation for its detection.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18 activity 50E
75
INDEX
Episode 510: Properties of radiations
The focus of this episode is the properties of ionizing radiations. It is a good idea to introduce these through a consideration of safety.
Summary
Discussion: Ionising radiation and health. (10 minutes) Demonstration: Deflection of beta radiation. (10 minutes) Student activity: Completing a summary table. (10 minutes) Student experiment: Inverse square law for gamma radiation. (30 minutes) Discussion: Safety revisited. (5 minutes)
Discussion: Ionising radiation and health
Why are radioactive substances hazardous? It is the ionising property of the radiation that makes it dangerous to living things. Creating ions can stimulate unwanted chemical reactions. If the radiation has enough energy it can split molecules. Disrupting the function of cells may give rise to cancer. Absorption of radiation exposes us to the risk of developing cancer. Thus it is prudent to avoid all unnecessary exposure to ionising radiation. All deliberate exposure must have a benefit that outweighs the risk. Radioactive contamination is when you get a radioactive substance on, or inside, your body (by swallowing it or breathing it in or via a flesh wound). The contaminating material then irradiates you. How can you handle sources safely in the lab? Point out that you will be safe if you follow your local rules which will incorporate the following: • • • • • always handle sources with tongs point the sources away from your body (and not at any anybody else) fix the source in a holder which is not adjacent to where your body will be when you take measurements replace sources in leadlined containers as soon as possible wash hands when finished
76
INDEX
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Demonstration: Deflection of beta radiation
Show the deflection of β by a magnetic field. (Make sure you have a small compass to determine which are the N and S poles of the magnet.) Is the deflection consistent with the LH rule? (Yes; need to recall that electron flow is the opposite of conventional current.) Why is this demo is no good with the α source? (α particles are absorbed too quickly by the air.) alpha gamma
magnetic field
beta
NB The diagram above is common in
textbooks, but is ONLY illustrative. For the curvature shown of beta particles, the curvature of the alpha tracks would be immeasurably small.
Student activity: Completing a summary table
Display the table, with only the headings and first column completed. Ask for contributions, or set as a task; compile results. TAP 5101: α, β and γ radiation
77
INDEX
name alpha beta gamma
symbol α β γ
nature particle particle wave
elec charge +2 1 0
"stopped by" mm air; paper mm Al cm Pb *
ionising "power" very good medium relatively poor
what is it? He nucleus very fast electron electromagnetic radiation
Can you see any patterns in the table? (Most ionising  the largest electrical charge  is the least penetrating.) Can you explain this? (The most ionising lose energy the quickest.) How can the electrical charge determined? Deflection in a magnetic field.) * NB Gamma radiation is never completely absorbed (unlike alpha and beta) it just gets weaker and weaker until it cannot be distinguished form the background.
Student experiment: Inverse square law for gamma radiation
Note: since you are unlikely to have sufficient gamma sources for several groups to work simultaneously, this experiment can be part of a circus with others in the next episode. Alternatively, it could be a demonstration. Gamma radiation obeys an inverse square law in air since absorption is negligible. (Radiation spreads out over an increasing sphere. Area of a sphere = 4 π r2, so as r gets larger, intensity will decrease as 1/r2. The effect of absorption by the air will be relatively small. TAP 5102: Range of gamma radiation (Some students could do an analogue experiment with light, with an LDR or solar cell as a detector.) When detecting γ radiation with a Geiger tube you may like to aim the source into the side of the tube rather than the window at the end. The metal wall gives rise to greater ‘secondary electron emission’ than the window and this increase the detection efficiency. Correct readings for background.
Radioactive source
How can we get a straight line graph? We to scaler/ratemeter expect I ∝ r2, so a plot of I versus r–2 should be direct proportion (i.e. a straight line through the origin). It is much easier to see if a graph is a straight line, rather than a particular curve. Lift the graph and look along the line – it’s easy to spot a trend away from linear. However, two points are worth noting: (i) Sealed γ sources do not radiate in all directions, so do not expect perfect 1/r2 behaviour, and (ii) you do not know exactly
78
INDEX
where in the Geiger tube the detection is taking place, so plotting I1/2 against r gives an intercept, the systematic error in the measurement.
Discussion: Safety revisited
Return briefly to the subject of safe working. Background radiation is, say, 30 counts per minute. How far from a gamma source do you have to be for the radiation level to be twice this? Would this be a safe working distance? (Probably.) How much has your lifetime dose of radiation been increased by an experiment like the above? (Perhaps one hour at double the background radiation level – a tiny increase. It will be safe enough to carry out a few more experiments.)
79
INDEX
TAP 5101: α, β and γ radiation
Using your knowledge from pre16 level work, or using information from textbooks, draw up a table to summarise the properties of α, β and γ radiation. The table below provides a framework for your summary. Write items from the following list into appropriate cells of the table. Note that some of the items are not needed and some may be used more than once.
80
INDEX
Practical Advice
Some text books may be needed.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DIG, activity 25
81
INDEX
TAP 5102: Range of gamma radiation
Penetrating electromagnetic radiation
Gamma radiation is emitted by a nucleus in order to drop from an excited state to a more stable one. Gamma rays are highfrequency members of the electromagnetic spectrum. In this activity you will assess the penetrating power of gamma rays and also the way in which their intensity changes with distance.
You will need
gamma source and holder set of absorbers: various thicknesses of lead a Geiger–Müller tube and associated power supply suitable means for mounting the GM tube a fixed measurable distance from the source forceps or tweezers for handling the radioactive source stop clock metre rule micrometer screw gauge or vernier calliper for making thickness measurements set square
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Making measurements
1. Set up the GM tube and counter to take a background reading. This background value will need to be subtracted from each subsequent reading you take when using the gamma source. Fix the gamma source 10–15 cm from the front window of the GM tube (do not remove any plastic cap that is protecting it). The separation of the source and counter and the orientation of the source must be fixed – not too hard to see why so take care. (Because we are investigating absorption, we want a fixed geometry so that the results are not confused by the inverse square law effect investigated later.) Take a reading of the number of gamma photons over a sensible time period and convert this to a rate of arrival per second. Insert one of your lead sheets between the tube and source close to the GM tube, finding the new count rate for each absorber thickness. Be sensible – a short preliminary
2.
3. 4.
82
INDEX
experiment using a very thin absorber and a very thick one in order to get a feeling for the range of count rates that you will encounter will save you time later. You can also plot as you go (count rate against thickness of lead), looking for patterns and anomalies.
Analysis
5. Try to find the thickness of lead for which half the incident gamma radiation is absorbed. Is the pattern exponential? Can you check?
Comparisons with beta particles
(To be done if your class has carried out the activity dealing with the range of beta particles. TAP episode 5112) 6. 7. 8. Do the gamma rays penetrate further into the lead than beta particles? Which are the better ionisers? Plot a graph of corrected count rate against thickness. Draw a smooth curve through the points. If you have carried out the 'more sophisticated analysis' for beta particles you might like to repeat the logarithmic plot here too.
The inverse square law – a fresh start
Theory predicts that electromagnetic radiation should vary with distance according to an inverse square rule. With a little care, you can test this. 1. Remove the lead sheets – they are not needed again – and move the gamma source closer to the tube. This starting distance must not be so close that your GM tube is overwhelmed by counts and misses some out. Some trial and error may be needed. Measure the distance from the thin window of the GM tube to the front of the source. A possible way to do this is to use a set square to transfer the measurement to a metre rule taped to the bench. Obtain the average count rate for this distance. Repeat the experiment over a wide range of distances, taking care with the alignment of the sources. Does the inverse square law describe your results?
2.
3. 4. 5.
A more careful analysis
You measured a distance from the window of the GM tube to the front of the source. This leads to two problems: the source itself is on a foil and lies a few millimetres behind the wire mesh of its holder and the average detection point is somewhere inside the GM tube. Theory predicts that the intensity of the gamma rays varies with the inverse square of the distance:
y∝
1 x2
which can be rewritten as
83
INDEX
y =
k x2
However, the two problems mean that the true value of x is unknown and that it should be written as x + c where c is a correction that converts your (inaccurate) measurement of distance x into the correct value. So the equation becomes
y = 1
(x + c )2
and a plot of y against x2 will not be a straight line. The trick is to take square roots of both sides:
y
1 2
=
(x + c )
1
leading to
1 y
1 2
= x+c
So if the gamma rays obey an inverse square law, a plot of 1 / y1/2 against x ought to be a straight line. The intercept on the xaxis will give you an estimate of c, the error in the distance determination. Plot your data in this way and decide if they verify the inverse square law.
You have seen that
1. 2. Gamma radiation is very penetrating. It will go through metres of lead and concrete. Gammas are poor ionisers. Half thicknesses can be measured, to characterise absorbers. Gamma rays, like all electromagnetic radiation, obey the inverse square law. Double your distance from the source and you reduce the intensity by four times.
84
INDEX
Practical advice
Students will need to take care with the measurements, particularly with alignments. You may choose to make up apparatus to allow this to be easily controlled. The more careful analysis is only for mathematically competent students. It can be omitted without loss.
Be safe
Follow local rules for using radioactive sources.
Social and human context
Nuclear reactors and other nuclear machines are surrounded by huge amounts of concrete or lead to prevent the radiation emitted during the reactions causing a hazard to us. (When would you choose concrete and when lead? When there is room for lots of concrete, it is used because it is much cheaper than lead.)
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 110E
85
INDEX
Episode 511: Absorption experiments
This gives students the opportunity to work with radioactive sources. Radioactive source
Absorbing material
Absorbing material holder
Summary
Student experiments: Absorption of radiation + report back. (40 minutes) Demonstration: Absorption of radiation by living matter Student experiment: (optional)
Student experiments
Groups could work in parallel and report back to a plenary session. Remind them to correct for the background count (taken at least twice – at the start and end of the main experiments and the two results averaged). Range of alpha radiation TAP 5111: Use a spark counter, Range of beta radiation TAP 5112: The range of beta particles in aluminium and lead Range of gamma radiation An optical analogue for the absorption of γs by lead is the absorption of light by successive microscope slides.
86
INDEX
TAP 5113: Absorption in a liquid Absorption of γs is an example of exponential decrease – check the data for a constant ‘half thickness’, thus suggesting the type of physics involved. (Each mm of absorber is reducing the intensity by the same fraction.) TAP 5114: Absorbing radiations
Demonstration: Absorption of radiation by living matter
To simulate the absorption of radiation by living matter use slices of different vegetables as absorbers, or a slice of bacon to represent human flesh. TAP 5115: Absorption in biological materials
Student experiments: Optional
The first requires a sealed radium226 source. Because Ra226 is the parent to a chain of radioactive daughters, granddaughters and so on, you get a mixture of αs, βs and γs emitted. Challenge students to use absorbers to establish that all three radiation types are being emitted. (The maximum energies are: α = 7.7 MeV, β = 3.3 MeV, γ = 2.4 MeV). The second is an extension of the βabsorption experiment. You could speculate that some β particles might be ‘backscattered’ (like Rutherford’s α particle scattering that first demonstrated the existence of the nucleus). A quick try shows that some β particles are indeed backscattered.
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body. Deliberately placing a radioactive source in contact with the skin would increase your dose of ionising radiation unnecessarily and increase the risks to your health. This is a criminal offence.
87
INDEX
TAP 511 1: Use a spark counter
The alpha particle is one type of emission that is possible from the nuclei of some atoms. This activity allows you to investigate how far these alphas can travel in air and other materials.
You will need
spark counter and leads EHT power supply, 0–5 kV, dc metre rule set of absorbers including very thin tissue paper plane mirror alpha source and a suitable holder (since a spark counter does not respond to betas or gammas, the source does not have to be a pure alpha source.) plastic tweezers for handling the absorbers
Starting out
If you have not used a spark counter before, then make sure you know how it works.
Wire carefully, EHT supply in use
Although school EHT supplies are currentlimited ad safe, using the extra limiting resister (e.g. 50 MΩ) reduces the shock current to a trivial level.
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Support the alpha source in a holder about 10 cm from the active region of the spark counter, so that no sparking occurs. You need to be able to vary and measure this distance. If you are using a ruler, remember that you can use a plane mirror to align the pupil of your eye, the plate and the wires in the same plane. To set up the spark counter at its correct working voltage, find the setting which gives a spark with no source and then reduce the voltage slightly. Remember that it uses high voltages that could give you an electric shock.
88
INDEX
Retort stand with clamp
Radioactive source in holder
absorber when needed
0V
+ 5000 V
_
EHT
+
Gradually move the source towards the detector. Take care here, do not touch the source, detector wires or plate. At what distance do the sparks start? Does the sparking begin suddenly or does it start gradually? Try to explain what you see in terms of the initial energies of the alpha particles as they leave the nuclei. If you can, change the alpha source to one in which the alpha particles are emitted from a different nucleus. Is the distance at which sparking starts the same? Again, try to explain this. Leave the source at a distance such that sparking is occurring freely. Insert thin materials between the detector and the source (use tweezers to avoid getting close to the source). Draw up a table of how effective the absorber materials are at stopping the alpha particles. You might like to see if you can think of some property of the absorber which determines its effectiveness, to check for patterns.
You have seen that
1. The alpha particles emitted from one isotope all leave with the same energy. They tend to lose this energy by collision (ionisation) with the air molecules at about the same rate and so the sparking stops suddenly as the source is moved away from the counter. Alpha particles are good ionisers. So, conversely, they are poor at penetrating substances. Even the thinnest of materials will absorb them
2.
89
INDEX
Practical advice
This short experiment needs care by the students or teachers carrying it out. You may prefer to demonstrate the result, at the same time emphasising the meanings of ionisation and the cascade process that is going on in the electric field produced by the spark counter. There are useful estimation possibilities here for brighter students: the strength of the electric field, the relative acceleration of the electron and the oxygen / nitrogen ion, and so on.
Be safe
The student text contains safety warnings, but it would be as well to remind the students that there are both high potentials and radioactive materials here. Some models of spark counter have a lead designed for connection to a pulse counter and the terminal plug could float at a high voltage, although it is designed not to. It is as well to tape the plug up when not in use. Since the use with a counter enables quantitative studies, it would be unwise to remove it. Ensure the most accessible electrode of the spark counter is earthed.
Wire carefully, EHT supply in use
Although school EHT supplies are currentlimited ad safe, using the extra limiting resister (e.g. 50 MΩ) reduces the shock current to a trivial level.
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 70E
90
INDEX
TAP 511 2: The range of beta particles in aluminium and lead
The background
Beta particles are emitted by the unstable nuclei of some radioactive atoms. They consist of electrons given out when a neutron in the nucleus converts to a proton plus an electron. The electron is too energetic to remain inside the nucleus and is ejected. The beta particles are particles that can ionise materials through which they pass and they will continue to move through these materials until they have completely used up all the energy they had when they left the nucleus. In this experiment you will look at the thickness of material needed to absorb the electron, in other words to take away all its energy.
You will need
pure beta source and suitable holder radiation sensor, beta sensitive, e.g. end window GM tube with ratemeter or scaler (counter) set of absorbers suitable method for holding the absorbers forceps or tweezers for manipulating the absorbers and the source suitable means for measuring the thickness of the absorbers, e.g. micrometer screw gauge, vernier calliper, etc
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Measurements…
This activity requires the use of a radiation sensor, counter and power supply. Ensure that you know how to use them before you begin. 1. Set up the sensor and counter to take a background reading. This background value will need to be subtracted from each subsequent reading you take when using the beta source. Fix the beta source probably 10–20 cm from the front window of the sensor (do not remove any plastic cap that is protecting it). The separation of source and counter and the orientation of the source must be fixed – not too hard to see why so take care. Take a reading of the number of beta particles over a sensible time period and convert this to a rate of arrival per second. If this number is greater than 1000, increase the separation
2.
3.
91
INDEX
of source and sensor and take another reading. (A ratemeter will give counts per second directly.) 4. Beginning with the aluminium foils and sheets, insert absorbers of varying thickness into the space between the source and the sensor, finding the new count rate for each absorber thickness. Be sensible – a short preliminary experiment using a very thin absorber and a very thick one in order to get a feeling for the range of count rates that you will encounter will save you time later. You can also plot as you go (count rate against thickness of aluminium), looking for patterns and anomalies.
… and analysis
5. 6. How thick does the aluminium have to be in order to reduce the count rate by onehalf? Use your graph to benefit from the smoothing present in all the data you have gathered. If possible, use the graph to estimate what extra thickness reduces the count rate to onequarter of what it was at the start. Is it the same as that required to reduce it by half? (It should NOT be!) You should look for a pattern. Repeat the experiment with lead absorbers. Does the lead obey the same rule as the aluminium?
7. 8.
Comparisons
You can repeat the measurements and analysis for different materials, if provided.
You have seen that
1. Different materials are able to absorb beta particles by different amounts. The ability to absorb depends on factors such as the extent to which the material is ionised by the betas and the density of the material (the number of atoms a beta meets per unit length of its travel).
Note on absorption of beta versus gamma radiation
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics; which has treated beta radiation as being absorbed in the same way as gamma radiation; however, this is not strictly correct. Betas gradually lose energy as they pass through an absorber so that they become easier to stop as they approach the end of the path.
Practical advice
Students require some skills before they can tackle this experiment: 1. 2. 3. Knowledge of safe handling techniques for the radioactive sources. The ability to set up a radiation sensor and counter or ratemeter correctly. If the power supply has a variable output, students will need to be told the correct p.d. for the tube. A knowledge of the importance of the background count.
92
INDEX
You may need to tell your students an appropriate time over which they should count the arrival of betas in order to give sensible statistics and values. A trial will calibrate your beta sources with your sensors. Slower students might stop after point 7.
Be safe
Students need to be confident and safe in their handling of the source in this activity. You might like to consider having special holders made up for the sensor and source, which allow the alignment and separation to be easily maintained, or use a radioactivity bench which you may already have.
Technician's note
The range of thicknesses of supplied foils in any one material will need to be sufficient to ensure that students can actually reduce the count rate by a half. Ideally, they should be able to see a reduction well beyond this ratio in order to answer the question in point 9 of the activity. Note that some sensors have a plastic cap that is loaded with atoms of high atomic number to improve the gamma sensitivity. This cap should be removed for beta counting.
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Social and human context
This property of absorption is important to us. A number of devices use it, a good example being the film badges worn by personnel involved in work with radioactive materials. The varying thicknesses of absorber in these badges enable the assessment of absorbed energies once the film has been developed.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 90E
93
INDEX
TAP 511 3: Absorption in a liquid
An analogue for the absorption of gamma radiation.
Absorption and energy transfer
Absorption occurs when light travels through a medium – whether air or a liquid or a transparent solid. Transfer of energy from light to the medium occurs with absorption. The more absorption, the more energy is transferred. This experiment, which can be tackled at a number of levels, will help you to understand the way in which the energy is removed from the light beam. This is a particularly important piece of physics in the manufacture and the technology of glass fibre optics.
Collect these
absorption tank power supply 5 V dc LED and a suitable phototransistor digital multimeter copper (II) sulfate solution, about 5% by volume
What to do
1. Connect up the circuit as shown.
10k
mA
2. Be especially careful with the polarity of the power supplies. You could easily damage the phototransistor by connecting the supply the wrong way round. Ask your teacher to check if you are unsure. 3. Light emitted from the LED passes through the copper sulfate and is detected by the phototransistor circuit. The output shown on the meter is a measure of the intensity (brightness) of the light emerging from the liquid after absorption has taken place.
94
INDEX
water phototransistor
LED
copper sulphate
4. Slide the tank between the light source and detector at 90° to the direction in which the light is shone. By sliding the tank in this way you can vary the thickness of copper (II) sulfate solution through which the light travels and therefore assess the loss of intensity. 5. Plot a graph of meter reading (a measure of intensity, remember) against solution thickness. 6. You can take this analysis as far as you wish: Is there an obvious rule which describes the variation shown in your graph? Have you met such a rule in science before? (Hint: how does the radioactive countrate change when a radioactive isotope decays?) Why does this rule apply? 7. Find out how thick the liquid has to be to absorb half the light. 8. Could you simulate the absorption experiment here on a computer or a calculator? (Hint: imagine that there are 100 units of light energy coming out of the light and that every 0.1 mm 1% of the energy remaining is removed. How much is left after the first 0.1 mm, answer: 99 units, after 0.2 mm 99% of 99 units [0.9801 units], after 0.3 mm 99% of 99% of 99 units [0.9703 units]. Use a spreadsheet to carry out this tedious calculation for 100 mm, 200 mm, 300 mm, and so on.)
The relationship between amount of light absorbed and thickness of absorbing medium
Light is absorbed when it passes through a medium – however transparent it appears to be. A constant fraction of the incident light is removed per unit distance travelled. Mathematically, this is known as an exponential relationship. Radioactive decay is another phenomenon involving an exponential relationship – leading to the idea of halflife of an isotope, the time taken for half the number of radioactive atoms in a sample to decay. In a similar way we can think of a 'halfdistance', in light absorption, over which half the light is absorbed.
95
INDEX
Practical advice
The lightabsorbing properties of materials are not required by the specification, but this may be of interest to some students. The equipment needed here is easy to build. It requires a phototransistor and a lightemitting diode. The circuit is shown in the diagram(s). One power supply will suffice for both halves of the circuit. The LED and transistor need to face each other across a gap of perhaps 1012 cm. In trials the devices were rigidly mounted as shown in the diagram, but they could be free standing. This, however, needs careful alignment. In the gap sits a rectangular tank of dimensions 10 cm x 30 cm. These dimensions are not critical. A vertical barrier separates the two halves of the tank. One half is filled with water, the other half with the 5% (w/v) copper (II) sulfate solution. The arrangement is known as a Bjerrum wedge and is used for colorimetric measurements. Students slide the wedge between the light source and detector. They measure output as a function of sulfate solution thickness. Some adjustment of solution strength may be needed.
Alternative approaches
Ghost tape provides an appropriate reduction intensity for some light sources and sensors (TLS 250 and a 36 W lamp). Here discrete values of tape enable exponential thinking to get to grips with the problem. If one piece lets through X%, then two pieces will let through X% squared, etc
Social and human context
Fibre optics has only become possible because of the huge advances in the manufacture of low attenuation glasses.
Safety
Copper sulfate solution can be harmful. At this concentration, no washing label is required. If you get the solution on your hands or elsewhere wash it off immediately
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 4, 240E
96
INDEX
TAP 511 4: Absorbing radiations
Shielding from xrays and gamma rays
intensity I penetrating thickness x exponential decrease of intensity with thickness fraction absorbed ∝ extra thickness dI/I = –µ dx intensity decreases exponentially I = exp (–µx) I0 ln 2 halfthickness x1/2 = µ
Ways photons are absorbed or lose energy thickness x 1. ionise atom or put atom in higher energy level 2. scattering from electrons halfthickness of absorber Absorption by successive thicknesses 3. electron–positron pair production (important at high energies) Halfthicknesses photon energy 200 keV xray 1 MeV γ ray concrete 25 mm lead 0.5 mm
intensity reduced to one half by each block
50 mm
10 mm
Here shielding is related to the absorption of a constant fraction of the radiation in each thickness of absorber traversed.
97
INDEX
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 10 O (O stands for ‘O.H.T’.)
98
INDEX
TAP 511 5: Absorption in biological materials
Closer to home
Relating radiation to risk means thinking about how ionising radiations interact with you and other biological materials. Simple measurements could show you how much the radiation penetrated, and how much energy it deposited in each cubic metre of you. Although these two are related, you can do a fairly simple sum, based on the energy per particle for a known source, and the activity, to suggest that the sources available to you in the laboratory are very unlikely to produce temperature rises that you can easily measure. So the energy delivered is probably beyond what can easily be achieved in the school laboratory. Here you measure how the quantity of radiation varies as you alter the thickness of biological materials though which it has to pass. For ethical reasons, use fruit and vegetables.
You will need
radiation sensor, beta sensitive samples of fresh fruits and vegetables (marrow, apple etc) an apple corer sharp knife (a plastic one might be advisable) pure beta source and holder forceps or tweezers for manipulating the absorbers
Radioactive sources
Follow the local rules for using radioactive sources, in particular do not handle radioactive sources without a tool or place them in close proximity to your body.
Alignment and arrangement
Take a sample of the fruit, using the apple corer to obtain a cylindrical specimen, then a knife to trim it to length.
99
INDEX
marrow
β source
radiation detector
Take care to maintain the alignment of the source and detector throughout the experiment. You will probably want to take measurements at both extremes (no absorbing material, maximum thickness) to make sure that you are likely to get a reasonable variation in count rate – this should help you decide appropriate lengths of time over which to take each count. Now you will probably need to take perhaps 10 readings to establish a reasonable pattern: for 8 cm of absorber, every 0.5 cm might be suitable for your source.
Making sense
See if you can spot a pattern in your results, and then use a sensible analysis to show that the pattern holds. You should draw on other work done on absorption, from chapter 4 onwards, to help suggest likely patterns. Alternatively you may be able to think of sound physical reasons for one pattern. Do not forget about the background count!
Reflections
Try again with another fruit, or compare your results with those of another group working with a different fruit. Look for similarities and differences. Can you draw any conclusions from these? Can you test any hunches that you might have? You have worked with beta radiation, as it has suitable properties for use in the school laboratory, allowing measurements with the equipment that you have access to. In what ways would you expect the results to change if you used alpha or gamma radiation? (Your expectations should be based on sound physical reasons!)
You have shown
How the count rate varies as beta radiation passes through differing biological tissues.
100
INDEX
101
INDEX
Practical advice
To keep the alignment constant you might like to make a jig for the source and detector, with a channel to hold the cylinder of fruit between the two. This channel might usefully be plastic, and removable, to allow for cleaning. The design should also not encourage fruit juices to dribble into either the source or detector. The distance between the source and detector should remain constant, in the range 5–10 cm. The denser the specimen, and the more feeble the beta source, the shorter the cylinder you should use. The fruit or vegetable you choose to use will depend on the season.
Social and human context
Many bags of saline solution, as perhaps a suitable description of many biological systems, might be employed as models for humans – our usual concern when discussing risk. You might use this as an introduction to the appropriateness of some choices, reflecting on the modelling process and its assumptions.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 100E
102
INDEX
Episode 512: Nuclear equations
Now that your students are familiar with different types of radiation, you can look at the processes by which they are emitted.
Summary
Discussion: Nuclide notation and NZ plot. (10 minutes) Student Questions: Practice with notation. (10 minutes) Worked Examples: Equations for alpha, beta and gamma decay. (20 minutes) Student Questions: Practice with nuclear equations. (30 minutes)
Discussion: Nuclide notation
Revise nuclide notation:
A Z
X
Discuss how A = mass or nucleon number, Z = charge or atomic number and N = neutron number are related (A = Z + N). Discuss isotopes (common examples: H, D and T, U235 and U238, C14 and C12). Set the task of finding out the name for nuclides having the same A but different Z (isobars), and the same N but different Z (isotones). Show an NZ plot (Segrè plot).
Neutron number
n
p + β + ν
A
ββ+ B
p
n + β+ + ν
Proton number
103
INDEX
Student questions: Practice with notation
Set some simple questions involving nuclide notation. TAP 5121: Nuclide notation
A, Z1 Nucleon number (A)
A, Z
A, Z+1
β+
β
α
A4, Z2
Proton number (Z)
Neutron number (N)
β+
N+1, Z1 N, Z
N2, Z2 N1, Z+1
βα
104
Proton number (Z)
INDEX
Grid showing change in A and Z with different emissions Worked examples: Equations for alpha, beta and gamma decay
Nuclear decay processes can be represented by nuclear equations. The word equation implies that the two sides of the equation must ‘balance’ in some way. TAP 5122: Decay processes You could give examples of equations for the sources used in school and college labs. α sources are americium241,
241 95
241 95
Am
Am → 237 Np + 4 He. 93 2
90 38
β sources are strontium90,
90 38
Sr
Sr → 90 Np + 39
0 −1
e.
The underlying process is: n –> p + e + ν Here, ν is an antineutrino. Your specification may require you to explain why this is needed to balance the equation. You can translate n –> p + e into the AZ notation:
1 0
n →1 H + 1
0 −1
e.
60 27 60 28
γ sources are cobalt60 decay of the 27 Co . The
60
Co . The γ radiation comes from the radioactive daughter 60 Ni of the β 28
Ni is formed in an ‘excited state’ and so almost immediately loses the
energy by emitting a γ ray. They are only emitted after an α or β decay, and all such γ rays have a welldefined energy. (So a cobalt60 source which is a pure gamma emitter must be designed so that betas are not emitted. How? – (by encasing in metal which is thick enough to absorb the betas but which still allows gammas to escape.)
Student questions: Practice with nuclear equations
TAP 5123: Practice with nuclear equations The more unusual decay processes (positron emission, neutron emission, electron capture) could be included, and students challenged to write them as nuclear equations.
105
INDEX
TAP 5121: Nuclide notation
A periodic table may be needed 1 Write down the nuclear notation ( Z X ) for: (a) an alpha particle
A
(b)
a proton
(c)
a hydrogen nucleus
(d)
a neutron
(e)
a beta particle
(f)
a positron.
2 Write down the nuclear notation ( Z X ) for (a) carbon 13
A
(b)
nitrogen 14
(c)
neon 22
(d)
tin 118
106
INDEX
(e)
iron 54
107
INDEX
Answers
1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) 2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) carbon13
13 6
an alpha particle a proton 1 H or 1 p
1 1
4 2
He
a hydrogen nucleus 1 H a neutron
1 0
1
n
0 −1
a beta particle a positron.
0 +1
e
e
C N
nitrogen14 neon22 tin118 iron54
22 10
14 7
Ne
118 50 54 26
Sn
Fe
108
INDEX
TAP 5122: Decay processes
Radioactive decay processes
α decay Z N α
Z–2 N–2 proton number Z β– decay Z N Z+1 N–1
2 fewer protons 2 fewer neutrons
β–
ν proton number Z β+ decay β+ Z–1 N+1 Z N proton number Z γ decay ν
1 less proton 1 more neutron 1 more proton 1 less neutron
Z N
γ
proton number Z
same protons and neutrons
109
INDEX
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 90O
110
INDEX
TAP 5123: Practice with nuclear equations
1 The isotope 235U decays into another element, emitting an alpha particle. What is the element? This element decays, and the next, and so on until a stable element is reached. The complete list of particles emitted in this chain is: 235 92 U → [α, β, α, β, α, α, α, α, β, α, β] → X. What is the stable element X? (You could write down each element in the series, but there is a quicker way.)
2
The following fission reaction can take place in a nuclear reactor: 235 1 137 95 1 92 U + 0 n→ 55 Cs + [ ] Rb +[ ]0 n.
Complete the equation, showing how many neutrons are produced in the reaction. What is the significance of the number of neutrons produced?
Why are the products of the reaction, caesium137 and rubidium95, likely to be radioactive? What type of decay are these isotopes likely to show?
3
Boron absorbs neutrons with results as follows:
10 5 1 4 B + 0 n → 7 Li+ 2 α . 3
Why is boron suitable for use in a control rod?
4
is irradiated with alpha particles, the products from each aluminium 30 nucleus are a neutron, and a nuclide that emits positrons to give the stable isotope 14 Si . Write nuclear equations for these two processes.
When the isotope
27 13 Al
111
INDEX
5
Complete the following nuclear equations. In each case describe the decay process:
131 53 I
→
Xe +
→
0 −1e
67 0 31Ga + −1e
Zn
11 6C
→
B + 0e 1 → Tc + γ .
99m 43Tc
6
The Manhattan Project, the development of the atomic bomb, led to the discovery of the transuranic elements (elements beyond uranium in the periodic table). Plutonium, element 94, is formed by the bombardment of uranium238 with neutrons. The nuclear equations are:
238 1 239 92 U+ 0 n→ 92 U 239 239 0 92 U→ 93 Np+ −1 e 239 239 0 93 Np→ 94 Pu+ −1 e
Complete the following nuclear equation for the formation of americium:
239 94 Pu 1 +2 0 n →
Am +
0 −1 e.
Curium is produced if plutonium239 is bombarded with alpha particles. If the curium 242 isotope is 96 Cm , complete the equation
239 94 Pu
+
4 2α
→
If curium is made the target for alpha particle bombardment californium is produced. Complete the nuclear equation to find the atomic number of californium:
242 96 Cm
+
4 245 Cf 2 α→
1 + 0 n.
By firing heavier particles such as carbon or boron ions at the target materials heavier elements can be synthesised. Complete the nuclear equation (Lw is lawrencium)
252
Cf +
9 5B
1 → Lw + 4 0 n.
One of the transuranic elements is commonly found in the home. Which is this and where is it used?
112
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions are intended for homework or practice in class.
Answers and worked solutions
1. The complete decay chain involves the loss of seven alpha particles ( 2 α ) and four beta particles ( −1 ). This represents a loss of 7 × 4, i.e. 28, in mass number and (7 × 2 – 4), i.e. 10, in atomic number. X is therefore an isotope with mass number (235 – 28), i.e. 207, and 208 atomic number (92 – 10), i.e. 82. This is lead, 82 Pb .
235 92 U 1 137 0 n→ 55 Cs 95 37 Rb 1 + 3 0 n.
4
0
e
2.
+
+
The reaction produces more neutrons than it absorbs, this will cause a ‘chain reaction’. To see why the products of the reaction are likely to be radioactive you need to consult the plot of neutron number against atomic number for the known stable nuclei. For elements with atomic numbers up to about 30 the number of neutrons in the nucleus is the same as the number of protons if the nucleus is stable. For higher atomic numbers the ratio of 137 neutrons to protons gradually increases to 1.5. Look at the position of both 55 Cs and on the plot and you will see that they both have a considerable excess of neutrons. They are therefore likely to be radioactive. To become more stable the nuclides need to decrease the neutron to proton ratio. The emission of a beta particle does this, increasing the number of protons by one and decreasing the number of neutrons by one. These isotopes are therefore likely to decay by emitting beta particles. 3. When boron captures a neutron it is transformed into a stable isotope. If the control rods are pushed into the reactor more neutrons are absorbed, causing the chain reaction to slow down. If they are pulled out the chain reaction will proceed more vigorously. 4.
27 13 Al 30 15 P
95 37 Rb
+
4 2α
= +
30 15 P 0 1e
+
1 0n
=
30 14 Si
5.
131 131 53 I→ 54 Xe
+
0 −1e
beta decay
11 11 6 C→ 5
B +
0 1e
positron emission
67 0 67 electron capture 31 Ga + −1 e → 30 Zn 99 m 99 nuclear rearrangem ent 43 Tc → 43 Tc
6.
239 1 241 94 Pu + 2 0 n→ 95 Am 239 4 242 94 Pu + 2 α → 96 Cm 242 4 245 96 Cm + 2 α → 98 Cf
+ + +
0 −1e 1 0n 1 0n
252 98 Cf
+
9 257 5 B→ 103 Lw
1 + 4 0 n.
Americium is commonly found in homes where it is used in smoke detectors.
113
INDEX
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 210S
114
INDEX
Episode 513: Preparation for exponential decay topic
In this section, we are not concerned with the products of radioactive decay. Rather, we are looking at the random, spontaneous nature of radioactive decay and its consequences. The key problems students have are (i) thinking erroneously that after two half lives, everything is over, and (ii) understanding the connection between what individual nuclei do, and how a large sample of radioactive nuclei behave.
Depending upon the specification you are following, some of the material is part of the first year or the second year of post16 level course. You will need to adjust the level of mathematics accordingly.
Episode 514: Patterns of decay Episode 515: The radioactive decay formula Episode 516: Exponential and logarithmic equations
Main aims
Students will: 1. Define the term halflife. 2. Make calculations involving numbers of halflives. 3. Relate halflife to decay probability λ. 4. Measure the halflife of a fastdecaying nuclide. 5. Use exponential and logarithmic equations for radioactive decay.
Prior knowledge
Basic, descriptive radioactivity should already have been covered. Students will have previously been introduced to the term halflife, but are unlikely to be confident in using the quantity in calculations.
Where this leads
The mathematics of exponential decay parallels that of capacitor discharge, damped SHM etc, so these would be suitable topics to tackle next. If students have already met these topics, you could usefully spend time drawing the parallels between them.
115
INDEX
Episode 514: Patterns of decay
This episode assumes that students already have an idea of halflife, and links it to the empirical decay curve.
Summary
Discussion and demonstration: Measuring half life. (40 minutes) Worked examples: Involving whole numbers of half lives. (30 minutes) Student example and discussion: Plotting a graph. (30 minutes) Student questions: Calculations. (30 minutes)
Discussion + demonstration: Measuring half life
Each radioactive nuclide has its own unique halflife. Values range from millions of years (e.g. uranium238 at 4.47×109 years) to minute fractions of a second (e.g. beryllium8 at 7×1017 s). Sealed school/college sources have halflives chosen to ensure that they will remain radioactive over a period of years (though Co60 will become significantly less active yearbyyear):
Radiation α
Source americium241
Nuclide
241 95
Notes Also emits gammas The energetic betas come from the daughter Ys90. Also emits betas, but these may be absorbed internally
T1/2
Am
458 y
β
strontium90
90 38
Sr
28.1 y
γ
cobalt60
60 27
Co
5.26 y
You need something else if you are to measure halflife in the course of a lesson. A short halflife source commonly available in schools and colleges is protactinium234, T1/2 = 72s. Another is radon220, T1/2 = 55s.
116
INDEX
Demonstrate the measurement of halflife for one of these. (There is a data logging opportunity here.) It is vital to correct for background radiation. Explain how to find T1/2 from the graph. (Students could repeat this experiment for themselves later.)
Activity (Bq)
200
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
100
T
5
2T
3T
1
4T
Time (s)
Demonstration of half life of protactinium: Measuring half life
TAP 5141: Half life of protactinium
Worked examples: Involving whole numbers of halflives
Here is a set of questions involving integral numbers of half lives. You could set them as examples for your students, or work through them to explain some basic ideas. Question: The nuclear industry considers that after 20 half lives, any radioactive substance will no longer present a significant radiological hazard. The half life of the fission product from a nuclear reactor, caesium137, is 30 years. What fraction will still be active after 20 half lives? Answer: Use the long method. Calculate 1/2 of 1/2 and so on for twenty steps: 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, …, 1/1024 after 10 half lives 1/2048, …, 1/1048576 after 20 half lives i.e. less than one millionth of the original quantity remains radioactive. A quicker method is to calculate (1/2)20. Show how this is done with a calculator, using the yx key. Question: How many years into the future will Cs137 be “safe”? Answer: 20 × 30 = 600 years
117
INDEX
Question: If after ten half lives the activity of a substance is reduced to one thousandth of its original value, how many more half lives must elapse so that the original activity is reduced to one millionth of its original value? Answer: Ten half lives reduces activity by a factor of 1/1000. One millionth = 1/1000 × 1/1000, so ten more half lives are needed.
Student example + discussion: Plotting a graph
Provide your students with the following data. Time /s Activity /Bq 0 10057 5 6253 10 3648 15 2296 20 1403 25 798 30 508 35 307 40 201
Ask them to inspect the data and estimate the halflife. (It lies between 5 and 10 seconds.) Now ask them to plot a graph and thereby determine the half life of the substance. They should deduce a total time of 35 seconds for five halvings of the original activity, gives a half life of 7 seconds. Emphasise the definition of half life T1/2. The half life of a radioactive substance is the time taken on average for half of any quantity of the substance to have decayed. (Check the precise wording of your specification.) Introduce the term exponential to describe this behaviour, in which a quantity decreases by a constant factor in equal intervals of time. TAP 5142: Half life Exponential behaviour in nature is very common. It appears in the post16 specification several times, so this may not be the first time your students have met it. (The equalisation of electric charge on a capacitor C whose plates are connected via a resistor R; the reduction in amplitude of a damped simple harmonic oscillator; the absorption of electromagnetic radiation passing through matter (e.g. γ rays by lead, visible light by glass); Newton’s Law of Cooling. So either refer back to previous situations and make the analogy explicit, or flag forward to other examples to come.
118
INDEX
TAP 514 1: Measuring half life of protactinium
Following your school or college’s safety procedures carefully, measure the halflife of a shortlived radioactive isotope. Plot a suitable graph showing how the activity of the sample changes with time, and hence show that the decay is indeed exponential. Have a spills tray available.
Radioactive sources
Follow the special local rules for using the protactinium source. (Do not open the bottle! To avoid contamination if the plastic bottle should leak, keep the bottle in a tray and wear suitable gloves, a lab coat and eye protection.)
Introduction
The isotope of protactinium 234Pa has a halflife of several tens of seconds. You can monitor its decay using a GM tube connected to a ratemeter or scaler or to a data logging interface and computer, and hence determine its halflife experimentally. The notes here are aimed at explaining how to make the right measurements, but do not proceed until you are sure how to handle the source safely. The precise details of your experiment will vary depending on your school or college’s local rules for handling radioactive sources. Make sure that you are aware of these rules and follow them carefully. The sample of 234Pa is produced by the decay of 238U. Pa234 is the granddaughter of U238: alpha decay to Th234 followed by beta decay to Pa234, as described later. The 238U is in the form of uranyl nitrate dissolved in water and is contained in a sealed plastic bottle. The bottle also contains an oily solvent that floats above the water. The bottle will already have been prepared for you. Do not open the bottle! To avoid contamination if the plastic bottle should leak, keep the bottle in a tray and wear rubber gloves, a lab coat and eye protection. When the bottle is shaken some of the 234Pa in the watery layer dissolves into the oily layer. Once the two layers have separated out no more 234Pa moves into the oily layer, so we have a fixed sample of 234Pa in the oily layer. 234Pa emits energetic beta radiation, which can penetrate the plastic bottle and travel some distance in air. This is the radiation that you will monitor.
Procedure
Without shaking the bottle, set up the apparatus as shown below.
119
INDEX
Measure the background radiation (it comes from the bottle and the lab), counting for a suitably long period. Shake the bottle for about 30 s and place it back in position. Wait for the layers to settle and start the clock. The GM tube window should be close to the oily layer and is best mounted on a retort stand. Take readings from the GM tube as frequently as you can accurately manage until the count rate is the same as the background count.
Analysis of results
Subtract the effects of background radiation from your readings, and hence calculate the counts per second from the 234Pa in the oily layer. This is the corrected count rate (CCR); it corresponds to the activity of the sample. Plot a graph of corrected count rate against time and a graph of log(CCR) against time. Do your graphs correspond to what you already know about exponential decay? Use each graph to calculate the halflife of the 234Pa. (Hint: one of these involves using the gradient.) The accepted value for the halflife of 234Pa is 72 s. Discuss any disparity between your measurement and this accepted value. How great was the uncertainty in your measurement? Which of your two ways of determining T1/2 was the most reliable? What were the main causes of uncertainty in your result? How could you improve on your procedure?
120
INDEX
Practical advice
This is a standard demonstration, the precise details of which will depend on the apparatus you have available. If datalogging is available, then we strongly recommend that you use it. It is vital that students correct the readings for background count. Make sure that students are clear that the halflife of an exponential decay is not exactly the same as the time constant, the latter is the time for a quantity to decay to 1/e of its initial value, not 1/2, and so the halflife is always a bit shorter than the time constant. A discussion of the units for λ and T1/2 can bring out several useful teaching points: • • • • • There is an enormous range of halflives. It is conventional to quote halflives in whatever units are most suitable, and it would be ludicrous always to insist dogmatically on SI units (seconds) to express very long halflives. The decay constant is usually expressed in units that tally with those used for the halflife (e.g. s1, yr1 as appropriate). It is vital always to quote the units of halflife or decay constant – a number on its own would be highly ambiguous. While the halflife and decay constant may have any one of several units, they always have dimensions of time and time 1, respectively.
Some details of the decay may be of use and could be used to give students more experience of writing a set of decay equations. Decays by Decay chain Half Life
238
α U –>
234
β Th –>
234
β Pa –>
234
U
4.5 x 109 /years
24.1 /days
72 /s
2.5 x 105 /years
Pa is extracted from a solution containing the parent 234Th and ’grandparent’ 238U with which it is in equilibrium. Once extracted the decay of 234Pa can be recorded. The recovery of 234Pa can be followed in the aqueous layer if desired. About 95% of the protactinium is removed together with some uranium when the bottle is shaken. The GM tube does not detect the alpha from the 238U or the weak beta particles (about 0.2 MeV) from the 234Th but detects only the energetic (2.32 MeV) beta radiation from the 234Pa.
234
121
INDEX
Technician’s notes
Radioactive sources
Follow the special local rules for using the protactinium source. (Do not open the bottle! To avoid contamination should the bottle leak, keep the bottle in a lined tray and wear suitable gloves, a lab coat and eye protection.)
Apparatus
Thin walled polythene bottle (50 cm3) containing: uranyl nitrate, 2.5 g, dissolved in 7.5ml pure water, concentrated hydrochloric acid, 17.5 ml, 25 ml of amyl acetate (pentyl ethanoate) GM tube + holder Scaler/ratemeter and stopwatch/clock or datalogger Tray lined with paper towel in case of spillage Retort stand, boss and clamp to align the GM tube with the appropriate part of the bottle Dissolve the uranyl nitrate in 7.5 ml water and add the hydrochloric acid. Then add the amyl acetate. Pour into the polythene bottle and screw the cap securely. Putting thin plastic film (e.g. clingfilm) between cap and bottle can help make a better seal. Wear ‘chemical splash’ rubber gloves, a lab coat and eye protection, follow local radiation rules and dispose of any contaminated material safely. A source in a polythene bottle should not be kept for more than 12 months. Polypropylene bottles last longer. Teflon bottles (provided the wall is thin enough to let the betas through) will last 10 years. A recipe based on a 30 ml bottle is on CLEAPSS Recipe Card 57. The bottle should be labelled with the radiation symbol and also TOXIC and IRRITANT It is advisable to check the activity of the solution each year. Some teachers prefer to use fresh solution each time. Uranyl nitrate can be obtained from: TAAB Laboratory Support Limited, 3 Minerva House, Aldermaston RG7 8NA. Tel: 0118 981 7775 Email: _sales@taab.co.uk Prices as of September 2005: 1g for £7.99 and 25g for £69.50.
122
INDEX
External references
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section RftS, Activity 9, which was an adaptation of Revised Nuffield Advanced Physics experiment F6
123
INDEX
TAP 514 2: Half Life
The halflife of strontium90 is 27 years. The halflife of sodium24 is 15 hours. 1. Sketch two curves on one set of axes to show how the number of atoms of each change with time.
Two samples are prepared, one containing 1020 atoms of strontium and the other containing 1020 atoms of sodium. 2. Which of the two samples has the highest activity?
3.
A sample of iodine131, with halflife 8.04 days, has an activity of 7.4 x 107 becquerel. Calculate the activity of the sample after 4 weeks?
4. (a)
234
Th has a half life of 24.1 days.
What fraction of a sample remains after 96.4 days?
(b)
What fraction of a sample remains after 241 days?
124
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
1.
1020 strontium
sodium
0
15
30 t/h
45
60
2. 3.
Sodium, since a longer halflife means the source is less active. First find the number of halflives in 4 weeks:
4 × 7 days = 3.48. 8.04 days
The activity will be:
7.4 × 10 7 Bq 2
3.48
= 6.6 × 10 6 Bq.
4 (a) (b) 96.4/24.1=4 so 4 half lives so (1/2)4 = =1/16 or .0625 241/24.1=10 so 10 half lives (1/2)10 = 1/1024 or 9.8 x 104
External references
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 10, 20S which was an adaptation of Revised Nuffield Advanced Physics question 15 section F.
125
INDEX
Episode 515: The radioactive decay formula
Here, the key idea is the random nature of the decay. Avoid simply pulling pull equations out of the air – at least make them plausible.
Summary
Discussion: The meaning of the decay constant λ. (15 minutes) Discussion: The link with halflife. (15 minutes) Student experiments: Analogue experiments linking probability with decay rates. (20 minutes)
Discussion: The meaning of the decay constant λ.
Start from the definition of the decay constant λ: the probability or chance that an individual nucleus will decay per second. (You may like to comment on the problem with notation in physics. λ is used for wavelength as well as the decay constant. The context should make it unambiguous.) Units: λ is measured in s1 (or h1, year1, etc). If you have a sample of N undecayed nuclei, what will its activity A be? In other words, how many of the N will decay in a second?
A = λN (because the probability for each of the N is λ).
As time passes, N will get smaller, so A represents a decrease in N. To make the formula reflect this, it needs a minus sign.
A = λN
Plausibility: The more undecayed nuclei you have, and the greater the probability that an individual one will decay, the greater the activity of the sample. In calculus notation, this is dN/dT = λN Ask your students to put this equation into words. (The rate of decay of undecayed nuclei N is proportional to the number N of undecayed nuclei present.) This is the underlying relationship in any process that follows exponential decay. More generally: if the rate of change is proportional to what is left to change, then exponential decay follows. Conversely if data gives an exponential decay graph, then you know something about the underlying process. TAP 5151: Smoothed out radioactive decay. TAP 5152: Halflife and time constant.
126
INDEX
Discussion: The link with halflife.
How are λ and T1/2 linked? If a nuclide has a large value of λ, will it have a long or short T1/2? (High probability of decay => it will decay quite quickly => a short half life, and vice versa.) What type of proportionality does this suggest? (Inverse proportion.) Thus λ ~ 1/T1/2. In fact, T1/2 = ln 2/λ = 0.693/λ This is a very important and useful formula. Depending which of λ or T1/2 is easiest to measure experimentally, the other can be determined. In particular it allows very long half lives (sometimes millions of years) to be determined. How could we measure the 4.5 billion year halflife of uranium238? (Take a sample of a known number of U238 atoms; count how many decay in one second. This gives λ, and we can calculate halflife.)
Student experiments (or demonstrations): Analogue experiments linking probability with decay rates.
Explore some analogue systems to reinforce the way in which decay probability is related to halflife. Each gives a good exponential graph. For example: Throw a large number of dice. A 6 represents ‘decayed’, and this dice is removed. Each throw represents the same time interval. Each face has a probability of 1/6 of being upwards on each throw. (A quick way to find out how many remain to decay is to weigh them.) TAP 5153: Modelling radioactive decay
Cubes with differently coloured faces instead of dice can incorporate 3 different ‘decay constants’ e.g. colouring three faces red gives a chance of a red face being uppermost representing decay has a probability of decay of ½; colour two faces blue (chance of decay = 2 x 1/6 = 1/3), and one face yellow (chance of decay 1/6). Sugar cubes can be used, painted with food colouring. Throw drawing pins: decay = point upwards. Safety: beware sharp points! Is the chance of decay = ½? The drop in height of the head on a glass of beer usually shows exponential behaviour – opportunity for a field trip? Water flowing out through a restriction: at any instant the water remaining represents the undecayed nuclei; the water that has flowed out represents the decayed nuclei. Flow rate depends upon the pressure head ~ the height of water remaining ~ quantity of water remaining.
127
INDEX
TAP 5151: Smoothed out radioactive decay
Here is the first step in making a model – idealisation and simplification of a messy process
Smoothed out radioactive decay
Actual, random decay
ΔN ΔN Δt Δt
time t probability p of decay in short time Δt is proportional to Δt: p = λ Δt average number of decays in time Δt is pN Δt short so that ΔN much less than N change in N = ΔN = –number of decays ΔN = –pN ΔN = –λN Δt
ΔN = –λN Δt
Simplified, smooth decay
rate of change = slope dN = dt
time t Consider only the smooth form of the average behaviour. In an interval dt as small as you please: probability of decay p = λ dt number of decays in time dt is pN change in N = dN = –number of decays dN = –pN dN = –λN dt
dN = –λN dt
128
INDEX
129
INDEX
Practical advice
The diagram could be used for an OHT
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 10, display material 10O
130
INDEX
TAP 5152: Halflife and time constant
Here is the relationship between these two, explained
Radioactive decay times
dN/dt = –λ N N0 N/N0 = e–λt
N0 /2 N0 /e
0 t=0 t = t1/2 t = time constant 1/λ
Time constant 1/λ at time t = 1/λ N/N0 = 1/e = 0.37 approx. t = 1/λ is the time constant of the decay Halflife t1/2 at time t1/2 number N becomes N0/2 N/N0 =
1 2
= exp(–λ t1/2)
In 1 = –λt1/2 2 t1/2 = ln 2 = 0.693 λ λ In 2 = loge 2
Halflife is about 70% of time constant 1/λ. Both indicate the decay time
131
INDEX
132
INDEX
Practical advice
The diagram could be used for an OHT
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 10, display material 40O
133
INDEX
TAP 5153: Modelling radioactive decay
Use dice, coins or a computer model to simulate the random decay of radioactive nuclei. Plot a graph showing how the number of remaining ‘nuclei’ changes with time. The chance throw of dice illustrates radioactive decay very clearly. You need a large number (over 100) dice for this activity to work. If you don’t have enough dice, then you will be able to imagine the sort of results you might get, so keep reading. Let’s suppose that an atom of an isotope has a 1 in 6 chance of decaying in any one minute. We can simulate this by throwing a die representing the atom; if a six comes up, we can say that the atom has decayed. Now with 100 or more dice we have a model of a (very small) sample of radioactive isotope. Each time we shake the dice assume that another minute of the sample’s life has passed. In this time more ‘nuclei’ have decayed – the ones that came up six. Shake the dice. Count and remove the sixes. Repeat the procedure, completing a table like table below, until all the dice have ‘decayed’.
If you have time, repeat the whole process. Plot a graph showing how the number of surviving dice changes with time. Plot a graph of log (N ) against t and hence decide whether the decay really is exponential. You could also plot graphs to show how ‘activity’, i.e. the number of decays per minute, varies with time. Use suitable tests to decide whether activity changes exponentially.
134
INDEX
Practical advice
In previous episodes, students may have met examples of exponential change that are all determined by equations that describe the particular situation exactly. Radioactive decay, on the other hand, involves a degree of randomness – this is clear from simple observations such as the production of tracks in a cloud chamber, or listening to ‘clicks’ from a GM counter. The aim of this activity is to demonstrate that a decay process that is governed by independent probabilities can (indeed must) be exponential – an important point, which should not be glossed over. There are a number of simulations of radioactive decay in physics software packages and any of them could be used at this stage. However, students readily understand the laws of probability that govern the throw of dice, so the one outlined on in TAP 5153 remains an excellent demonstration. The ‘experiment’ should take only a few minutes, plus graphplotting time. Another good analogy for radioactive decay is liquid draining from a cylindrical container through a capillary tube. The flowrate is proportional to the pressure due to the liquid, which is proportional to its depth. The rate at which the depth of liquid decreases is thus proportional to the depth itself. A graph of depth against time will be an exponential decay curve, and a loglinear graph will be a straight line. Obtain data by marking the position of the water surface at regular intervals as the water slowly drains from the cylinder.
Technicians’ notes Apparatus dice model
Dice (identical if possible) or small wooden cubes (approx 1 cm3) with one face coloured At least 100 dice or cubes are needed.
Water flow model
wide glass tube (4–5 cm diameter), pierced bung to fit tube capillary tube to fit bung, rubber tube to fit capillary Hoffmann clip clamp, boss and stand marker pen stopwatch container to catch water draining from tube Assemble the apparatus as shown in below, and arrange for the outlet to be over a large container, or sink if conveniently located. Ensure the Hoffmann clip is closed, and fill the wide tube with water.
135
INDEX
Above: Modelling radioactive decay using water flow Alternatively, a computer running a simulation of radioactive decay may be requested.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced physics, A2, STA activity 10.
136
INDEX
Episode 516: Exponential and logarithmic equations
Students may find this mathematical section difficult. It is worth pointing out that they have already covered the basic ideas of radioactive decay in the earlier episodes.
Summary
Discussion: The exponential decay equation. (15 minutes) Student question: An example using the equation (20 minutes) Discussion: The logarithmic form of the equation. (15 minutes) Worked example: Using the log equation. (20 minutes) Student questions: Practice calculations. (60 minutes) Discussion (optional): Using Lilley’s formula. (15 minutes)
Discussion: The exponential decay equation
Explain that the equation N = N0 eλt can be used to generate an exponential decay graph. Work through a numerical example, perhaps related to the dicethrowing analogue (N0 = 100; λ = 1/6). Make sure that your students know how to use the ex key on their calculators. Emphasise that similar equations apply to activity A (A = A0 eλt) and count rate C (C = C0 eλt). (Not all the radiation emitted in all directions by a source will collected by a detector lined up in one direction from a source)
Student question: An example using the equation
Set students the task of drawing a graph for a lab source, e.g. Co60 (λ = 0.132 y1, C0 = 200 counts s1). They should first calculate and tabulate values of C at intervals of 1 year, and then draw a graph. From the graph, deduce halflife. Does this agree with the value from T1/2 = ln 2/ λ = 0.693/ λ?
Discussion: The logarithmic form of the equation
Point out that a straight line graph is usually more useful than a curve, particularly when dealing with experimental data. Introduce the equation lnN = lnN0  λt. Emphasise that this embodies the same relationship as the exponential equation. Use a sketch graph to how its relationship to the straight line equation y = mx + c (intercept = lnN0, gradient = −λ).
137
INDEX
Worked example: Using the log equation
Start with some experimental data (e.g. from the decay of protactinium), draw up a table of ln (count rate) against time. Draw the log graph and deduce λ (and hence halflife). The experimental scatter should be obvious on the graph, and hence the value of a straight line graph can be pointed out. You will need to ensure that your students can find natural logs using their calculators.
Student questions: Practice calculations
Your students should now be able to handle a range of questions involving both ex and ln functions. It is valuable to link them to some of the applications of radioactive materials (e.g. dating of rocks or ancient artefacts, diagnosis and treatment in medicine, etc). TAP 5161: Decay in theory and practice TAP 5162: Radioactive decay with exponentials TAP 5163: Radioactive decay used as a clock
Radio Carbon Dating
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
TAP 5164: Two important dating techniques
Discussion (optional): Using Lilley’s formula
Some students may benefit from a simpler approach to the mathematics of radioactive decay, using ‘Lilley’s formula’ f = (1/2) n.
138
INDEX
When first introduced at pre16 level, radioactivity calculations are limited to integral number of half lives. After 1, 2, 3, …, halflives, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, … remains. The pattern here is that after n half lives, a fraction f = (1/2) n remains to decay. This formula works for non integral values of n; i.e. it also gives the fraction remaining yet to decay after any nonwhole number of halflives (e.g. 2.4, or 3.794). To use this formula, a little skill with a calculator is all that is required. For example: The T1/2 of 14C is 5730 yrs. What fraction f of a sample of 14C remains after 10 000 years? Answer:
f = (1/2) n
The number of half lives n = 10 000/5730 = 1.745 Thus the fraction remaining f = (1/2)1.745 And using the yx button on a calculator gives f = 0.298. If students know how to take logs (or can lean the log version of the formula), they can solve other problems: How many years will it take for 99% of 60Co to decay if its half life is 5.23 yr? The fraction remaining = 1%, so f = 0.01. Hence 0.01 = (1/2) n Taking logs of both sides gives ln (0.01) = n ln (1/2) giving n = 6.64 half lives, and so the number of years = 6.64 × 5.23 = 34.7 years.
139
INDEX
TAP 5161: Decay in theory and practice
Fractions and activity
1. In exponential decay the number of atoms remaining after a given interval of time is always the same fraction of the number present at the beginning of the time interval. Therefore, someone might say, however long you wait there will always be some left. A sample of radioactive atoms will last for an infinite time. Is this reasonable? Explain your answer.
2.
The decay constant for caesium137 is 7.3 × 10–10 s–1. Calculate the number of atoms in a sample of caesium137 that has an activity of 2.0 × 105 Bq.
Experimental exponentials
No ordinary place on the Earth’s surface is free from ‘background radiation’. In making a measurement of this background a student set up a GM tube and counter and recorded the counter reading every 30 s.
Time / s
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Count
0 13 31 48 60 75 88 102 119
140
INDEX
3.
Using these data, determine the background count per minute. What would you expect the total count to be after a further 30 seconds?
A radioactive source is set up in front of the same GM tube in the same laboratory. Counter readings of the activity of the source are taken for 1 minute at time intervals of 1 hour.
Time / h
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A / counts min–1
828 510 320 202 135 95 70 51 41 38 37 31 33 34 29 35
4.
What action should be taken to deal with the background count?
5.
Plot a graph to show how the activity of the radioactive substance changes with time and derive from it three different values of the halflife. Calculate the mean of these.
141
INDEX
6.
Worried by the obvious fluctuations in the final hours of the count, one student suggests that it might be wise to continue counting for at least as long again. Is this a good idea? Explain your answer.
7.
There is a slight increase in the count rate towards the end of the experiment. Is this significant? Explain your answer.
8.
Suggest steps you might take to improve the experiment.
142
INDEX
Practical advice
This question compares the theoretical exponential decay with the messy practical situation. This comparison can be used to bring out some of the characteristics of the models.
Answers and worked solutions
1. No. The smooth exponential model provides a good description only when there are a very large number of atoms. However, when the sample is reduced to a few atoms, the model is a poor fit. How long an atom will last on average is known, but it is not possible to say how long one particular atom will last.
2.
dN = −λN dt N= 3. – dN / dt activity 2.0 × 10 5 Bq = = = 2.7 × 10 14 atoms −10 −1 λ λ 7.3 × 10 s
119 counts = 30 counts min −1 4 minutes After further half minute count = 119 + 30 / 2 = 134 counts. background count =
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Subtract the background count from each of the tabulated counts min–1. The halflife is about 80 minutes. The count rate would not change significantly if the counting were continued for a longer period. Very little of the substance remains after 8 hours. No; random fluctuations in the background count rate are probably responsible for this increase. The experiment could be repeated and readings taken at intervals closer than 1 hour during the first few hours.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 10, 30S
143
INDEX
TAP 5162: Radioactive decay with exponentials
1. The halflife of one radioactive isotope of sodium is 2.6 years. Show that its decay constant is 8.4 × 10–9 s–1.
2.
Calculate the activity of a sample containing one mole of the sodium. (One mole contains 6.02 × 1023 atoms.)
A scientist wishes to find the age of a sample of rock. Realising that it contains radioactive potassium, which decays to give a stable form of argon, the scientist started by making the following measurements: decay rate of the potassium in the sample = 0.16 Bq mass of potassium in the sample = 0.6 × 10–6 g mass of argon in the sample = 4.2 × 10–6 g 3. The molar mass of the potassium is 40 g. Show that the decay constant λ for potassium is 1.8 × 10–17 s–1 and its half life is 1.2 × 109 years.
4.
Calculate the age of the rock, assuming that originally there was no argon in the sample and the total mass has not changed. Show the steps in your calculation.
5.
Identify and explain a difficulty involved in measuring the decay rate of 0.16 Bq given above.
6.
Iodine 124, which is used in medical diagnosis, has a halflife of 4.2 days. Estimate the fraction remaining after 10 days.
144
INDEX
7.
Explain how you would find the halflife of a substance when it is known to be more than 10 000 years. Assume that a sample of the substance can be isolated.
In an experiment to find the halflife of zinc63, a sample containing a sample of the radioactive zinc was placed close to a GM tube and the following readings were recorded. The background count rate was 30 min–1.
Time / hours
Counts / min–1
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
259 158 101 76 56 49 37
8.
Plot a graph of count rate against time and use this to find the average time for the count rate to fall to onehalf of its previous value.
9.
Plot a second graph, ln (count rate) against time, and use it to find the halflife.
10.
Discuss which method, 8 or 9, provides a more reliable value.
145
INDEX
Practical advice
The questions provide a variety of kinds of practice, at post16 standard, with radioactive decay, half life and decay constants.
Answers and worked solutions
1.
λ= 2.
A=
ln 2 0.693 = = 8.4 × 10 −9 s ? t 12 2.6 y × 3.16 × 10 7 s y ?
dN = – λN dt
= (8.4 × 10 −9 s −1 ) × (6.02 × 10 23 ) = 5.1 × 1015 Bq
3.
λ= =
dN / dt N 0.16 Bq [(0.6 × 10 ln 2 λ 0.693 1.8 × 10 −17 s −1
−6
g)/40 g] × (6.02 × 10 23 )
= 1.8 × 10 −17 s −1 t1 2 = =
= 3.85 × 1016 s = 1.2 × 109 years
4.
0.6 × 10 −6 g 1 1 so there have been three halflives. = = 4.8 × 10 −6 g 8 2 3
3 × 1.2 × 10 9 years = 3.6 × 10 9 years
5. 6.
The background count rate is likely to be higher than 0.16 Bq. There have been
10 days 1 = 2.38 halflives. The ratio remaining is 2.38 = 0.19. 4.2 days 2
146
INDEX
7.
Place a GM tube near the sample and measure the count rate over a long period of time. Determine a value for dN/dt. Determine N by chemical means, and from that find λ and T1/2. Subtract the background count rate from all readings. The halflife is about 40 minutes.
first sample half life 200 to 100 in 0.6h + 200 second sample half life 160 to 80 in 0.65h third sample half life 120 to 60 in 0.7h +
0.6 h 0.65 h
8.
average time = 0.65 h ≈ 40 min
100
+
0.7 h
+ + + 0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 t/h 2.5 + 3.0
9.
Corrected count rate / min–1
229 128 71 46 26 19 7
ln corrected count rate / min–1
5.43 4.85 4.26 3.83 3.26 2.94 1.95
147
INDEX
5 4 3 2 1 0 0
+ + +
gradient = –λ = t1 =
2
–2.3 2.0 h
ln 2 ln 2 × 2.0 h = = 0.60 h 2.3 λ = 36 min + +
+ 2.7 – 0.7 = 2.0 h
0.5
1.0
1.5 2.0 t/h
2.5
3.0
10.
The second method is more reliable. By drawing a straight line of best fit in question 9, all the data are being averaged rather than just the three pairs taken from the curve in question 8.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 10, 90S
148
INDEX
TAP 5163: Radioactive decay used as a clock
Because of the predictability of the random behaviour of large numbers of atoms, activity can be used as a clock.
Clocking radioactive decay
Halflife N0 number N of nuclei halves every time t increases by halflife t1/2 slope = activity = Activity dN dt
halves every halflife
N0 /2 N0 /4 N0 /8 t1/2 t1/2 time t
t1/2
t1/2 Radioactive clock
t1/2
time t
In any time t the number N is reduced by a constant factor In one halflife t1/2 the number N is reduced by a factor 2 In L halflives the number N is reduced by a factor 2
L
Measure activity. Activity proportional to number N left Find factor F by which activity has been reduced Calculate L so that 2L = F L = log2F age = t1/2 L
(e.g. in 3 halflives N is reduced by the factor 23 = 8)
149
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can talk through it, or adapt it to your own purposes.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 10, Display material 20O
150
INDEX
TAP 5164: Two important dating techniques
Radiocarbon dating
This technique was devised by American physicist W. F. Libby in 1949. Carbon14 (14C) is a naturally occurring radioactive isotope of carbon which is produced when neutrons associated with cosmic rays collide with nitrogen (14N) in the atmosphere. The 14C is taken up by living organisms (plants, animals); the ratio of 14C to 12C in living tissue remains constant during the life of the organism and depends only on the relative proportions of 14C and 12C present in the atmosphere. (12C is the `ordinary', stable, abundant isotope of carbon.) When the organism dies, the ratio of 14C to 12C decreases because the 14C decays to produce nitrogen:
After about 5700 years (the halflife of 14C), the ratio of 14C to 12C falls to half its initial value; after a further 5700 years the ratio halves again ± and so on. The 14C /12C ratio therefore decreases in a known and predictable way as the sample ages. If the original ratio of 14C /12C is known for an organic sample, say bone, and the present ratio can be measured, then an accurate value for the age of the sample can be calculated. To measure the ratio of 14C to 12C, the sample needs to be ground up, thus destroyed. The 14C in a sample is detected and measured via its radioactive emission, and the concentration of carbon is measured chemically. The method works best on samples containing large quantities of carbon. Thus wood, charcoal, bone and shells of land and sea animals are good archaeological samples. Around 100 g of wood or 30 g of charcoal is required to obtain a date. Bone contains a smaller proportion of carbon so more bone is required than wood (around 1 kg). Around 100 g of shell is required for dating. The precision of the age measurement decreases with age of the sample because the amount of 14C decreases with time. The halflife of 14C is 5730 ± 40 years so the method is most reliable for dating samples no more than a few thousand years old. For a sample about 50 000 years old the uncertainty is about ± 2000 years. The range of radiocarbon dating is at most 100 000 years. The method rests on the assumption that the sample gains no 14C after death, and that the atmospheric ratio of 14C /12C has remained constant with time. It is therefore necessary to compare radiocarbon dates against other independent methods of dating such as dendrochronology. For an article on the radiocarbon method, see:
Radioactive decay. Dobson, K., Physics Review, Vol. 4, No. 2, pp. 1821
A good World Wide Web site for details on the method and much besides is: http://www.c14dating.com/
151
INDEX
Dendrochronology
The name of this method comes from the Greek `dendron' (tree) and `chronos' (time). The crosssection of a tree trunk shows a series of concentric circles known as growth rings. Each growth ring represents one year of the life of the tree. The thickness of each ring depends on the climatic conditions in the year that the ring was laid down. Thus the rings show a distinctive pattern of varying thickness. The same pattern can be seen in timber of different ages and so a pattern covering a considerable period of time can be constructed. Once the pattern has been established and tied to known dates, a pattern in a timber of unknown date can be matched against the established pattern and its date determined. The first person to suggest dendrochronology as a dating method was Thomas Jefferson, one of the first American Presidents, who suggested its use in dating Native American burial mounds. The method can be used with wood grown since the last Ice Age, about 10 000 years ago. One of the longest patterns established is that using the Bristlecone Pine which grows in California. The arid conditions of the area allow samples of the pine to survive in good condition for thousands of years. Apart from its use as an absolute method of dating wood, dendrochronology is also used to calibrate radiocarbon dates. When radiocarbon dates are matched against the tree ring dates, it is found that radiocarbon `years' do not equate directly with calendar years because the amount of 14 C in the atmosphere varies slightly. In general, radiocarbon dating gives a young age for older samples (e.g. a radiocarbon date of 4100 BC may be closer to a real date of 5000 BC). The method does have its limitations. Climatic conditions vary from place to place and so a particular pattern can only be used locally. The wood has to be in a good state of preservation; such wood is difficult to find on archaeological sites. The wood on a site may not indicate the true age of the site. For example, the wood could have been cut down many years before its use on a particular site. And not all types of wood can be used since some types have growth rings of uniform thickness regardless of climatic condition
152
INDEX
Practical advice
This activity summarises two important dating techniques used in modern archaeology.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, AS, DIG additional activity 10
153
INDEX
Episode 517: Preparation for accelerators and detectors topic
Accelerators and detectors
There are over 10,000 accelerators worldwide: 5000 each in medicine (therapy, isotope production) and industry (e.g. used for ion implantation in semi conductors and into metal for hardening etc), plus over 100 used for basic research by a whole range of scientific disciplines. The topic of particle acceleration and detection is useful as it illustrates many aspects of physics which students are likely to have studied already, and it introduces them to an area in which fundamental physics is making progress. There are opportunities for demonstrations that illustrate the basic ideas of particle acceleration and detection.
Episode 518: Particle accelerators Episode 519: Particle detectors
Main aims
Students will: Apply their knowledge of the motion of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields to particle accelerators and detectors.
Prior knowledge
Students should know about forces on charges in electric and magnetic fields, and their effects on motion. In particular, they should know about how circular motion arises when a charged particle moves in a uniform magnetic field. They should be familiar with the basic conservation laws (charge, energy, momentum). An alternative approach would be to combine a study of accelerators and detectors with a study of electric and magnetic fields.
Where this leads
If your specification requires it, you could go on from here to study the Standard Model (quarks, leptons and fundamental forces).
154
INDEX
Episode 518: Particle accelerators
This episode requires students to apply their knowledge of charged particles and fields.
Summary
Discussion and worked example: Acceleration in an electric field. (15 minutes) Student activity: Researching accelerators. (30 minutes) Demonstration: Electrical breakdown. (15 minutes Discussion: How a linear accelerator works. (15 minutes) Discussion: Particles in a magnetic field. (10 minutes) Demonstration: Fine beam tube. (20 minutes) Student questions: Calculations. (30 minutes) Discussion (optional): Relativistic effects and Bertozzi’s experiment. (15 minutes) Visit (optional): Take a trip to CERN. (A long weekend)
Discussion + worked example: Acceleration in an electric field
Why accelerate particles? Following Rutherford’s alphascattering experiment, physicists wanted to probe matter with beams of particles that were more energetic, more intense and ‘purer’. How can particles be speeded up? (use an electric field.) Won’t a magnetic field do? (particles are accelerated, but the force is centripetal, so their energy does not increase.) Calculate the speed of an electron (or proton) accelerated through 10 kV. What equation to use? (½) mv2 = eV e = 1.6 x 1019 C and m = 9.1 x 1031 kg
v=
2 qV ≈ 6 x10 7 m s −1 m
Take care! This is approaching speeds where relativistic effects need to be taken into account. Will a proton travel faster or slower than this? (slower, because charge is the same but mass is greater.) In the largest research accelerators, energies are so great that they recreate the conditions minuscule fractions of a second after the Big Bang (typically 1010 s for LEP and a planned 1012 s for the Large Hadron Collider (LHC) opening in 2007).
Student activity: Researching accelerators
Find out about the development of linear and circular accelerators. Identify important spinoffs (e.g. the development of www, computer graphics, body scanner magnets, isotope production for medicine and industry, material processing etc.)
155
INDEX
TAP 5181: Some information about LEP at CERN
Demonstration: Electrical breakdown
In linear accelerators, the approach is to get as large a voltage as possible, and to apply it to the particles several times. A practical limit to voltage difference is set by the ability of materials to withstand the electric fields involved. You can demonstrate electrical breakdown. TAP 5182: Electrical breakdown.
high frequency (3000 MHz) a.c voltage
drift tube
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
particle beam
Discussion: How a linear accelerator works
Explain the construction of the linear accelerator. The drift tubes get longer as the particles move faster. But at the highest speeds approaching that of light, increase in energy makes very little difference to the speed, so the drift tubes are the same length. TAP 5183: The linear accelerator
Discussion: Particles in a magnetic field
There is an advantage in making the particles travel around in a circular path – they can be accelerated time and again. Discuss how the particles trajectories are bent into a circular path with a magnetic field to bring them back to the accelerating electrical field many times. Compare with an electric field. Recap the equation for this (mv2/r = Bqv).
156
INDEX
TAP 5184: How a magnetic field deflects an electron beam TAP 5185: How an electric field deflects an electron beam
Demonstration: Fine beam tube
Do this if you haven’t previously done so in episode 413 TAP 4132: Measuring the charge to mass ratio for an electron Show the fine beam tube with Helmholtz coils to provide a magnetic field. TAP 5186: The finebeam tube
Student questions: Calculations
Your students now know the equations needed to solve many problems relating to accelerators. You may have covered these questions in Episode 413, if not students should try them now. TAP 4133: Deflection with electric and magnetic fields TAP 4134: The cyclotron TAP 4136: Charged particles moving in a magnetic field Also try: TAP 5187: Fields in nature and in particle accelerators
Discussion (optional): Relativistic effects and Bertozzi’s experiment
Your students should be aware that, at relativistic speeds, things become more complicated. One way to present this is to discuss Bertozzi’s experiment.
157
INDEX
Accelerators such as the synchrotron are designed to compensate for the effective increase in m by controlling the frequency of the accelerating voltage as the particles speed up. TAP 5188: The ultimate speed – Bertozzi's demonstration TAP 5189: Principle of the synchrotron accelerator
Visit (optional): Take a trip to CERN (a long weekend)
You can organize a trip to CERN. http://www.pparc.ac.uk/Pbl/Cern.asp If you can’t make the visit this year borrow a video http://teachingphysics.iop.org/resources/video/video_book.doc
158
INDEX
TAP 5181: Some information about LEP at CERN
This information is provided for interest, perhaps to stimulate further research. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • First experiments: 1989 Particle collisions: electrons and positrons Maximum beam energy: 100 GeV Luminosity: 2.4 × 103 s–1 Time between collisions: 22 μs Filling time: 20 h Acceleration period: 550 s Injection energy: 550 MeV Bunch length: 1 cm Average beam current: 55 mA Circumference: 27.66 km Dipole (bending) magnets: 3280 plus 24 weaker dipoles RF resonant cavities: 128 Peak magnetic field: 0.135 T Vacuum: 10–11 Torr
Between 1983 and 1989 the construction of LEP at CERN was the biggest civil engineering project in Europe. The accelerator tube is 26.67 km in circumference and is shaped to an accuracy of better than 1.0 cm. It runs underground in a specially excavated tunnel inclined at 14° to the horizontal between Geneva airport and the Jura mountains. There are four main experimental stations positioned around the ring. As it enters each of these the beam passes through a large solenoid whose magnetic field squeezes the beam to about 10 μm by 250 μm, increasing the luminosity (and hence the probability of interactions with the oncoming beam). From 1989 to 1995 LEP was used as a Z0 ‘factory’. This was done by setting the collision energy to about 91 GeV (rest energy of the Z0). This allowed physicists to make accurate measurements of the Z0 lifetime. From this they showed that there are only three generations of fundamental particles. If there were more then the lifetime of the Z0 would be lower because it would have more alternative particles into which it could decay. This conclusion agreed with that of cosmologists based on the number of different types of neutrinos needed to explain relative abundances of different nuclei in the early Universe. It is a good example of the growing links between particle physics on the smallest scale and cosmology, the study of the Universe on the largest scale. From 2005 LEP will be replaced by the LHC (large hadron collider, a new accelerator running in the existing LEP tunnel). This will accelerate protons and antiprotons to up to 14 TeV (1 TeV = 1012 eV) about 10 times greater than the Tevatron at Fermilab. Why? Whereas electron–positron collisions can be used to test precise aspects of the Standard Model, more massive particles are used in the hope of detecting rare but exotic events. LHC should reveal the supersymmetric partners of
159
INDEX
ordinary matter particles (as predicted by superstring theory) and may well reveal the Higgs particle – a forcecarrier in the hypothetical Higgs field that endows all other particles with mass. The LHC is an amazing project, even by the standards of highenergy physics. The momentum of the highenergy protons and antiprotons is so high that extremely powerful superconducting dipole magnets must be used to keep them in the ring. Their peak field will be about 9 T! To maintain the superconducting properties these magnets must be cooled to 1.9 K. This requires eight cryogenic plants spaced equally around the 27 km ring pumping 70 000 litres of liquid helium through 40 000 leakproof junctions to cool 31 000 tonnes of equipment!
160
INDEX
Practical advice
This information should provide some insight into the engineering challenges to be overcome if the fundamental physics is to be explored.
Alternative approaches
Similar information can be gleaned from Web sites dedicated to most large accelerators.
Social and human context
The cost of such projects forces collaboration on national governments.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 40T
161
INDEX
TAP 518 2: Electrical breakdown
Introduction
Air is an insulator under normal conditions. If the potential gradient is sufficiently high, then the air may start to conduct, often with spectacular effect, as in lightning. In this demonstration you will be able to see large sparks produced by an electrostatic generator. On a smaller scale, sparking across a narrow gap can be enhanced by alpha radiation, illustrating the principle behind some radiation detectors.
You will need:
van de Graaff generator EHT power supply, 0–5 kV dc spark counter pure alpha source
Wire carefully, EHT supply in use
The large protective resistor is in use to prevent dangerous currents passing though humans. The EHT power supply, being current limited will not give a fatal shock, but it can be surprising
The local rules for handling radioactive sources must be complied with.
Do not handle radioactive sources or place them in close proximity to your body Use tongs or a source holder to handle the alpha source and put it in a secure place when not in use
Looking at sparks
You will be able to see the sparks produced in a high potential gradient. Stray electrons in the air are accelerated and produce secondary ionisation by collisions. An electron shower develops and this allows the air to conduct for a short time so that a spark is seen. The scale of sparking varies considerably from lightning flashes, through laboratory electrostatic generators to the small discharges in radiation detectors. For these smaller events, using an alpha source ionises the air and increases the probability of a spark occurring. 1. You can charge the sphere of the van de Graaff generator to a high potential by turning it on for a short time. If you bring an earthed sphere close to the main sphere, then a spark will be seen to jump from one sphere to the other once the potential gradient is above about 3×106 V m–1. You should be able to estimate the potential of the main sphere from the distance across which the spark jumps but the breakdown potential gradient can vary considerably from day to day as atmospheric conditions change. Smaller sparks can be seen in the spark counter. This requires a lower potential difference because the gap between the wire and the earthed plate is only a couple of millimetres. If
2.
162
INDEX
you connect the wire to the positive terminal of the EHT power supply and the plate to earth and turn the supply voltage up to maximum (5 kV), you will be able to see and / or hear occasional sparks between the wire and the plate (see the diagram above). It may be necessary to work in a darkened area of the laboratory. These sparks are initiated by stray electrons or ions passing close to the gap between the wire and the plate.
Radioactive source and holder held by tongs
0V
+ 5000 V
gauze
sparking here
thin wire
3.
Alpha particles produce a high density of ionisation along their path. If you hold a source a short distance (2 or 3 cm) from the wire, there will be a considerable increase in the rate of sparking because the additional electrons are likely to produce secondary ionisation leading to breakdown. Many radiation detectors use this as a way of detecting particles.
You have seen
1. How sparks can be produced in a strong electric field and how this can be used in radiation detectors.
163
INDEX
Practical advice
If students have not seen the sparks produced by a laboratory electrostatic machine, then they should now. The demonstration of the small discharges in a spark detector follows naturally and links well with the discussion of the fields found in Geiger–Müller tubes. Commercial spark gaps are available, and are less likely to give shocks, but they are expensive. (Some schools may have a spark counter but not recognise it.) TAP 5094: Rays make ions Episode 519: Particle detectors
Social and human context
Lightning has a place in discussions of extreme weather conditions on Earth and on other planets. Discharges from overhead power lines can be a reason for energy loss as well as a potential hazard.
Wire carefully, EHT supply in use
The large protective resistor is in use to prevent dangerous currents passing though humans. The EHT power supply, being current limited will not give a fatal shock, but it can be surprising
The local rules for handling radioactive sources must be complied with.
Do not handle radioactive sources or place them in close proximity to your body Use tongs or a source holder to handle the alpha source and put it in a secure place when not in use
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 180D
164
INDEX
TAP 518 3: The linear accelerator
This shows the principles of the linear accelerator, although not all of the engineering complexities.
Principle of linear accelerator
The accelerating field negative electron accelerated field between electrodes zero field inside tube
–
–
+
165
INDEX
Principle of linear accelerator
Switching p.d.s to keep accelerating electrons at one instant alternating high frequency p.d.
–
+
–
+
–
– +
– +
bunches of electrons between electrodes are accelerated a little later
bunches of electrons drift through tube a little later still
zero p.d.
+
–
+
–
+
+ –
+ –
bunches of electrons between electrodes are further accelerated
electrodes must be longer because electrons are going faster
The alternating p.d. switches back and forth so that the electrons are accelerated as they pass between successive electrodes
166
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 40O
167
INDEX
TAP 518 4: How a magnetic field deflects an electron beam
The plane in which the deflection occurs is important, causing circular motion.
Magnetic deflection
positive ions +
force Bfield beam velocity
negative charges – e.g. electrons
force on positive charge B v force at right angles to field and velocity of charge, F = qvB
Magnetic fields deflect moving charged particles in circular paths
168
INDEX
169
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 120O
170
INDEX
TAP 5185: How an electric field deflects an electron beam
The role of electric fields is central here.
Deflections of electron beam by electric field
electron gun hot cathode _ spacing d + anode
deflection plates +V force electric field E = V d V d
vertical force F = eE = e
accelerating potential difference
zero potential V d _ resultant velocity
F=e _ horizontal acceleration _ constant velocity _
vertical acceleration constant horizontal velocity
171
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 100O
172
INDEX
TAP 5186: The finebeam tube
Use a finebeam tube to explore how the accelerating voltage and the magnetic field both affect the radius of the electrons’ path.
You will need:
finebeam tube with Helmholtz coils power supply (6.3 V) for cathode ht. supply (0–300V dc) with voltmeter low voltage supply (0–12 V) for Helmholtz coils ammeter connecting leads with fixed or sprung shrouds over the 4mm plugs
Safety
Wire carefully, no bare conductor above 40 V. HT supplies are always dangerous, especially so in the dark. Shrouded plug leads MUST be used. No connections should be changed with the power switched on. We can observe the motion of electrons in a magnetic field using a finebeam tube. There is a small amount of gas at low pressure in the tube. When the gas molecules are struck by electrons, the molecules are excited and emit visible light. In this way we can see the path of the electrons. A pair of coils can be used to apply a magnetic field perpendicular to the motion of the electrons. With no current in the coils, the electron beam is undeflected. • Use a compass to determine the direction of the magnetic field.
Here are some things to try.
Make a prediction before you try each one. • • • • Apply the lefthand rule to the electrons to predict the direction in which they will be deflected when the magnetic field is switched on. What will happen if the speed of the electrons is increased (by increasing the gun voltage)? What will happen if the magnetic field strength is increased (by increasing the current in the coils)? What will happen if an electric field is applied along the direction of the magnetic field, or if the beam enters the magnetic field at an angle other than a right angle
173
INDEX
Practical advice
If you measured e/m using a fine beam tube it would be unnecessary to repeat the fine beam tube here unless you require a quick reminder. TAP 4132: Measuring the charge to mass ratio for an electron To avoid damage to the tube, it is desirable to set this experiment up in advance. At least partial blackout is required. It is also a good idea to cover the back of the tube in black cloth. You will probably get a spread of circles, perhaps due to the field being nonuniform (a Helmholtz pair only produce an approximately uniform field in the central third of the volume they enclose), due to the electrons provided by the electron gun having a range of velocities, and due to random thermal motion superimposed on the velocity acquired from the action of the accelerating pd. This activity is a more quantitative look at the finebeam tube, and also provides an opportunity to revise ideas about charge, voltage and energy. Students should be able to say that increasing the accelerating voltage will increase the speed of the electrons, and so their orbital radius in a given magnetic field will increase. They should also be able to predict that if the current in the coils in increased, the field becomes stronger, which will steer the electrons into a tighter orbit. You might like to show that tilting the tube sends the electrons into a spiral (corkscrewshaped) orbit; they continue to move with constant velocity along the field direction, while being deflected into circular motion around the field direction. In this context Helmholtz coils are a pair of coils radius R and distance R apart.
Safety
Wire carefully, no bare conductor above 40 V. HT supplies are always dangerous, especially so in the dark. Shrouded plug leads MUST be used. No connections should be changed with the power switched on.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section PRO, activity 27
174
INDEX
TAP 518 7: Fields in nature and in particle accelerators
Instructions and information
Write your answers in the spaces provided. The following data will be needed when answering these questions: • • • electronic charge = – 1.6 × 10–19 C mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg ε0 = 8.9 × 10–12 F m–1
Questions
Suppose that a thundercloud has a flat horizontal base of area 1 km2. The base of the cloud is 200 m above the Earth’s surface so that a uniform electric field is formed between the cloud and the Earth. A field of 106 V m–1 between the base of the cloud and the Earth is sufficient to cause a lightning flash. 1. Calculate the potential difference between the cloud and the ground at the moment the lightning flash begins.
2.
The charge on the base of the cloud is given by the formula Q = ε0 A E where A is the area of the base of the cloud and E is the electric field strength between the base and the Earth. Calculate the charge on the base of the cloud.
3.
The cloud and the Earth can be thought of as a parallel plate capacitor that stores energy when charged. Assuming that the potential difference immediately after the flash is very small compared with the potential difference at the beginning of the flash, calculate a value for the energy released during the flash.
175
INDEX
Electrons accelerated through a potential difference of 200 V enter a uniform magnetic field of 0.001 T perpendicular to the direction of motion. 4. Calculate the speed of the electrons when they enter the magnetic field.
5.
Use your answer to question 4 to calculate the radius of the orbit in the magnetic field.
In an electron tube, electrons were passed through a region containing a vertical electric field E and a horizontal magnetic field B. When the forces on the electron were balanced the electrons passed through the tube undeflected.
horizontal magnetic field
undeflected path of electrons
vertical electric field
6.
Show that the electrons of charge e pass undeflected when they have a velocity v = E/B.
The separation of the deflector plates was 24 mm and no deflection was observed when the voltage across the plates was 3.2 kV and the magnetic field was 8.2 × 10–3 T. 7. Calculate the velocity of the electrons.
176
INDEX
The voltage used to accelerate the electrons to this velocity was 750 V. 8. Use your answer to question 7 to calculate the ratio e/m for electrons where m is the mass of an electron.
A proton joined to a neutron is known as a deuteron or deuterium ion and is used in nuclear scattering experiments. A deuteron has a mass of 3.3 × 10–27 kg and a charge of + 1.6 × 10–19 C. 9. Calculate the voltage required to accelerate a deuteron from rest in a vacuum to a velocity of 9 × 106 m s–1 (3% of the speed of light).
In an early form of particle accelerator, deuterons were made to move in a circular path within a toroidal tube of diameter 1 m. A toroidal tube is like a hollow ring. 10. Calculate the magnetic field required to constrain a deuteron within the tube at the velocity of 9 × 106 m s–1.
Hints
4. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. The charge and mass of the electron are given in the ‘Instructions and information’. The electric and magnetic forces are equal in magnitude. You will need to change the units before calculating the electric field strength. You will need to consider the equation for the electron gun used to accelerate the electrons. You are used to calculating the speed of electrons when accelerated. The mass of a deuteron is not the same as the mass of an electron. The question gives the diameter of the orbit and not the radius.
177
INDEX
Practical advice
In questions 7 and 8 there are several stages in the calculation so excessive rounding in the earlier parts of the question would lead to errors in the final answer. All answers have been rounded to two significant figures, but three significant figures have been used for numerical values that have been carried through to the next stage of the calculation.
Answers and worked solutions
1.
V = Ed = 10 6 V m −1 × 200 m = 2 × 10 8 V.
2.
Q = ε 0 AE = (8.9 × 10 −12 F m −1 ) × (1000 m) 2 × 10 6 V m −1 = 8.9 C.
3.
1 QV 2
=
1 2
× 8.9 C × ( 2 × 10 8 V )
= 8.9 × 10 8 J. 4.
eV =
1 2
mv 2
so
v = 2 eV m =
6
2 × (1 . 6 × 10 m s
−1
− 19
C ) × 200 V kg
9 . 1 × 10 m s −1 .
− 31
= 8 . 39 × 10 ≈ 8 . 4 × 10
6
5.
Bev = mv 2 / r
so
r = mv Be = ( 9 . 1 × 10 m.
− 31
kg ) × ( 8 . 39 × 10 T × ( 1 . 6 × 10
− 19
6
m s
−1
)
0 . 001
C)
= 0 . 048
6.
eE = Bev
so
178
INDEX
v = E / B. 7.
E = 3200 V V = d 0 . 024 m
5
= 1 . 33 × 10 v =
V m
5
−1
.
−1
1 . 33 × 10 V m E = −3 B 8 . 2 × 10 T
7
= 1 . 63 × 10 ≈ 1 . 6 × 10
7
m s
−1
m s
−1
.
8.
eV =
so
1 2
mv 2
(1 . 63 × 10 7 m s − 1 ) 2 e v2 = = m 2V 2 × 750 V = 1 . 8 × 10 11 C kg −1 .
9.
qV =
so
V =
1 2
mv 2
1 2
mv q
2
=
5
( 3 . 3 × 10 V.
− 27
kg ) × ( 9 × 10
− 19
6
m s −1 ) 2
2 × (1 . 6 × 10
C)
= 8 . 4 × 10
10.
Bqv = mv 2 / r
so
B = mv qr = ( 3 . 3 × 10
− 27
kg ) × ( 9 × 10
− 19
6
m s
−1
)
( 1 . 6 × 10
C ) × 0 .5 m
= 0 . 37 T .
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 160S
179
INDEX
TAP 518 8: The ultimate speed – Bertozzi's demonstration
This is a presentation of some experimental data, gathered by Bertozzi that illuminates debates about motion when Einstein’s theory of relativity is considered.
The ultimate speed: Bertozzi’s demonstration
8.4 m drift space tube detects electrons passing accelerated electrons bunch of electrons v aluminium plate detects electrons arriving. Rise in temperature checks energy
time
oscilloscope
The results: speed calculated 1 from 2 mv2 = qV The difference made by relativity As particles are accelerated speed v reaches a limit, c kinetic energy EK increases without limit momentum p increases without limit At all speeds EK = qV
9
6
3 actual speed of electrons 0
speed of light
0
4 2 accelerating p.d./MV
At low speeds p ≈ mv EK ≈ 1mv2 2
At high speeds v≈c EK ≈ pc
Powerful accelerators can’t increase the speed of particles above c, but they go on increasing their energy and momentum
180
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 80O
181
INDEX
TAP 518 9: Principle of the synchrotron accelerator
Here both electrical and magnetic fields are harnessed to the task of deflection and accelerating beams.
Principle of synchrotron accelerator
inject beam at v ≈ c from smaller accelerator
electrostatic deflector
magnets to bend beam
radio frequency cavity to accelerate beam
magnets to focus beam
electrostatic deflector to extract beam and direct it into targets
182
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 150O
183
INDEX
Episode 519: Particle detectors
Summary
Discussion: The idea of particle detectors. (10 minutes) Demonstration: Cloud chamber (and spark detector). (15 minutes) Discussion: Explaining tracks. (10 minutes) Student questions: Interpreting tracks. (20 minutes) Particle tracks: Try analyzing some particle tracks. (time permitting)
felt ring
Discussion: The idea of particle detectors
What particle detectors do you know of? (Spark Counters, Geiger counters.) What do these tell us? (They count particles of ionizing radiation.) What else might we want to know about particles? How could we tell which particle we have detected? (Need to know a range of properties: e.g. mass/energy, electric charge, momentum, lifetime, etc.)
air saturated with meths vapour
alpha source solid carbon dioxide
foam rubber (Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
In general, detectors work by analyzing particle collisions using conservation laws (momentum, energy, charge).
Demonstration: Cloud chamber (and spark detector).
Cloud & bubble chambers make visible the invisible: alpha diameter ~ 1014 m gives a visible track 0.1 mm wide, a factor of 1010 increase in size! If you have access to a spark detector, you could also demonstrate this at this point. You may have demonstrated a spark counter before? TAP 5094: Rays make ions TAP 5182: Electrical breakdown TAP 5191: Range of alpha particles with a cloud chamber
184
INDEX
Discussion: Explaining tracks
Students may be familiar with the patterns made by particles in detectors, and so you could discuss the basic ideas behind analysing the tracks. The length of track is related to the energy of the particle, and also to its lifetime if it decays with a very short half life. Magnetic fields deflect charged particles and so bend their tracks. The curvature depends on momentum, charge and the strength of the field. How could you tell whether a particle had positive or negative charge? (Curving to left or right; Fleming’s rule.) If a track is a spiral, what does this tell you about the particle’s motion? (It is slowing down; charged particles radiate as they are accelerated, so they slow down.) TAP 5192: Measuring the momentum of moving charged particles.
Student questions: Interpreting tracks
Students can apply their knowledge to the interpretation of tracks from a bubble chamber. TAP 4136: Charged particles moving in a magnetic field
Particle tracks: If time permits try analyzing some particle tracks at:
http://hepwww.ph.man.ac.uk/~wyatt/events/home.html TAP 5193: Particle tracks
185
INDEX
TAP 519 1: Range of alpha particles with a cloud chamber
Using a cloud chamber
The alpha particle is one type of emission that is possible from the nuclei of some atoms. This activity allows you to investigate how far these alphas can travel in a gas.
You will need
cloud chamber; expansion or diffusion type pure alpha source for cloud chamber optional: a beta source and forceps for holding it
Ethanol is highly flammable.
Do not bring the stock bottle into the lab until all sources of ignition have been removed. Solid carbon dioxide (dry ice) can cause burns. Wear eye protection and leather gauntletstyle gloves while preparing and using it.
Radioactive sources
Follow local rules for handling radioactive sources.
What to do
1. 2. Set up the cloud chamber. You will be given instructions on how to do this. If the chamber is a diffusion type (containing dry ice), allow it to settle down – this may take some minutes. Keep watching and you should begin to see tracks radiating from the alpha source in the chamber. If the chamber is an expansion type, operate the pump and look in the chamber immediately after the exhaust stroke. You should be able to see tracks radiating from the alpha source. The tracks are formed when the supersaturated moist air in the chamber condenses onto the ions that are produced by the alphas as they move through the gas. The tracks show where the alphas have been, not their current position. Try to make a sketch of these tracks. Pay particular attention to the track length and the shape of the track. You may occasionally see other tracks that cross the chamber and do not appear to come from the source. These may be cosmic rays or other particles that help to make up the background radiation. If you are very, very lucky you may see a forked track; this may have been a reaction in the chamber that resulted in the formation of two or more particles. This is the type of event that experimental nuclear physicists use in their work. 0bserve tracks from a beta source if possible.
3.
4. 5.
6.
6b.
186
INDEX
7.
Explain your observations in terms of (i) the initial energy of the alpha particles as they leave their parent nucleus and (ii) the mass of the alphas relative to the gas of atoms through which they move in the chamber.
You have seen that
1. 2. 3. Alpha tracks are straight. This is because the alpha particles are not greatly deflected as they ionise the gas atoms in the chamber. Alpha tracks from the same isotope species are of the same length. This is because they all begin with the same initial energy and lose this energy at approximately the same rate. Beta tracks are not straight but ‘wander’.
187
INDEX
Practical advice
There are various types of chamber on the market. This activity does not provide precise instructions for each, you will need to instruct students in the use of the chamber, or set it up for them. You need to be clear that the students are not inadvertently exposed to the radiation.
Alternative approaches
The range of alphas can also be assessed using a spark detector.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 80E
188
INDEX
TAP 519 2: Measuring the momentum of moving charged particles
Analysing the motion of a charged particle in a magnetic field can lead to a determination of its momentum.
Measuring the momentum of moving charged particles
velocity v
× × ×
velocity v
× × × ×
force F
× × × ×
magnetic force force F = qvB
circular path, radius r
× ×
magnetic field B into screen
charge q
× ×
×
motion in circle
m v2 = force F r
m v2 = qvB r p = mv = qrB
at relativistic speed p = qrB is still true but p > mv
Momentum of particle proportional to radius of curvature of path
189
INDEX
190
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 140O
191
INDEX
TAP 519 3: Particle tracks
Seeding cloud trails
For many years, the best way to record the particles involved in a subatomic interaction was to take a holiday snap. To do that, the particles had to be persuaded to pose for a picture. The earliest device for picturing the tracks of particles was the cloud chamber. Schools often have small cloud chambers running on ‘dry ice’ (solid carbon dioxide), which show tracks of alpha particles easily. The idea is that a fastmoving charged particle leaves behind it a trail of charged ions from gas molecules it has collided with and disrupted. Typically the path contains hundreds of thousands of such ions. If the gas is kept wet with water or alcohol, droplets of liquid condense around the ions. So the particle track is revealed by a cloud trail. The wet gas is made ready to condense by cooling it with a sudden expansion.
The successor to the cloud chamber was the bubble chamber. Instead of a gas, there is a liquid though which the particles pass. Instead of droplets along the path there are tiny bubbles in the liquid. The bubbles form round the ions left behind by the charged particles, just as the droplets do in a cloud chamber. One liquid often used is liquid hydrogen, because its protons also make good targets for collisions. The liquid is made ready to boil by suddenly reducing the pressure on it. Then vapour droplets first form around the ions.
192
INDEX
Getting just the snap you want
The trouble with holiday snaps is that often you don’t have your camera ready when something interesting happens. The trouble with cloud and bubble chambers is that they have to be ‘primed’ to be ready (by expanding the gas or reducing the pressure on the liquid). The event they happen to see may not be the one you want. A way round this is to detect the particles electronically as well, pick out an interesting event, and get the electronics to ‘fire’ the chamber to take its picture. It doesn’t matter that the event is already over: the ion trails it left behind in the gas or liquid are there for several milliseconds, so the picture can still be made after the event. An example would be an event which sends out two particles in opposite directions. Counters can pick them up and detect the coincidence in time. The idea was much used in early research on cosmic rays, because their arrival is so unpredictable. But of course all quantum events are inherently random, so the idea has very general use. In this way, the experimenters just leave the chambers to work automatically. In fact automation is increasingly taking over the business of particle detection.
Using magnetic fields
From the beginning physicists have used magnetic fields to tell particles apart. Positively charged particles curve one way, and negatively charged particles curve the opposite way. This is how beta particles were shown to be negatively charged. It is also how Anderson showed that he had seen the first antiparticle, the positron.
193
INDEX
Measuring momentum
Suppose a particle makes a curved track moving at right angles to a magnetic field B. Just measuring the radius r of the track tells you the momentum p of the particle, if you know its charge q. The relation is simply p = qrB. This works for particles moving at any speed, including close to the speed of light. If you also know the energy of the particle, you can find its mass, which helps you to tell what it is.
Measuring energy
There are many ways of measuring the energy of particles. One of the most fundamental is simply to let them be absorbed in some material, and see how much hotter the material gets. The large detectors used at CERN and other accelerator laboratories may have several layers of absorber. One layer, for example made of lead glass, stops all the electrons, positrons and photons, recording their total energy. Another layer further out made of iron stops more massive particles and records their energy too. But some particles, such as neutrinos, aren’t absorbed at all. Their energy has to be found by looking at the difference between the energy that went into the collision and the energy that came out carried by other particles. So even these ‘ghostly’ particles get accounted for.
Some things to find out about
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. What is the connection between bubble chambers and bottles of beer? Who invented the bubble chamber? What have coincidences to do with the Italian physicist Bruno Rossi? Why was he in England and not in Italy at the time? What is the advantage of using superconducting coils to produce the large magnetic fields needed in big particle detectors? What are DELPHI, ALEPH and OPAL? (Look under CERN.) Photographic film is also used to detect ionising radiation. Find out about one such use. Another kind of detector is named after the Russian physicist Cerenkov. What is Cerenkov radiation and how does a Cerenkov detector work?
194
INDEX
Annihilation and pair production: bubble chamber pictures
Below: Pair production and a processed image with some tracks removed
Both images can be interpreted by assuming two photons to be entering from the top of picture, leaving no track. One (top) has created a positron / electron pair and a ‘knock on’ electron from within an atom. The other has simply produced a positron / electron pair.
195
INDEX
Practical advice
This reading, is provided for teachers or interested students. The reading provides a good opportunity to revise topics such as ionisation, forces on charges in electric and magnetic fields, energy and momentum, together with thought about qualities of measuring instruments, particularly resolution and response time. By adding questions, you could convert this reading into a comprehension exercise. The reading extends beyond exam specifications See also Episode 533: The particle zoo
Alternative approaches
You could select types of detector and assign students to find out about them.
Social and human context
The sheer scale of some detectors, and the hundreds of people involved in the teams running them, underline effectively the interdisciplinary nature and the cost of highenergy research facilities.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 80T
196
INDEX
Episode 520: Preparation for Rutherford scattering topic
The nuclear atom
Students will be familiar with the nuclear model of the atom, in which the atom is pictured as a miniature solar system. They may have been introduced to Rutherford scattering and how this leads to the nuclear model. Here you have the opportunity to deepen their understanding, making use of ideas about electric fields. You can also introduce them to other evidence that tells us about the size of the nucleus.
Episode 521: Rutherford’s experiment Episode 522: The size of the nucleus
Main aims
Students will: 1. Describe Rutherford’s experiment and explain why it leads to the nuclear model of the atom. 2. Use Coulomb’s law to estimate the size of the nucleus. 3. State the approximate sizes of atom and nucleus.
Electron cloud
Prior knowledge
There is a lot of Physics knowledge that can contribute to this topic: collisions and momentum, Coulomb’s law, and waveparticle duality. If you have not covered all of these topics already, you will have to modify the suggested approach to take account of this.
Alpha particle nucleus
Where this leads
Once the idea of the nuclear atom is established, you can go on to look at nuclear structure, particle accelerators, the Standard Model and the whole of particle physics. This topic also provides a good opportunity to discuss the use of models in physics, including both mechanical and mathematical models.
197
INDEX
Episode 521: Rutherford’s experiment
In this episode, students look in detail at Rutherford’s experiment and relate it to a mechanical analogue.
Summary
Discussion: Recollecting the significance of Rutherford’s experiment. (10 minutes) Discussion: Rutherford’s experiment. (20 minutes) Demonstration: Collisions and momentum. (10 minutes) Discussion: Rutherford scattering and Coulomb’s law. (10 minutes) Student experiment or demonstration: The Chinese hat analogue. (30 minutes) Student questions: Rutherford experiment and atomic structure (optional) (20 Minutes) Question: Rutherford’s results (optional) Discussion: Models in physics. (10 minutes)
Discussion: Recollecting the significance of Rutherford’s experiment
As a preparatory task, ask your students to revise what they have previously learned about Rutherford’s αscattering experiment. What idea of the atom did it suggest? (The nuclear model.) What model of the atom did this replace? (Thomson’s ‘plum pudding’ model, in which atoms are seen as essentially small balls composed of a mixture of positive and negative electric charge, with no concentration of charge at any particular position.) Is ‘plum pudding’ a good name for the model? (Yes, if you see the negative electrons dispersed throughout a spherical lump of continuous positive charge, not so good if the volume of the atom has both positive and negative particles continuously distributed through it – students may well be recalling different pictures from different sources.)
Discussion: Rutherford’s experiment
Now you can present a more advanced exposition of the experiment. Why did Rutherford ask for the experiment to be done? Experiments on the absorption of β particles had also shown that sometimes the β particles were ‘back scattered’. Rutherford suggested that Geiger and Marsden should try looking for similar behaviour with α particles. Rutherford thought it was highly unlikely; because α particles are relatively massive compared with electrons, it was predicted that the αs would simply suffer a series of small deflections. They were expected to travel more or less straight through the absorber. However, Rutherford’s main concern was to give Geiger & Marsden something to do that would occupy them and get them some useful handson experience, rather than expecting them to get any very exciting results. Show a diagram of the apparatus. The absorber was a thin gold metal foil. Why use gold? (Thin gold foils, typically 250 atoms thick, were easy to make and readily available.) Why thin? (αs are easily absorbed.)
198
INDEX
As expected, virtually all the αs went straight through, but about 1:8000 were turned through large angles (reflected or backscattered). An 8 kBq α source gives one largeangle scattering per second. The chance of a series of small deflections resulting in a reflection is far too small to account for what was observed. Rutherford was astonished at the result: “It was quite the most incredible event that ever happened to me in my life. It was as incredible as if you fired a 15inch shell at a piece of tissue paper and it came back and hit you!” (You may find other versions of this quote, because Rutherford described his experience on many different occasions.) TAP 5211: Rutherford scattering TAP 5212: Alpha particle scattering experiment
Demonstration: Collisions and momentum
Use colliding balls to show what happens to a projectile particle hitting a target particle; as the target ball mass gets bigger, the follow through by the projectile gets less. Use a selection of ball bearings, marbles etc on some curtain track, or trolleys loaded with different weights. When the target mass is small relative to the projectile mass, the missile follows through. For equal masses the projectile stops and the target sets off with the speed of the projectile. If the target mass is large, the projectile rebounds. (If your students have already studied momentum, they should be able to predict the outcome of each of these demonstrations.) The back scattering of αs through large angles implies (i) all the positive charge is concentrated together, and (ii) the mass of the concentrated positive charge must be quite a bit larger than of an α particle.
Discussion: Rutherford scattering and Coulomb’s Law
Rutherford assumed that (i) Coulomb’s Law was obeyed down to very small distances, and that (ii) most of the mass of the nucleus was concentrated into a very small volume – the nuclear atom that resembles a miniature solar system. (Because the analysis works, we can take this as ‘proof’’ that Coulomb’s Law is valid down to distances about the size of a nucleus.) Show a diagram to explain how the terms impact parameter p and scattering angle φ are defined. Ask: how would you expect the number of αs scattered through angle φ to depend upon (i) the impact parameter p, (ii) the charge on the target nucleus Z, and (iii) the kinetic energy of the α particles? (As p increases φ decreases (force weaker); as Z increases φ increases (greater repulsive force); as energy increases, φ decreases (less ‘interaction’ time).)
199
INDEX
TAP 5213: Rutherford’s picture of alpha particle scattering.
Student experiment or demonstration: The Chinese hat analogue
The ‘Chinese hat’ analogue provides a practical way for students to get a feel for the physics of alphascattering. Roll a marble past the hat to see it deflected. You can change the speed and impact parameter. Students can change these parameters systematically and observe the effects. The hat is designed so that, as the slope of the ‘hat’ gets steeper, the component of gravity parallel to the slope opposing the motion of the ball also gets larger. The actual shape is such that at any position on the slope a distance r from the centre of the ‘hill’, the component of a particle’s weight parallel to the slope ~ 1/r2. [Revision of the relationship between 1/r potential and 1/r2 force can be done here if desired] If possible, it’s worth getting several Chinese hats so that (Image: Philip Harris Education – students can work with them in small groups. (The ‘hat’ can resourcefulphysics.org) also be used when studying gravity. Turn it upside down to become a ‘potential well’ so that you can demonstrate orbits, and discuss the difference between bound and unbound ‘particles’.) TAP 5214: The 1/r hill: Slope and force TAP 5215: A model for Rutherford scattering A good simulation of alpha particle scattering could be used if desired see this website: http://wwwoutreach.phy.cam.ac.uk/camphy/nucleus/nucleus_index.htm
Student questions (optional) Rutherford experiment and atomic structure
TAP 5216: Rutherford experiment and atomic structure
Question: Rutherford’s results (optional)
Some actual results are given. Students may plot a graph to test Rutherford’s relation for αscattering TAP 5217: Rutherford scattering data
200
INDEX
Discussion: Models in physics
If time permits, you might have a discussion on the role of models (physical and mathematical) in physics. In what ways is the Chinese hat model similar to Rutherford scattering? In what ways does it differ? In which ways is the solar system a good model for the nuclear atom? What other models do your students know?
201
INDEX
TAP 5211: Rutherford scattering
gold foil Alpha source
some
Many particles very few
Most α particles travel straight through the gold foil but about 1:8000 were turned through a large angle. The experiment takes place in a vacuum to avoid problems of α absorption by air.
202
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Resourceful Physics
203
INDEX
TAP 5212: Alpha particle scattering experiment
Rutherford alpha particle scattering experiment
lead block to select narrow beam of alpha particles
microscope to view zinc sulphide screen, and count alpha particles
radium source of alpha particles
thin gold foil
vary angle of scattering observed
alpha particle beam
scattered alpha particles
zinc sulphide screen, tiny dots of light where struck by alpha particle
The experiment takes place in a vacuum to avoid problems of α absorption by air
204
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 100O
205
INDEX
TAP 5213: Rutherford’s picture of alpha particle scattering
Rutherford’s picture of alpha scattering
nucleus
paths of scattered alpha particles
206
INDEX
Rutherford’s picture of alpha scattering
For calculations
force F =
2Ze2 4πε0d
2
alpha particle scattered
charge +2e θ ‘aiming error’ b d gold nucleus charge + Ze scattering angle
Assumptions: alpha particle is the He nucleus, charge +2e gold nucleus has charge + Ze, and is much more massive than alpha particles scattering force is inverse square electrical repulsion
equal force F but nucleus is massive, so little recoil
207
INDEX
Rutherford’s picture of alpha scattering
TEST: Are sloweddown ‘alpha’ particles scattered more?
Z
reduce alpha energy with absorber
lower speed Z
less energetic alpha particle turned around further from the nucleus
208
INDEX
Rutherford’s picture of alpha scattering
TEST:
Does using nuclei of smaller charge scatter alpha particles less?
Z replace foil by metal of smaller atomic number
alpha particle gets closer to nucleus of less charge and is deflected less
smaller nucleus with less charge, e.g. aluminium
209
INDEX
Practical advice
These diagrams are here so that you can discuss them with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 120O
210
INDEX
TAP 521 4: The 1/r hill: Slope and force
Mapping potential
The 1/r hill is a gravitational model showing how the electrical potential varies round a charged particle. One way up for the variation round a positively charged sphere, invert it for a model of the variation round a negatively charged sphere. As the elevation of the hill above the bench top represents the potential, so the steepness of the hill represents the field.
Remember
E=− dV . dx
You can investigate these field values by looking at the accelerations of a suitably chosen probe  a ball bearing.
You will need:
1/r hill ball bearing
Potential varies radially
r
Move across the surface, staying at a fixed gravitational potential energy. What does this correspond to in the electrical case? What shape do you make, as you move across the surface following this rule? Now try moving across the surface so that the potential energy changes as much as possible in as small a distance as possible. What shape do you make now, as you move across the surface?
211
INDEX
Field is potential gradient
r
E= dV dr
–dV dr
Hold a ball bearing on the surface. Release it and compare the potential gradient with the acceleration. Repeat for several different positions. How does the steepness of the slope fix the acceleration? Why is the acceleration a good measure of the field? Remember that this is just a gravitational model. Can you sketch the corresponding situation for the electrical case?
You have
1. Looked at 1/r variation in potential. 2. Compared a model with the thing being modelled. 3. Thought about the connection between field and potential.
212
INDEX
Practical advice
Handling a 1/r hill in the way suggested allows students to show their understanding of some of the more subtle ideas in this chapter physically. Students might usefully have one hill between four and use the questions as a basis to present a minilesson on the 1/r hill to their peers, each section being repeated twice.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 16, 210P
213
INDEX
TAP 5215: A model for Rutherford scattering
Use a model such as the one shown below to investigate Rutherford scattering. A marble runs down a ramp, and then past a plastic or metal ‘hill’. The closer it gets to the hill, the more it is deflected.
You will need:
alpha scattering analogue apparatus talcum powder large sheets of white paper (A3 or larger)
What to do:
• •
Sprinkle some powder so that the track of the marble shows up. Start by investigating how much the marble is deflected when it is aimed at different distances from the hill. You need to measure two quantities, as shown below, d, the distance of the line of the original track from the centre of the hill and φ the angle through which it is scattered.
• • •
Make sure that you always release the marble from the same point on the ramp. How could you make the marble travel more slowly? How will this affect its track? Test your ideas. Why does the marble never go over the top of the hill? Use the idea of energy conservation to explain your answer
214
INDEX
Practical advice
The ‘hill’ is shaped to reflect an inverse square law of repulsion (its height varies inversely with radius, as required for potential energy in an inverse square law field). You might refer back to this and remind students about studying Coulomb’s law. Talcum powder is useful for showing up the tracks of the marbles. Students should appreciate that, provided the marble never starts higher than the top of the ramp, it will never reach the top of the hill – it will have insufficient energy. If possible, it’s worth getting several Chinese hat demos so students can work with them in small groups of three or four. [The ‘hats’ can also be used when studying gravity. Turned upside down to become a ‘potential well’ you can demonstrate ‘orbits’ and bound or unbound ‘particles’.]
Technicians note
The apparatus consists of a plastic or aluminium ‘hill’, a ramp and a steel ball bearing or glass marble (see, for example, Philip Harris item Q88290/4).
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section PRO, activity 11
215
INDEX
TAP 521 6: Rutherford experiment and atomic structure
1. Describe briefly the two conflicting theories of the structure of the atom.
2.
Why was the nuclear model of Rutherford accepted as correct?
3.
What would have happened if neutrons had been used in Rutherford’s experiment? Explain your answer.
4.
What would have happened if aluminium had been used instead of gold in the alpha scattering experiment? Explain your answer.
5.
What three properties of the nucleus can be deduced from the Rutherford scattering experiment? Explain your answer.
216
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions are to help your students to think about the Rutherford ideas.
Answers and worked solutions
1 The English scientist Thomson suggested that the atom, which is a neutral particle, was made of positive charge with ‘lumps’ of negative charge inset in it  rather like the plums in a pudding. For this reason it was known as the Plum Pudding theory of the atom. Rutherford explained it this way. He knew that the alpha particles carried a positive charge so he said that the positive charge of the atom was concentrated in one place that he called the nucleus, and that the negatively charged particles, the electrons, were in orbit around the nucleus. Most of the mass was in the nucleus 2 Rutherford’s prediction using the idea of Coulomb law repulsion was verified by experiment. It also enables experimental values of nuclear charge to be obtained, ie atomic number. They would not have been repelled so it is unlikely that any would ‘bounce back’. Some could be absorbed by the nucleus. The charge on the nucleus is much smaller so deflection would be smaller.
3
4
See the equation TAP 5217: Rutherford scattering data 5 Small, massive and positive.
External reference
This activity is taken from Resourceful Physics
217
INDEX
TAP 5217: Rutherford scattering data
The idea of scattering using Coulomb’s law and a small central positive charge for the atom was communicated to the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society in February 1911. His ideas require that “the scattering due to a single atomic encounter is small” and that “it be supposed that the diameter of the sphere of positive electricity is minute compared with the diameter and sphere of influence of the atom”. The table below shows some of Geiger and Marsden’s results Counting was carried out for the same time at each angle deflected angle φ / degrees 15.0 22.5 30.0 37.5 45.0 60.0 75.0 105 120 135 150 132,000 27,300 7,800 3,300 1,457 477 211 70 52 43 33 number scattered
The actual formula
Number of α particles y falling on unit area deflected by angle φ is given by: 
y=
ntb 2 Q cos ec 4 (φ / 2) 16r 2
,
where Q is the total number of particles falling on the scattering material, t is the thickness of the material, n the number of atoms within unit volume of the material, and b given by the formula below. N is the number of positive charges, e the size of the positive charge, m the mass of an α particle, u their velocity and E the charge of the α particle.
218
INDEX
b=
2 NeE mu 2
One of Rutherford’s conclusions was that the number of scintillations per unit area of zinc sulphide screen is proportional to cos ec 4 (φ / 2)
Maths note cosec (φ/2) = 1/sin (φ/2)
What to do
Add extra columns to the table as needed to enable you to draw a graph to test Rutherford’s conclusion that the number of scintillations per unit area of zinc sulphide screen is proportional to cos ec 4 (φ / 2)
As an extension you might like to plot number scattered against 1/φ4 Write down you conclusions from the graph(s)
219
INDEX
Practical advice
Some students might like to see Rutherford’s equation and try a test to see how the results come out. This activity is considered optional. Some websites with papers of the time are given below for interest
Alternative approaches
A spreadsheet could be used for this activity.
You should find:
• •
To a reasonable degree y proportional to cos ec 4 (φ / 2) number scattered against 1/φ4 is only proportional at small angles.
External references
This activity is based on “The Scattering of α and β Particles By Matter and the Structure of the Atom. By Professor E RUTHERFORD F.R.S., University of Manchester.“ from which the equation is quoted and the section in quotation marks at the top of the page. An abstract of the paper is at: http://dbhs.wvusd.k12.ca.us/webdocs/ChemHistory/Rutherfordatomabstract.html see also: Philosophical Magazine, Series 6, Volume 27 March 1914, p. 488  498 http://dbhs.wvusd.k12.ca.us/webdocs/ChemHistory/Rutherford1914.html The paper can also be found in Foundations of Nuclear Physics, Beyer, Robert T (Ed), New York 1949 Dover Publications Inc. pp 111130. The book also contains papers by Chadwick, Lawrence, Cockcroft, Gamow and Yukawa amongst others. Of interest might also be: On a Diffuse Reflection of the αParticles, Proc. Roy. Soc. 1909 A vol. 82, p. 495500 By H. GEIGER, Ph.D., John Harling Fellow, and E. MARSDEN, Hatfield Scholar, University of Manchester http://dbhs.wvusd.k12.ca.us/webdocs/ChemHistory/GM1909.html and The Scattering of the αParticles by Matter by H. GEIGER, Ph.D. Proceedings of the Royal Society vol. A83, p. 492504 http://dbhs.wvusd.k12.ca.us/webdocs/ChemHistory/Geiger1910.html
220
INDEX
Episode 522: The size of the nucleus
Having established the existence of the nucleus, you can now consider experimental evidence for its size, starting from the Rutherford experiment.
Summary
Discussion + worked example: Size of nucleus (15 minutes) Discussion: Atomic and nucleus size (10 minutes) Student questions: Forces and closest approach (30 minutes) Discussion: Atomic number and the charge on a nucleus (5 minutes) Discussion: Upper limit of nuclear size (30 Minutes) Discussion: A puzzle for a future lesson (5 minutes)
Discussion + worked example: Size of the nucleus
You can get an idea of the possible size of the nucleus by thinking about Rutherford’s experiment. Ask: What impact parameter will result in the α particle getting closest to the nucleus? (A ‘headon’ collision with p = 0.) The principle of the conservation of energy is used to calculate the distance of closest approach as a measure for the size of a nucleus. Understanding the calculation that follows depends upon whether the students have covered electric potential and fields. Alternatively it serves as good revision. TAP 5221: Alpha particle scattering – distance of closest approach TAP 5222: Distance of closest approach.
Alpha particle (+2e) d Gold nucleus (+79e)
221
INDEX
When the α is brought momentarily to rest (“having climbed as far as it can up the electrostatic hill”) the work done in bringing it to rest will just equal its initial kinetic energy. When the speed and hence the kinetic energy is zero, all the energy is now electrostatic potential energy. If the α momentarily stops when at a distance d from the (centre of) the nucleus of charge Ze, its electrical potential energy is
Eα = 1 Ze 2e 4πε 0 d
This equals the initial kinetic energy of the α particle. Rutherford used an α source given to him by Madame Curie. The α energy was ~ 7.7MeV. For gold, Z = 79. Solving gives d ~ 3 ×1014 m. Compare this with the diameter of gold atoms ~ 3 ×1010 m. So a nucleus is at least 10 000 times smaller than an atom. It is important to emphasise that this calculation gives an upper limit on the size of the gold nucleus; we cannot say that the alpha particle touches the nucleus; a more energetic α might get closer still. An atom is mostly ‘empty’ (which is why most αs went straight through – any electrons would hardly impede the relatively massive’ high speed α).
Discussion: Atomic and nucleus size
Ask your students to suggest a scale model of the nuclear atom. For example: if a nucleus was 1 mm diameter, an atom would be 10,000 times larger or 10 m in diameter. Choose a suitable position for a 1 mm nucleus (a small ball bearing or ball of Blutac). Pace out 5 m (five large steps) to the edge of the atom where the electrons are. NB: textbook diagrams of an atom with a nucleus are not drawn to scale. Reinforce an accurate picture by getting a student to stand up as a ‘nucleus’, estimate their ‘girth’ (40 cm?) and ask where another student would have stand to be at the edge of the ‘atom’. (104 times 40 cm = 4000 m, so the radius of this “atom” is 2 km! Check with a local map to find a named location that students will recognize that is 2 km away. Further reinforcement: in a solid where atoms are close packed, the distance between adjacent nuclei ~ the size of an atom, i.e. equivalent to two students standing 4 km apart! So it’s quite amazing that any αs would ‘hit’ a nucleus at all! Both are a similar size. Cross sectional area presented by a nucleus ~ radius2 = ~ 1028 m2. Ask: How would you expect the number of reflected αs to depend upon the thickness of the metal foil containing the target nuclei? (Imagine the gold atoms in layers, chance of a deflection increases with thickness, but absorption on the way in or back out of the increasingly thick foil will eventually prevent any further increase in the number reflected and detected. It is of great help if your students can recall the following orders of magnitude:
(Diagram: resourcefulphysics.org)
222
INDEX
Radius of atomic nucleus ~ 1014 m Radius of atom ~ 1010 m
Student questions: Forces and closest approach
TAP 5223: Rutherford scattering: Directions of forces TAP 5224: Rutherford scattering: Energy and closest approach
Discussion Atomic number and the charge on a nucleus
Rutherford used his data to find the charge of the gold target nucleus. Further experiments to find the charge of Cu, Ag and Pt foils gave: atomic number Cu Ag Pt 29 47 78
α scattering experiment
29.3 × e 46.3 × e 77.4 × e
So the electric charge on a nucleus is given by the atomic number × e, i.e. Ze. With one exception (hydrogen, H1), Z is always less than the atomic mass number. So what accounts for the difference? The atom must be electrically neutral. Rutherford proposed the neutron.
Discussion Upper limit of nuclear size
Recall that Rutherford’s analysis gives an upper limit on the size on the nucleus (d ~ 1/ (α particle energy). The size you measure depends upon the energy of the α particle you use. So we need another approach to find the size of a gold nucleus. Can you think of a better particle to probe the size of a nucleus? (The neutron – being uncharged it will get closer.) Another technique is the deep inelastic scattering of electrons. Refer back if you have already covered the wave nature of particles (‘de Broglie waves’ λ = h/p), or this topic can be inserted here if desired. The electron diffraction apparatus has a basic similarity with α particle scattering. The electrons are fired at a thin film – in this case of graphite.
223
INDEX
Rutherford was fortunate that the de Broglie wavelength of the α particles (unknown to him) was quite small, and the coulomb repulsion stops αs getting too close – otherwise diffraction effects would have ‘confused’ the data! (Try the calculation if you have already covered λ = h/p.) TAP 5062: Interpreting electron diffraction patterns TAP 5225: Deep inelastic scattering TAP 5226: Electrons measure the size of nuclei
Discussion: A puzzle for a future lesson
There is a fundamental problem with Rutherford’s model. Ask your class: How can an atom with a central nucleus can be stable – why doesn’t it collapse? According to classical electrodynamics, the electrons should radiate energy as they orbit, and spiral inwards. (It’s good to leave a class with a puzzle for a future lesson.)
224
INDEX
TAP 5221: Alpha particle scattering – distance of closest approach
Alpha particle (+2e) Gold nucleus (+79e) d
If an alpha particle with a kinetic energy Eα is fired directly towards a gold nucleus it will feel a repulsion that increases as it gets closer  climbing the potential hill surrounding the nucleus. When all the kinetic energy has been converted to potential energy the alpha particle (charge +2e) has reached its distance of closest approach (d) and comes to rest at that point
225
INDEX
Practical advice
The diagram could be used as an OHT and discussed in class
External Reference
This activity is taken from Resourceful Physics
226
INDEX
TAP 5222: Distance of closest approach
Distance of closest approach
1 variation of potential r
initial kinetic energy = electrical potential energy
alpha particle with 5 MeV initial kinetic energy
5 MeV distance r charge + Ze (Z = 79 for gold) d alpha particle stops where potential hill is 5 MeV high
alpha particle scattered through 180°
Where does the alpha particle stop? Initial kinetic energy = 5 MeV = 5 × 106 eV × 1.6 × 10–19 J eV–1 = 8.0 × 10–13 J Electrical potential energy V= + 2 Ze2 4πε0d
Z = 79, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, ε = 8.9 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
0
Alpha particle stops where initial kinetic energy = electrical potential energy + 2 Ze2 8.0 × 10–13 J = 4πε 0 d substitute values of Z, e, ε0: d = 4.5 × 10–14 m
Radius of gold nucleus must be less than of the order of 10–14 m Atoms are 10 000 times larger than their nuclei
227
INDEX
228
INDEX
Practical advice
The diagram could be used as an OHT and discussed in class
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 130O
229
INDEX
TAP 522 3: Rutherford scattering: directions of forces
Scattering of alpha particles
Rutherford did not have a particle accelerator. Instead he used alpha particles, typically of energy 5 MeV, from radioactive decay. These questions are about the force of the nucleus on the alpha particle. An alpha particle has charge + 2 e, where e is the elementary unit of charge. A nucleus has charge + Ze, where Z is the number of protons in the nucleus (and the number of electrons in the atom).
Directions of forces
Path of alpha particle scattered by nucleus C
B
A
nucleus
The diagram shows an alpha particle approaching a massive nucleus from A. Assume that the nucleus recoils negligibly as the alpha particle is scattered. 1. 2. 3. Add to the diagram an arrow showing the direction of the force on the alpha particle when it is at point A, approaching the nucleus. Label the arrow FA. Add to the diagram an arrow showing the direction of the force on the alpha particle when it is at point B, at its closest to the nucleus. Label the arrow FB. What is the ratio of the magnitudes of the two forces, FA / FB given the distances shown in the diagram?
230
INDEX
4.
Add to the diagram an arrow showing the direction of the force on the nucleus when the alpha particle is at point B. Label the arrow FN. How does this force compare with the force FA on the alpha particle at the same instant? At which point, A, B or C, is the alpha particle travelling slowest?
5.
6.
At which point, A, B or C, is the alpha particle travelling fastest?
7.
The nucleus does in fact recoil a little. Add an arrow labelled ‘recoil’ to show the direction of recoil you expect as a result of the passage of an alpha particle along the whole path shown.
Uphill–downhill
The electrical potential gradient around the nucleus can be thought of as like the slope of a hill. Imagine that you are riding on the alpha particle as it goes by the nucleus. Are you riding uphill, downhill or momentarily along a contour of the hill: 8. At A?
9.
At B?
10.
At C?
11.
Is the electric potential at B larger or smaller than the electric potential at A? By what factor?
231
INDEX
Practical advice
These are intended as simple ‘startup’ questions for the discussion of alpha scattering. They are mainly qualitative, asking students to think about the direction of forces, and the nature of changes of kinetic and potential energy. The ‘hill’ metaphor for potential is exploited.
Alternative approaches
Alpha particle orbits generated by a computer simulation could be studied is: A Useful web site that includes a simulation of alpha particle scattering http://wwwoutreach.phy.cam.ac.uk/camphy/nucleus/nucleus_index.htm The following sections are relevant to this topic Plum pudding atoms, α scattering, Geiger & Marsden, Shells off tissue paper, Nucleus
Social and human context
The mathematical tools developed by the French mathematicians in the 1700s to deal with planetary orbits in the solar system were just as useful for alpha particle orbits under a repulsive force.
Answers and worked solutions
1. The repulsive force is along the line joining the alpha particle and the nucleus.
Path of alpha particle scattered by nucleus C
B
FA A nucleus
232
INDEX
2.
The repulsive force is along the line joining the alpha particle and the nucleus.
Path of alpha particle scattered by nucleus C
FB
B
FA A nucleus
3. 4.
The force at B is four times as large as the force at A, because the distance is halved and the force varies as 1/r2. The force on the nucleus is equal and opposite to the force on the alpha particle. But because the nucleus is much more massive, it recoils only slightly.
233
INDEX
Path of alpha particle scattered by nucleus C
FB
B
FA A nucleus FN
5. 6. 7.
Particle moves slowest at B, because this is the distance of closest approach, the particle has been decelerating due to repulsive force. After B it accelerates away. Here the particle is furthest from the nucleus, the alpha particle has been accelerated between B and C and is therefore going fastest at C. The alpha particle path is symmetrical about the line from the nucleus to B. So the net change of momentum of the nucleus is along this direction.
234
INDEX
Path of alpha particle scattered by nucleus C
FB
B
FA A nucleus
recoil
8. 9. 10. 11.
Uphill, because the particle is approaching the nucleus but being pushed away from it. Along contour, because the particle is travelling at right angles to the direction of the force on it. Downhill, because the particle is travelling away from the nucleus and is being pushed away from it. Potential at B larger than potential at A by a factor of 2, because the distance is halved and the potential varies as 1/r.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 80S
235
INDEX
TAP 522 4: Rutherford scattering: Energy and closest approach
Scattering of alpha particles
Rutherford did not have a particle accelerator. Instead he used alpha particles, typically of energy 5 MeV, from radioactive decay. These questions are about how close an alpha particle can get to different nuclei. An alpha particle has charge 2e, where e = 1.60 × 10–19 C. A nucleus has charge Ze, where Z is the number of protons in the nucleus (and the number of electrons in the atom). The electrical potential energy of the two charges at a distance r is:
electrical potential energy = 2e × Ze 4πε 0 r
where ε0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2 J–1 m–1. The electrical potential energy in electron volts is obtained by dividing by 1.60 × 10–19 J eV–1
Calculating the potential energy
1. Show that the units of energy from the expression
electrical potential energy = 2e × Ze 4πε 0 r
are joules.
2.
Show that the energy in MeV is given by
2Ze × 10 − 6. 4πε 0r
Alpha scattering by gold
This graph shows the energy in MeV of an alpha particle at distances r from a gold nucleus, Z = 79.
236
INDEX
Approach of alpha particle to nucleus Z = 79 (gold)
25 20 15 10 5 0 0 2 4 6
8
10
distance from nucleus / 10–14 m
3.
Make an arithmetical check to show that at distance r = 1.0 × 10–14 m the electrical potential energy is between 20 MeV and 25 MeV, as shown by the graph.
4.
How does the electrical potential energy change if the distance r is doubled?
5.
From the graph, at what distance r will an alpha particle with initial kinetic energy 5 MeV colliding headon with the nucleus, come to rest momentarily?
6.
From the graph, at what distance r will a 5 MeV alpha particle have lost half its initial kinetic energy?
237
INDEX
7.
From the graph, what energy would an alpha particle need to approach as close as 2.0 × 10–14 m in a headon collision?
Alpha scattering by tin
The next graph shows, on the same scale as before, the potential energy of an alpha particle near a nucleus of tin, Z = 50.
Approach of alpha particle to nucleus Z = 50 (tin)
25 20 15 10 5 0 0 2 4 6
8
10
distance from nucleus / 10–14 m
8.
Why are the values of the potential energy smaller at the same values of r in this second graph?
9.
At r = 5.0 × 10–14 m the electrical potential energies of an alpha particle are 4.55 MeV for gold, Z = 79 and 2.88 MeV for tin, Z = 50. Explain the ratio, 1.58, of the two energies.
238
INDEX
10.
Approximately how close can a 5 MeV alpha particle get to a tin nucleus, in a headon collision?
Alpha scattering by aluminium
The next graph shows the potential energy of an alpha particle close to an aluminium nucleus, Z = 13.
Approach of alpha particle to nucleus Z = 13 (aluminium)
25 20 15 10 5 0 0 2 4
6
8 10–14 m
10
distance from nucleus /
11.
From the graph, how close could a 5 MeV alpha particle get to a nucleus of charge? Z = 13, in a headon collision?
12.
The radius of an aluminium nucleus is approximately 3 × 10–15 m. Does a 5 MeV alpha particle get close to the nucleus, compared with the dimensions of the nucleus itself? Could the pattern of scattering be affected?
239
INDEX
Heavy ion colliders
Recently, to investigate very highenergy collisions, accelerators have been used to make headon collisions between lead nuclei travelling in opposite directions. 13. How much kinetic energy is needed to get two lead nuclei, Z = 82, within 1.0 × 10–14 m of one another? (Assume that electrical forces are the only forces operating.)
Hints
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Treat units like algebraic quantities in the expression for potential energy. Remember that the charge e coulomb is also the conversion joule per electron volt. Substitute values in the equation for potential energy. Remember 1/r. Read approximately from the graph. Read approximately from the graph. Read approximately from the graph. Look at the equation for electrical potential energy. Try the ratio 79/50. Read approximately from the graph. Read approximately from the graph. Remember that 10–15 is 1/10 of 10–14. Substitute in the expression for electrical potential energy. Or start with the answer to question 3.
240
INDEX
Practical advice
The questions focus on the distance of closest approach of an alpha particle to a nucleus. The approach is through the shape of the 1/r curve of electric potential energy, and the way the curve varies with radius and charge.
Alternative approaches
Students could explore the electric potential energy close to a nucleus, using a spreadsheet.
Social and human context
With hindsight, Rutherford was very clever to have managed without a particle accelerator. But how could he have raised the money to build one without knowing what he would find?
Answers and worked solutions
1. The units are:
C×C C J
2 −1
m −1 × m
= J.
2.
In the expression electrical potential energy = dividing by e gives 2e × Ze 4πε 0 r
2Ze 4πε 0r
for the energy in eV. Multiply by 10–6 to get the energy in MeV. 3. Substituting values gives
EP =
2 × 79 × 1.6 × 10 −19 C 4π × 8.85 × 10 −12 C 2 J −1 m −1 × 1.0 × 10 −14 m
× 10 −6 = 22.7 MeV.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Halves, because the potential energy is proportional to 1/r. About 4.6 × 10–14 m, where the graph reaches 5 MeV. Just less than 10.0 × 10–14 m. About 12 MeV. The charge on the nucleus is smaller, so the potential energy is smaller in the same ratio.
241
INDEX
9. 10. 11. 12.
The ratio of the charges, 79 / 50 = 1.58. About 3 × 10–14 m. About 0.75 × 10–14 m. The alpha particle approaches to about 2.5 times the radius of the nucleus. Attractive forces between nucleons might begin to be important, and modify the scattering. Inserting values:
13.
EP =
82 × 82 × 1.6 × 10 −19 C 4π × 8.85 × 10 −12 C 2 J −1 m −1 × 1.0 × 10 −14 m
× 10 −6 = 967 MeV.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 70S
242
INDEX
TAP 5225: Deep inelastic scattering
Deep inelastic scattering
Medium energy: elastic scattering
electron proton
Quarks move rapidly inside proton. The interaction time is long enough for the proton to behave like a blur of charge.
Deep inelastic scattering
High energy: deep inelastic scattering
electron scattered at large angle
electron
u d u
‘jet’ of particles, mainly mesons
Electron can hit one quark, and be scattered. Exchange of high energy photons leads to the creation of a jet of particles and antiparticles.
243
INDEX
Quarks as relativistic stationary pancakes
proton as seen by observer not moving relative to it: rapidly moving spherical quarks fill a sphere
coming towards the electron
proton as seen by electron moving rapidly towards it: almost stationary pancake quarks filling a flat disk
244
INDEX
Practical advice
The diagram could be used as an OHT and discussed in class
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 150O
245
INDEX
TAP 5226: Electrons measure the size of nuclei
Scattering by small particles
Hold a glass plate smeared with a little milk, or dusted with lycopodium powder, in front of a point source of light and you may see rings of light round the source. The photons are diffracted by globules of fat in the milk or by the lycopodium spores. Similarly to diffraction by a small hole of diameter d, there is a first minimum intensity at an angle θ of order of magnitude given by sin θ = λ / d. (For circular objects or apertures a more exact expression is sin θ = 1.22 λ / d.) Angles and wavelengths 1. Show that if you see a first dark ring at θ = 30°, the circular objects have diameter approximately twice the wavelength.
2.
Use the expression sin θ = 1.22 λ / d to find the angle of the first dark ring for particles four wavelengths in diameter.
Wavelengths for electrons
The de Broglie wavelength λ of an electron of momentum p is given by λ = h / p, where h is the Planck constant, 6.6 × 10–34 J Hz–1. Since the rest energy of an electron is 0.5 MeV, at energies of hundreds of MeV, the rest energy can be ignored as part of the total energy E. In this case the momentum p is given to a good approximation by p = E / c. 3. Calculate the energy in joules of an electron with energy 100 MeV (take 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J).
4.
Use the value of the energy from question 3 to calculate the momentum of the electron.
5.
Use the value of the momentum from question 4 to calculate the de Broglie wavelength of 100 MeV electrons.
246
INDEX
6.
The radius of a single proton or neutron is of the order 1.2 × 10–15 m. What approximately is the ratio of the wavelength of the electrons to the diameter of a proton or neutron?
7.
Using the relations p = E / c and λ = h / p show that the de Broglie wavelength is inversely proportional to the energy E.
8.
Use the result of question 7 and the answer to question 5 to show that the de Broglie wavelength for 400 MeV electrons is about 3.0 × 10–15 m.
Electron scattering by nuclei
You have seen that electrons of a few hundred MeV have de Broglie wavelengths comparable to the diameter of a nucleus. Suppose that in an experiment a beam of 400 MeV electrons is scattered by carbon12 nuclei. The angle θ at which the scattering is first a minimum is 42°, for which sin θ = 0.67. 9. Calculate the ratio λ / d of the de Broglie wavelength to the diameter of a carbon12 nucleus.
10.
Use the de Broglie wavelength of 400 MeV electrons from question 8 to show that the radius of a carbon12 nucleus is about 2.7 × 10–15 m.
11.
You might expect the volume occupied by the 12 nucleons of carbon12 to be 12 times the volume occupied by one nucleon. The radius of a nucleon is about 1.2 × 10–15 m. Show that the ratio of the volumes is about 12 (expect some rounding error in these figures).
247
INDEX
12.
A uranium238 nucleus has a radius of about 7.4 × 10–15 m. What roughly would be a good energy of electrons to use to determine its radius by scattering?
Hints
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. sin 30° = ½. Substitute in the expression for sin q. The conversion factor is equal to the magnitude of the charge on the electron. Use p = E/c. Use λ = h/p. Remember that the diameter = 2 x radius. Substitute p = E/c for p. Scale down the wavelength in proportion to the increase in energy. Obtain the ratio λ/d from the value of sin q. Remember the radius is half the diameter. The ratio of the volumes is the cube of the ratio of the radii. Choose a reasonable angle, say 30°.
248
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions lead students through a numerical example of the measurement of nuclear dimensions by electron scattering, using the diffraction of the electrons to obtain the scale. Many students will require help with the powers of ten involved, and the conversion between electron volts and energy in joules. The questions are intended primarily as ‘learning questions’ to be gone through slowly. Some students may profit from tackling them alone, but most will need to be taken through them, and have the general message pointed out for them.
Social and human context
To measure these tiny distances needed a linear accelerator a few kilometres in length. Large energies to measure small dimensions are expensive.
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2.
sin θ = 1.22 = λ d
sin 30° = ½ = λ/d approximately.
1.22 4 = 0.305. The angle whose sin is 0.305 is 17.8°. 3. Energy = 100 MeV = 10 8 eV = 10 8 eV × (1.6 × 10 −19 J eV −1 ) = 1.6 × 10 −11 J.
4.
p= = E c 1.6 × 10−11 J 3.0 × 108 m s −1
= 0.53 × 10−19 kg m s −1.
249
INDEX
5.
λ= =
h p 6.6 × 10 −34 J s 0.53 × 10 −19 J m −1 s
= 12 × 10 −15 m. Ratio of wavelength to radius = 12 x 10–15 m / 1.2 x 10–15 m = 10; ratio of wavelength to diameter = 5. 7. Substitute
p= E c
6.
in
λ= h p
gives
λ= hc . E
8.
From
λ= hc E
λ is inversely proportional to E. Since λ for 100 MeV is 12 x 10–15 m then λ for 400 MeV is 3 x 10–15 m. 9. 10. Since sin θ = 0.67, then 0.67 = 1.22 λ / d, and λ / d = 0.55. Since λ for 400 MeV is 3 x 10–15 m, and λ / d = 0.55, then d = 5.5 x 10–15 m and r = 2.7 x 10–15 m. (2.7/1.2)3 = 11.4. It would be closer to 12 but for rounding errors. Diameter of the uranium238 nucleus = 15 x 10–15 m. Choosing λ = 2d gives λ = 30 x 10–15 m, about five times the wavelength of 400 MeV electrons (3 x 10–15 m). So scale down energy by a factor 5, to say 80 MeV.
11. 12.
250
INDEX
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 90S
251
INDEX
Episode 523: Preparation for nuclear stability topic
Why are some nuclides stable while others are unstable (radioactive)? Starting from the pattern of stability, this section looks at forces in the nucleus and the idea of binding energy.
Episode 524: Stable nuclides Episode 525: Binding energy
Main aims
Students will: 1. Sketch the NZ graph for stable nuclei. 2. Describe the balance of forces that results in a stable nucleus. 3. Calculate mass defect and binding energy. 4. Relate nuclear fission and fusion to the graph of binding energy per nucleon.
Prior knowledge
Students should know about the composition of nuclei in terms of protons and neutrons. They should be familiar with nuclear notation (e.g. 209 Bi ) 83
Where this leads
An understanding of nuclear stability leads on to a study of nuclear fusion and fission.
252
INDEX
Episode 524: Stable nuclides
Hundreds of nuclides are known; this episode looks at the pattern of stability using an NZ plot, and considers the need for an additional, attractive force to hold the nucleus together.
Summary Discussion: Which stable nuclides exist? (10 minutes) Student Activity: Using Excel to generate an NZ plot. (20 minutes) Discussion: Interpreting the graph. (5 minutes) Worked example: Calculating the force between protons. (10 minutes) Discussion: The nature of the strong nuclear force. (5 minutes) Worked example + student example: Calculating nuclear densities. (15 minutes)
Discussion: Which stable nuclides exist
Rehearse and extend your students’ existing knowledge. Nuclei are composed of N neutrons and Z protons – collectively A = N + Z nucleons. Explain (or revise) nuclide notation; for example: The heaviest stable element is bismuth83, 209 Bi . How many protons and neutrons in this nucleus? 83 (83 and 126) There are 90 naturallyoccurring elements between hydrogen (Z = 1) to uranium (Z = 92). Is there anything odd about this? (Two are “missing”; these are purely artificial and man made, 99 Tc 43
63 (technitium) and 61 Pm (promethium). Both are radioactive with relatively short half lives on a geological time scale, and thus would have decayed long ago.)
All elements beyond Z = 92 are manmade. So far (as of February 2004) the record is Z = 116.
Student activity: Using Excel to generate an NZ plot
Use a spreadsheet to generate a plot of N versus Z for stable nuclides. To save time (and transcription errors!) you could prepare an Excel spreadsheet with the data below already entered (columns for the element name, A, Z and, anticipating work to follow, the nucleus mass in atomic mass units u – see below). Representative stable nuclides
2 1H 3 2 He 6 3 Li 9 4 Be 11 5B 15 7N
19 9F 100 42 Mo
197 79 Au
24 21 Mg 113 48 Cd
212 83 Bi
36 17 Cl 126 52Te
238 92 U
56 26 Fe 141 59 Pr
75 33 As 160 66 Dy
89 39Y 180 72 Hf
253
INDEX
TAP 5241: Stability: Balanced numbers of neutrons and protons
Discussion: Interpreting the graph
Describe the graph. (It is linear (N ∝ Z) up to Z ~ 20, then increasingly N > Z – there is a ‘neutron excess’. The neutron excess is crucial in explaining nuclear stability, and for setting up a chain reaction in the exploitation of nuclear energy. Think about the Coulomb repulsion between protons. What are the neutrons doing in there? (Neutrons must help overcome the strong repulsion between the protons, partly by ‘diluting them’, but also providing an attractive force to balance the electric repulsion. Hence the name strong nuclear force.
Worked example: Calculating the force between protons
If Coulomb’s law has been covered, calculate the repulsive force between two protons that just ‘touch’, so the separation of their centres r is the diameter of a proton (1.4 × 1015 m).
Fe =
1
q1 q 2
4πε 0 r 2
where q1 = q2 = +e = 1.6 × 1019 C
Fe ~ 100 N
Discussion: The nature of the strong nuclear force
Explain the need for the strong nuclear force to balance the Coulomb repulsion. This force must be attractive – it overcomes the coulomb repulsion; independent of electric charge – it acts between nn, pp and np; and very short range ~ 1fm = 1015 m.
Worked example + student example: Calculating nuclear densities
Calculate the density of a nucleon: nucleon mass ~ 1.7 × 1027 kg; radius ~ 1.4 × 1015 m; density
ρ ~ 1.4 × 1017 kg m3
This is enormous compared to the density of everyday matter. Ask your students to repeat the calculation for He4 (or give data for other nuclides): Nuclide mass ~ 6.6 × 1027 kg; radius ~ 2 × 1015m; density ~ 1.6 × 1017 kg m3 So the density is roughly the same for all nuclei. This is summed up in the relationship: r = r0 A1/3 with r0 = 1.4 fm
254
INDEX
TAP 5241: Stability: Balanced numbers of neutrons and protons
Stable and unstable nuclei: balance of numbers of protons and neutrons
stable
150
alpha decay beta decay electron capture positron emission fission
100 N=Z
50
0 0 20 40 60 proton number Z 80 100
This plot of neutron number against proton number shows nuclei decay paths, and the trend of stable nuclei.
255
INDEX
Practical advice
The diagram could be used as an OHT and discussed in class
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 50O
256
INDEX
Episode 525: Binding energy
Summary
Discussion: Introducing mass defect and atomic mass units. (10 minutes) Discussion: Mass defect and binding energy (10 minutes) Worked example: Calculating binding energy. (10 minutes) Student questions: Calculations. (20 minutes) Student activity: Spreadsheet calculations. (20 minutes) Student activity: Spreadsheet calculations of binding energy per nucleon. (20 minutes) Discussion: Fission and fusion linked to binding energy graph. (10 minutes)
Discussion: Introducing mass defect and atomic mass units
Ask your students to consider whether the following data is selfconsistent: proton mass, mp = 1.673 × 1027 kg neutron mass, mn = 1.675 × 1027 kg mass of a
4 2 He
nucleus = 6.643 × 1027 kg
4 The mass of a 2 He nucleus is less than the sum of the masses of its parts; this is true for all nuclides. So much for conservation of mass.
Introduce the atomic mass unit (amu, or u) as a convenient unit of nuclear mass. 1 amu or 1 u = 1/12 the mass of a neutral 12C atom (i.e. including its six electrons) = 1.66056 × 1027 kg. Thus: mp = 1.0073 u mn = 1.0087 u me = 0.00055 u mass of a neutral
4 2 He
atom = 4.0026 u
Discussion: Mass defect and binding energy
What has happened to the missing mass – or mass defect – between the whole and the sum of the parts? To separate the particles, they must be pulled apart against the attractive strong force. They thus have potential energy when they are separated. When the particles come together to form a nucleus, their potential energy decreases. So energy must be put in to separate the nucleons of a nucleus. This energy is known as the binding energy, a rather confusing term because students often think that this means that energy is required to bind nucleons together. As with chemical bonds, this is the opposite of the truth. Energy is needed to break bonds.
257
INDEX
Einstein’s Special Theory of Relativity (1905) relates mass and energy via the equation E = mc2 (where c is the speed of light in a vacuum). In this case, we have: binding energy = mass defect × c2 or
ΔE = Δm × c2
(It is not advisable to talk about mass being ‘converted to energy’ or similar expressions. It is better to say that, in measuring an object’s mass, we are determining its energy. A helium nucleus has less mass than its constituent nucleons; in pulling them apart, we do work and so give them energy; hence their mass is greater.)
Worked example: Calculating binding energy
4 Calculate the mass defect and binding energy for 2 He . (Mass defect = 0.053 × 1027 kg; binding 12 energy = 1.59 × 10 J = 9.94 MeV)
Student Questions
TAP 5251: Change in energy: Change in mass TAP 5252: Finding binding energy TAP 5253: Fusion in a kettle?
Student activity
A data analysis exercise using Excel. This uses a spreadsheet to calculate binding energy for a number of nuclides. TAP 5254: A binding energy calculator
Student activity
Another spreadsheet activity, this time looking at the binding energy per nucleon. Note that it is desirable to plot this graph with a negative energy axis; this means that the lowest values are for the most stable nuclides. TAP 5255: Binding energy of nuclei
Discussion
Briefly discuss fission and fusion in terms of the graph. Although the fission ‘jump’ looks quite small compared to a typical fusion jump, the graph is plotting BE per nucleon. Many more nucleons are involved in the fission of heavy atoms than in the fusion of lighter ones. (This topic can be developed further when discussing nuclear power.) TAP 5256: Binding energy per nucleon
258
INDEX
TAP 5251: Change in energy: Change in mass
Calculating using Erest = mc2
These questions show you how to calculate changes in energy from changes in mass, using Einstein’s relation Erest = mc2 linking the rest energy of a particle to its mass.
Transmutation of chemical elements
The dream of the ancients was alchemy: turning base metals into gold. Although this is chemically impossible, at the end of the nineteenth century radioactivity was discovered by Henri Becquerel. When alpha and beta radiation are emitted atomic nuclei are ‘transmuted’ from one element to another. For example:
238 92 uranium 4 → 2 alpha + 234 thorium. 90
In 1932 using protons (hydrogen nuclei) accelerated through a potential difference of 800 000 V, two English physicists, Cockcroft and Walton, carried out the first artificial transmutation: by bombarding lithium with the protons they produced two helium nuclei:
1 7 4 1H + 3Li → 2 4 He + 2He.
Change in mass
Notice that in both these reactions the mass number and charge (proton number) are conserved. Energy, however, is only conserved if you take account of changes to the rest energy – in effect of changes to the masses – of the particles. In Cockcroft and Walton’s experiment, the masses of the particles are:
• • •
H: 1.0073 atomic mass units Li: 7.0160 atomic mass units He: 4.0015 atomic mass units.
An atomic mass unit, symbol u, is equal to 1.6605 × 10–27 kg. 1 Show that the mass decreases in this reaction.
1 7 4 1H + 3Li → 2 4 He + 2He.
Calculate Δm in atomic mass units and in kilograms.
259
INDEX
Change in energy
2 The energy of the protons was 800 000 electron volts (800 keV). The lithium was in solid form so the nuclei would only have been vibrating due to thermal energy, less than an electron volt. The reaction was captured in this photograph:
Two pairs of alpha particles, emerging in opposite directions, can be seen in the photograph. From the range of the tracks through the cloud chamber the energy of the alpha particles was measured to be 8.5 MeV each. Show that the total kinetic energy of the particles increases, and calculate ΔE in MeV and in joules.
3
If the increase in kinetic energy comes from the decrease in rest energy you should expect ΔE = Δmc2. Calculate the ratio of the change in kinetic energy to the change in mass ΔE/Δm in J kg–1.
260
INDEX
4
Show that the value of the ratio ΔE/Δm is approximately consistent with the relationship ΔE = Δmc2.
The large value of c 2 (9 × 1016 J kg–1: use this value from now on in calculations) means that a small change in mass represents a vast change in rest energy. This relationship between mass and energy is why particle physicists measure masses in MeV / c2; any unit of energy divided by c2 is a unit of mass.
Creating massive particles
Energy is ‘materialised’ in matter–antimatter production. A photon of electromagnetic radiation can produce an electron and a positron. In this case, the energy of the photon vanishes and the rest energy of the particles appears. (This reaction needs to take place near to the nucleus of a heavy atom to conserve momentum but this is not going to affect your calculations here.) In this bubble chamber photograph a photon enters from the bottom. It is uncharged and so produces no observable track. After some distance the photon disappears and produces the electron–positron pair. These two charged particles ionise the liquid in the chamber and bubbles form near the ions and are photographed.
In this case the chamber is filled with liquid hydrogen mixed with liquid neon. It is held under pressure which is released just as the particles enter the chamber to encourage bubbles to form and enlarge near the ions. 5 The bubble chamber is in a magnetic field, so charged particles bend due to the force Bqv on a moving charge. How does the photograph show that the two particles have opposite charges?
261
INDEX
6
The mass of the electron is 5.5 × 10–4 u. What is the minimum energy photon that will produce an electron–positron pair? From what part of the electromagnetic spectrum is this? (Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34 J Hz–1.)
Nuclear binding energy
If protons and neutrons (together known as nucleons) are bound together in a nucleus, the bound nucleus must have less energy than the nucleons of which it is made. That is, the rest energy of the nucleus must be less than the sum of the rest energies of its nucleons. In turn, this means that the mass of the nucleus must be less than the sum of the masses of its nucleons. The simplest compound nucleus is the deuteron, the nucleus of hydrogen2. It consists of a proton and a neutron bound together by the strong nuclear force. The masses of these particles are:
• • •
proton: 1.0073 u neutron: 1.0087 u deuteron: 2.0136 u. Calculate the difference in mass between a deuteron and one proton and one neutron.
7
8
Calculate the binding energy of the deuteron in J and in MeV.
9
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of the deuteron.
10
Express the difference in mass as a percentage of the sum of the masses of the proton and neutron.
262
INDEX
Mass change in nuclear fission
A possible reaction for the nuclear fission of uranium235 is:
235 1 133 99 92 U + 0 n→ 51 Sb + 41 Nb
+ 4 1 n. 0
The masses of the particles are
• • • •
U235 = 235.0439 u Sb133 = 132.9152 u Nb99 = 98.9116 u neutron (n) = 1.0087 u. Show that the energy change per atom of uranium is about 200 MeV and calculate Δm/m.
11
Summary
Einstein's famous equation Erest = mc2 reveals a Universe that is not as simple as it seems at first sight. The mass of a particle is generally a very large part of its total energy. The existence of rest energy was not suspected until after Einstein had predicted it, because the change in mass is usually so small, because changes in energy are usually a small fraction of the rest energy. Only in nuclear reactions where Δm/m ~ 0.1% or more are you able to see the change in mass, accompanied by what appears to be a huge change in energy.
Hints
1 2 3 4 5 6 Compare masses of H plus Li with mass of two He nuclei. Two 8.5 MeV alpha particles come out, but one 800 keV proton goes in. Compare the answers to questions 1 and 2. Don’t expect to get exactly the speed of light. Remember to take the square root of c2! What is the difference between forces F and  F? Start with the mass of an electron in atomic mass units. Convert to kilograms. Write down the mass of an electron–positron pair. Use Erest = mc2 to get the rest energy of the pair in joules. Then use E = hf. Do this one in the same way as question 1. Erest = mc2 again. But now use the electron charge to get to electron volts and MeV. How many nucleons in a deuteron?
7 8 9
263
INDEX
10 11
Best to take the difference as a fraction of the mass before. Add up before and after masses in atomic mass units first. Don’t forget there’s one extra neutron to start with and four extra neutrons afterwards. Then convert mass changes first to joules and then to MeV.
264
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions practise the use of the relation between rest energy and mass in various contexts: nuclear transmutation, creation of particle–antiparticle pairs, nuclear binding and nuclear fission. You may need to select only certain groups of questions, depending on what the class has covered. Alternatively, the whole set could be used for revision. Some of the questions make extra demands in frequent changes of units, between atomic mass units, kilograms, joules and electron volts or MeV. You may well need to give extra help here. Note the consistent use of the term ‘rest energy’. The rest energy is treated as part of the total energy. It manifests itself in the mass of a particle. If mass is measured in kilograms and energy in joules, then the conversion is Erest = mc2. Remember that the mass, an invariant, is a physical property of a particle independent of frame of reference. The questions bring out the fact that the rest energy is a very large fraction of the total energy, in many cases.
Alternative approaches
You may want to show that energies involved in everyday processes involve negligible changes in mass. The calculations of percentage change of mass in the questions here provide a starting point.
Social and human context
It is not possible to ignore the consequences for war and peace of the possibility of tapping these very large sources of energy.
Answers and worked solutions
1.
Mass of H plus Li = 1.0073 u + 7.0160 u = 8.0233 u Mass of two He = 2 × 4.0015 u = 8.0030 u Difference Δm = 8.0030 u − 8.0233 u = −0.0203 u
So we can find the mass difference in kg:
Δm = −0.0203 u × 1.6605 × 10 −27 kg = −3.3708 × 10 −29 kg
2. Increase in energy:
ΔE = 2 × 8.5 MeV − 0.8 MeV = 16.2 MeV
In joules:
ΔE = (16.2 × 10 6 eV) × (1.6 × 10 −19 J eV −1 ) = 2.6 × 10 −12 J
265
INDEX
3.
2.60 × 10 −12 J ΔE = = 7.7 × 1016 J kg −1 . − 29 Δm 3.37 × 10 kg
4. 5.
If ΔE = Δmc2, then c2 = 7.7 × 1016J kg–1, so c = 2.8 × 108 m s–1. The force on a moving charged particle is Bqv. If the charge q changes sign, the direction of the force is reversed, so the curvature is opposite. The mass of an electron or positron is equal to:
(5.5 × 10 −4 u) × (1.66 × 10 −27 kg) = 9.1 × 10 −31 kg.
6.
From Erest = mc2, the rest energy of an electron–positron pair is:
E rest = 2 × 9.1× 10 −31 kg × (3 × 10 8 m s −1 ) 2 = 1.6 × 10 −13 J.
If this energy is supplied by a photon of energy E = hf, then:
f = 1.6 × 10 −13 J 6.63 × 10
−34 −1
J Hz
= 2.5 × 10 20 Hz.
This is the frequency of a gamma ray. 7. The mass difference is:
2.0136 u − (1.0073 u + 1.0087 u) = −0.0024 u.
I
n kg the mass difference is:
− 0.0024 u × (1.66 × 10 −27 kg) = −3.98 × 10 −30 kg.
8.
Bindingenergy = −3.98 × 10−30 kg × (3 × 108 m s−1)2 = –3.58 × 10−13 J =– 3.58 × 10−13 J 1.6 × 10−19 J eV−1 = –2.2 MeV. = –2.2 × 106 eV
9. 10.
The deuteron has two nucleons so the binding energy per nucleon is –2.2 MeV / 2 = –1.1 MeV. As a percentage the mass difference is equal to:
0.0024 u = 1.2 × 10 −3 × 100 = 0.1% (approximately) 1.0073 u + 1.0087 u
11.
266
INDEX
Mass after = 132.9152 u + 98.9116 u + (4 ×1.0087 u) = 235.8616 u Mass difference = 236.0526 u − 235.8616 u = 0.191 u. Change in rest energy =
The ratio is given by:
0.191 u × (1.66 × 10 27 kg) × (3 × 10 8 m s −1 ) 2 1.6 ×10
−19
J eV
−1
= 1.78 × 10 8 eV = 178 MeV.
Δm / m = 0.191 u / 236 u = 8.1×10 −4 ~ 0.1%.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 200S
267
INDEX
TAP 5252: Finding binding energy
Binding energy of carbon12 nucleus
Mass of carbon12 atom 1 atomic mass unit u = 1/12 of mass of C12 atom 1 u = 1.66056 × 10–27 kg mass of C12 atom = 12.0 u
Mass of 6 electrons mass of electron = 9.1095 × 10–31 kg = 0.000 549 u mass of 6 electrons = 0.0033 u
6 electrons 6 protons 6 neutrons
Calculate mass of carbon12 nucleus mass of carbon12 nucleus = mass of carbon12 atom – mass of 6 electrons
Calculate mass of all the protons and neutrons mass of proton = 1.67265 × 10–27 kg = 1.00728 u mass of neutron
= 1.67495 × 10–27 kg = 1.00866 u
mass of carbon12 nucleus = (12.000 – 0.0033) u = 11.9967 u
mass of 6 protons and 6 neutrons = 6 (1.007 28 + 1.008 66) u = 12.0956 u
Difference in mass = mass of carbon12 nucleus – mass of protons and neutrons = (11.9967 – 12.0956) u = – 0.0989 u
Energy well for carbon12 is 7.7 MeV per nucleon deep
Binding energy in mass units: = – 0.0989 u = – 1.643 × 10–28 kg Erest = mc2 in energy units: = – 1.477 × 10–11 J = – 92.16 MeV
7.7 MeV
Binding energy per nucleon –92.16 MeV for 12 nucleons = – 7.7 MeV per nucleon
Binding energy of a nucleus is the difference between its mass and the sum of the masses of its neutrons and protons
268
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can use it for discussion with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 60P
269
INDEX
TAP 5253: Fusion in a kettle?
A change of scale
When you are confident with basic calculations of fission and fusion energy changes, you should work through these questions that try to put the energies of these changes into a more human scale for you. You will also need to understand the conversion of atomic mass units to energy and the meaning of the term ‘electron volt’.
Try these
One of the reactions that fuel the stars is the fusion of two protons to give deuterium. In turn the deuterium goes through a series of reactions, the end product being helium. This is also a process that releases energy. In this question you are asked to consider the energy that would be released if all the deuterium in the water contained in an electric kettle were to be converted by fusion into helium. The kettle contains 1 litre of water. The data you need are listed below. 1 atomic mass unit (u) = 931 MeV 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1
Particle
1 1H 2 1H 3 2 He 1 0n
Mass / u 1.007 825 2.014 102 3.016 030 1.008 665
1
3 2 Two deuterium nuclei 1 H can fuse to give one nucleus of helium 2 He with the ejection of one other particle. Write down the balanced equation that represents this reaction.
2
Calculate the mass change that occurs in this reaction.
270
INDEX
3
Convert this energy into joules.
This gives you the energy released when two deuterium nuclei fuse. The next steps take you through the calculation of the total energy released if all the deuterium in the kettle water were to fuse to make helium3. The ratio of deuterium atoms to hydrogen in water is roughly 1 to 7000. 4 What is the mass of 1 mole of water (H = 1 u; O = 16 u roughly)?
5
How many moles of water are contained in the litre?
6
How many molecules of water (H2O) are in the kettle?
7
How many molecules of deuterium oxide (D2O) are in the kettle?
8
Each heavy water molecule has two atoms of deuterium; what total energy is released if all the deuterium in the kettle is converted to helium3?
271
INDEX
Now to put this number in a new perspective. It requires 4200 J to increase the temperature of 1kg of water by 1K. 9 How many litres of water could be heated through 100 K by the fusion energy you calculated in question 8?
Hints
1 It is important to consider the atomic electrons in this equation. You begin with two, one for each hydrogen. How many electrons does an unionised atom of deuterium have? So what must one of the emitted particles be? This should lead you to the other particle. The conversions you need are near the data table in the question. The formula of water shows that there are two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen for each water molecule. 1 litre of water has a mass of 1 kg. 1 mole contains 6 x 1023 molecules of water.
2 4 5 6
272
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions can be modified in many ways, not least by changing the homely example of a kettle to perhaps a bath full of water or even to Lake Windermere or the local reservoir.
Social and human context
The 6000 litres of heated water may not seem so significant until you realise that this has come from the fusion of deuterium which had an original volume of 0.15 cm3.
Answers and worked solutions
1.
2 2 3 1 H + 1 H→ 2 He 1 + 0n
2. 3. 4. 5.
Δm = (3.016 030 u + 1.008 665 u) – 2 × 2.014 102 u = – 0.0035 u
0.003509 u × 931 × 106 eV u–1 × 1.6 × 10–19 J eV–1 = 5.23 × 10–13 J 18 g 1 litre of water has a mass of 1 kg. number of moles = 1000 g / 18 gmol–1 = 56 mol
6. 7. 8. 9.
56 mol × 6.02 × 1023 mol–1 = 3 × 1025 (3.4 ×1025)/7000= 4.9 × 1021 energy released = 4.9 ×1021 × (5.23 ×10–13 J) = 2.49 × 109 J (2.49 ×109 J)/ (4200 J kg–1K–1 × 100K) = 6000 kg = 6000 litres
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 260S
273
INDEX
TAP 525 4: A binding energy calculator
This model removes the drudgery from the calculation of binding energies. There are three sheets. Sheet 1 does the calculations.
4 4 The calculator numbers masses / amu electrons protons neutrons constitutents total quoted mass of isotope difference in mass energy released 5 5 7 0.0025 5.0365 7.0609 12.0999 11.00931 1.09059 1.63E10 energy / J
Sheet 2 holds the common data – masses for neutrons, protons, electrons, the value of one atomic mass unit in kilograms and the speed of light
Masses of particles name symbol
mass / unified atomic 0.0005 1.0073 1.0087
electron proton neutron Constants Speed of light 1 amu
0 1 1
1e 1p 0n
c
3.00E+08 m/s 1.67E27 kg
274
INDEX
Sheet 3 holds a sample of isotope data.
275
INDEX
Element H He Li Be Be C N O F Ne Na Mg Al Si P Si Cl Ar K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Ni Co Cu Zn Ga Ge As Br Se Kr Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb In Te Xe Cs Ba
Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 27 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 53 52 54 55 56
A 1 4 7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 32 35 38 39 40 45 47 51 52 55 56 58 59 63 64 69 74 75 79 80 82 85 88 89 90 93 98 102 103 106 107 114 115 118 121 127 130 132 133 138
Mass / amu 1.00783 4.00260 7.01600 9.01218 11.00931 12.00000 14.00307 15.99491 18.99840 19.99244 22.98980 23.98504 26.98153 27.97693 30.97376 31.97207 34.96885 37.96272 38.96371 39.96259 44.95592 46.95180 50.94400 51.94050 54.93810 55.93490 57.93530 58.93320 62.92980 63.92910 68.92570 73.92190 74.92160 78.91830 79.91650 81.91350 84.91170 87.90560 88.90540 89.90430 92.90600 97.90550 101.90370 102.90480 105.90320 106.90509 113.90360 114.90410 117.90180 120.90380 126.90040 129.90670 131.90420 132.90510 137 90500
276
INDEX
What to do:
Enter the values for the chosen isotope into the pale yellow boxes in sheet 1, following the tips in the comment boxes, and the binding energy is calculated and displayed in the pale blue box. You will need to double click on the boxes and have a computer running Excel
277
INDEX
Practical advice
This is provided as a constructed calculator, together with some useful data.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, File 30T
278
INDEX
TAP 5255: Binding energy of nuclei
Looking for patterns
You will use the data in a spreadsheet to calculate the binding energy of a set of nuclei. You will then produce a plot to show how the binding energy per nucleon varies with mass of the nucleus.
You will need
computer running a spreadsheet data provided in spreadsheet format
Building the spreadsheet
Take a look at the four columns in the spreadsheet data. The first is simply the name of some of the stable elements. This is followed by a column showing the atomic number (Z, the number of protons in the nucleus) and a column giving the mass number (A, the total number of nucleons, i.e. protons plus neutrons). Finally there is a column giving the actual atomic mass. The units of this column are atomic mass units, which are defined as exactly onetwelfth of the mass of a carbon12 atom. The atomic mass unit (u) is also called the unified atomic mass constant, and has a value of 1.660 5402 × 10–27 kg. Use this information to calculate the binding energy of each nucleus. The binding energy is simply the difference in energy between a nucleus and its constituent parts. This energy change can be measured as a change in the mass of the nucleus. A useful shortcut is that a mass difference of 1 atomic mass unit is equivalent to 931 MeV (million electron volts) of energy. To find the binding energy you will need to subtract the mass of the constituents from the atomic mass. The constituents are Z protons, (A – Z) neutrons and Z electrons (electrons are included in the atomic mass). The masses of these in atomic mass units are:
• • •
mass of neutron = 1.008 665 u mass of proton = 1.007 277 u mass of electron = 0.000 548 u
Create new columns in the spreadsheet giving the number of neutrons and the mass of the constituents. Now calculate the binding energy of the entire nucleus and the binding energy per nucleon. Plot this last quantity against mass number (not atomic number). Double click on the chart below, you will need a computer running Excel.
279
INDEX
Element H He Li Be Be C N O F Ne Na Mg Al Si P Si Cl Ar K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Ni Co Cu Zn Ga Ge As Br Se Kr Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb In Te Xe Cs Ba
Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 27 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 53 52 54 55 56
A 1 4 7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 32 35 38 39 40 45 47 51 52 55 56 58 59 63 64 69 74 75 79 80 82 85 88 89 90 93 98 102 103 106 107 114 115 118 121 127 130 132 133 138
Mass / u 1.00783 4.00260 7.01600 9.01218 11.00931 12.00000 14.00307 15.99491 18.99840 19.99244 22.98980 23.98504 26.98153 27.97693 30.97376 31.97207 34.96885 37.96272 38.96371 39.96259 44.95592 46.95180 50.94400 51.94050 54.93810 55.93490 57.93530 58.93320 62.92980 63.92910 68.92570 73.92190 74.92160 78.91830 79.91650 81.91350 84.91170 87.90560 88.90540 89.90430 92.90600 97.90550 101.90370 102.90480 105.90320 106.90509 113.90360 114.90410 117.90180 120.90380 126.90040 129.90670 131.90420 132.90510 137 90500
particle neutron proton electron
mass /u 1.008 665 1.007 277 0.000 548
280
INDEX
There are four columns in the spreadsheet data.
• • • •
The name of some of the stable elements. The atomic number (Z, the number of protons in the nucleus). The mass number (A, the total number of nucleons: protons plus neutrons). The actual atomic mass. The units of this column are atomic mass units, which are defined as exactly onetwelfth of the mass of a carbon12 atom. The atomic mass unit is also called the unified atomic mass constant, and has a value of 1.660 5402 x 10–27 kg.
You will have
1. A spreadsheet giving the binding energy of a selection of nuclei. 2. A graph of binding energy per nucleon against mass number.
281
INDEX
Practical advice
Only a selection of stable nuclei have been included, and the data have been presorted so they are in mass number order rather than atomic number order, and should therefore produce a graph very readily. Students need to be encouraged to change the default settings in their spreadsheet to make the graph clearer and more easily read  an example from Excel is included here. There are some obvious spikes in the graph, which students should be encouraged to think about. This chart is a springboard for discussing why binding energies are negative, why fission and fusion release energy and why certain nuclei are more stable than others. The chart given here indicates some of the key features.
Alternative approaches
Use the chart given and ask students to investigate different parts of it  the long slow slope showing where fission releases energy, the steeper slope where fusion releases energy and the spikes at 4He, 12C and 16O. These are particularly important for stellar fusion.
Social and human context
It has often been claimed that our Universe is a fluke because the values of certain fundamental constants are closely tuned to values that produce a Universe we can live in. One of these claims is that the fusion of helium in stars to produce carbon and hence all the heavier elements of which we are made requires a lucky coincidence of energy levels between 4He, 8Be (which is unstable and forms for a short time) and 12C. However, a glance at the chart shows that elements such as 12C and 16O are very close to being clusters of helium nuclei so it is, perhaps, no surprise that the relevant energy levels are close to coincidence. A good reference on this, and other aspects of basic laws, is: Dreams of a Final Theory by Steven Weinberg (published by Vintage).
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 140s
282
INDEX
TAP 525 6: Binding energy per nucleon
The graph below shows the binding energy per nucleon against nucleon number. Elements with a high binding energy per nucleon are very difficult to break up. Iron 56 has the highest binding energy per nucleon of any element and this which explains why there is so much of it in the universe.
9 8
Binding energy per nucleon (MeV)
7 6 5 4 3 2
1 0 20
Energy released by fusion
Energy released by fission
40
60
80
100 120
140 160 180
200
220 240
Mass number (A)
The part of the curve to the left shows that two light elements can produce energy by fusion while the part of the curve to the right shows that a heavy element can produce energy by fission. Therefore if a reaction takes place where the products are closer to the base then the original nucleus (nuclei) then energy is given out. For helium the binding energy per nucleon is 28.3/4 = 7.1 MeV. The helium nucleus has a high binding energy per nucleon and is more stable than some of the other nuclei close to it in the periodic table.
283
INDEX
Some of the binding energies per nucleon for some common elements are shown in the following table.
Element Deuterium Helium 4 Lithium 7 Beryllium 9 Iron 56 Silver 107 Iodine 127 Lead 206 Polonium 210 Uranium 235 Uranium 238
Mass of nucleons (u) 2.01594 4.03188 7.05649 9.07243 56.44913 107.86187 128.02684 207.67109 211.70297 236.90849 239.93448
Nuclear Mass (u) 2.01355 4.00151 7.01336 9.00999 55.92069 106.87934 126.87544 205.92952 209.93683 234.99351 238.00037
Binding Energy (MeV) 2.23 28.29 40.15 58.13 492.24 915.23 1072.53 1622.27 1645.16 1783.80 1801.63
Binding Energy per Nucleon (MeV) 1.12 7.07 5.74 6.46 8.79 8.55 8.45 7.88 7.83 7.59 7.57
A very useful web site containing a huge nuclear database is to be found at: http://nucleardata.nuclear.lu.se It may be more helpful to consider the binding energy per nucleon diagram in the form shown in Figure 2 where reactions tend to move the nuclei towards the valley at the bottom of the curve. (In this case note that the binding energies per nucleon are given as negative values).
0 1
Binding energy per nucleon (MeV)
2
Energy released by fusion
3 4 5 6 7 8
0
4
Energy released by fission
238 12 16
He C
85 56
U
O
Fe
Br
148
La
20
40
60
80
100 120
140 160 180
200
220 240
Mass number (A)
Figure 2
284
INDEX
Episode 526: Preparation for nuclear fission topic
This topic does not lend itself to much practical work; there are a few analogue demonstrations which can be valuable. Students may have strong feelings about nuclear technology – power stations and bombs. You could make this a focus of your coverage of this area: the physics ideas won’t tell you what’s right or wrong, but they should allow you to make more informed judgments on questions such as nuclear waste disposal or the use of depleted uranium in weaponry.
Episode 527: Nuclear transmutation Episode 528: Controlling fission
Main aims
Students will: 1. Use balanced equations to represent transmutation, fission and fusion events. 2. Calculate mass and energy changes in such events. 3. Understand how a chain reaction can arise in fissile material. 4. Explain how a controlled chain reaction is managed in a nuclear power reactor.
Prior knowledge
Students should already be familiar with standard notation for nuclides and with balanced nuclear equations. They should know how to calculate energy changes from changes in nuclide masses.
Where this leads
If your students are to study an astronomy topic, this work forms a basis for understanding nuclear processes in stars. Massenergy calculations using E = mc2, as well as the ability to balance nuclear equations, will also be useful in any study of particle physics. neutron uranium
285
INDEX
Episode 527: Nuclear transmutation
Students need to move beyond the idea that nuclear changes are represented solely by alpha, beta and gamma decay. There are other decay processes, and there are other events that occur when a nucleus absorbs a particle and becomes unstable.
Summary
Discussion: Transmutation of elements. (15 minutes) Student questions: Balancing equations. (30 minutes) Discussion: Induced fission. (10 minutes) Demonstration: The nucleus as a liquid drop. (10 minutes) Discussion: Fission products and radioactive waste. (10 minutes) Worked example: A fission reaction. (10 minutes) Discussion and demonstrations: Controlled chain reactions. (15 minutes) Discussion: The possibility of fission. (10 minutes) Student questions: Fission calculations. (20 minutes)
Discussion: Transmutation of elements
Start by rehearsing some assumed knowledge. What is the nucleus made of? (Protons and neutrons, collectively know as nucleons.) What two natural processes change one element into another? (α and β decay). This is transmutation. Using a Periodic Table, explain that α decay moves two places down the periodic table. What about β decay? (Moves one place up the periodic table.) Introduce the idea of β+ decay. (Moves one place down the periodic table.)
β+ decay
A, Z1
β− decay
A, Z
A, Z+1
Nucleon number
β+
β
α
A4, Z2 α decay
286
Proton number
INDEX
Write general equations for these processes. There is another way in which an element may be transmuted; for example, the production of radioactive 14C used in radiocarbon dating in the atmosphere by the neutrons in cosmic rays.
14 1 14 1 7 N + 0 n→ 6 C +1H
The first artificial transmutation was achieved by Rutherford by bombarding nitrogen with α particles. (This experiment was also important in demonstrating that protons are found inside nuclei.) Ask your students to complete the following nuclear equation that summarizes Rutherford’s transmutation of nitrogen into oxygen:
1 He+14N → O +1H 7 4 1 They should get 2 He+14N →17O +1H 7 8
Cockroft and Walton were the first to ‘split’ the atom, by bombarding lithium with protons from their accelerator.
1 7 8 1 H + 3 Li → 4 Be 4 →2 2 He
Student questions: Balancing equations
Students can practise balancing equations. TAP 5271: Isotope production
Discussion: Induced fission
In the examples above, small parts are ‘chipped off’ nuclei. The behaviour of the heaviest natural element, uranium, is different. It breaks up into two large chunks – into two elements nearer to the middle of the periodic table – socalled induced fission. The two lighter elements are referred to as fission fragments. How do the two common isotopes of uranium than 235U .) It is the 92
235 92U
235 92U
and
238 92U
differ? ( 238U has three more neutrons 92
235 92U
not the
238 92U
that fissions. It absorbs a neutron, then splits into fission .
fragments, i.e. any two smaller nuclei that can be made from the 235 nucleons of the
TAP 5272: Nuclear fission
Demonstration: The nucleus as a liquid drop
In many ways, nuclei behave like a drop of liquid. Show a water filled balloon  a good model for a nucleus. After the absorption of the neutron, the nucleus of 238U wobbles. As soon as the electric 92 charge distribution departs from the spherical (pinch the balloon into a dumbbell like shape) the
287
INDEX
uranium nucleus
neutron
fission fragments
The nuclear chain reaction
neutrons
(resourcefulphysics.org)
mutual coulomb repulsion between the two ends drives the fission process. An alternative is to grease a plate and put a large drop of water on it. Wobble the plate about and watch the drop split.
Discussion: Fission products and radioactive waste
Most of the energy released is in the form of the kinetic energy of the fission fragments. Because they have a relatively high fraction of neutrons, they are unstable, and decay with short halflives. They form the ‘highlevel’ radioactive waste that cannot be simply disposed of; it has to be stored somewhere for a minimum of 20 half lives. By what factor will the activity fall after 20 half lives? (1/220 is about 106, or onemillionth)
137 90
Cs has a half life of 30.23 years: 20 half lives = 605 years
Sr has a half life of 28.1 years: 20 half lives = 562 years
Think about the consequences if waste disposal has to be engineered to remain intact for many centuries. (Which engineering structures have existed for the last 600 years?)
Worked example: A fission reaction
Here is the nuclear equation for a typical fission process:
1 235 236 138 95 0 n + 92 U → 92 U → 53 I + 39Y
+?
What is required to balance the equation? (3 neutrons) Why are there some neutrons left over? (Relate this to the N  Z curve. The heaviest elements have the largest neutron excess to remain stable. The two lighter fission fragments have a higher fractional neutron excess; hence some are ‘left over’.) These ‘left over’ neutrons are the vital key to unlock nuclear power using fission.
288
INDEX
Discussion + demonstrations: Controlled chain reactions
If at least one surplus neutron can induce fission in another 235U nucleus and so on, then a self sustaining release of nuclear energy is possible. For a power station a controlled chain reaction is needed. Should each fission result in more than one further fission, then the chain reaction is said to diverge. In a bomb the aim is to get the chain reaction to diverge as fast as possible. Blow up two balloons; let one fly off; release the other slowly, to illustrate the difference between uncontrolled and controlled energy release. There are a number of analogues of chain reactions that can be demonstrated at this point, using matches or lines of dominoes. TAP 5273: Chain reactions TAP 5274: Fission analogues
Discussion: The possibility of fission
What are the chances that a neutron will strike another nucleus? First recall that atoms are mostly empty space. The nuclei of two adjacent uranium atoms are typically 10,000 nuclear diameters apart. Emphasise this by picking a pupil in the middle of the class, and estimating her/his width (0.3 m?). Where will the next ‘pupil nuclei’ be situated? (3 km away.) A fastmoving neutron will travel a long way before it strikes another nucleus. In fact, most neutrons are absorbed by 238U nuclei, which are much more common than 235U, and quite good at absorbing fast neutrons. Instead of fissioning they transmute into 239Pu which is fissile, the favourite explosive material for making nuclear bombs. Pure natural uranium is incapable of sustaining a fission reaction – less than one fission neutron succeeds in inducing a further fission. Ask your students how this problem might be overcome in order to have a controlled chain reaction. (The answer is the introduction to the next episode.)
Student questions: Fission calculations
Calculations of energy released in fission events. TAP 5275: Fission – practice questions
289
INDEX
TAP 5271: Isotope production
The production of radionuclides by nuclear transmutation is now big business. They are for use in medicine (diagnostic and therapy) and industry (imaging, tracers, process monitoring etc) and are 2 made by neutron bombardment in nuclear reactors and by proton, deuteron ( 1 H ) or α particle bombardment by accelerators. Complete these equations that represent examples of these processes.
31 15 P
32 + ?→15 P + ?+ γ
2 17 15 1H + 7N → 8O
+?
4 16 18 2 He + 8 O → 9 F
+ ?+ ?
4 121 2 He + 51Sb
1 → ?+ 0 n
Find out the halflives of the isotopes produced in these processes Find out a typical use of these products.
290
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions are to help your students write decay equations and carry out research. Half lives can be found at http://www.kayelaby.npl.co.uk/atomic_and_nuclear_physics/4_6/4_6_1.html
Answers
Isotope
32 15 P 15 8O
Half Life 14.3 days 126 seconds 112 minutes 13.2 hours
Emitted particle(s) beta positron positron gamma
Energy / Mev 1.178 1.7 0.6 0.159
18 9F 123 53 I
31 15
32 P →15 P + 01n + γ
Phosphorus32 is commonly the highest energy radionuclide encountered in a research setting, and thus requires special caution. Exposure should be avoided and handling should be limited as much as possible. http://www.unh.edu/ehs/radsafety/Fact_Sheets/P32.html A solution of phosphate, containing radioactive phosphorus32, is injected into the root system of a plant. Since phosphorus32 behaves identically to that of phosphorus31, the more common and nonradioactive form of the element, it is used by the plant in the same way. A Geiger counter is then used to detect the movement of the radioactive phosphorus32 throughout the plant. This information helps scientists understand the detailed mechanism of how plants utilized phosphorus to grow and reproduce. http://www.chem.duke.edu/~jds/cruise_chem/nuclear/agriculture.html
2 17 15 1 1 H + 7 N → 8 O+0 n
Air tagged with O15 has been applied to the study in dogs for (a) the kinetics of the transfer of oxygen from pulmonary gases to blood, (b) the rate of incorporation of oxygen into water during metabolism, c) the rate of exchange of plasma water with tissue water http://ajplegacy.physiology.org/cgi/content/abstract/201/3/582
4 2
1 He+ 16O→18 F + 1 H + 01n 8 9
F18 is for many reasons a useful radioisotope for biomedical studies. Physically, the longer halflife (112 min) allows more time for relatively complex synthetic manipulations and for biological studies. In addition, the lowest positron energy, and thus its shortest positron range, allows for the
291
INDEX
sharpest imaging with a highresolution PET. http://laxmi.nuc.ucla.edu:8248/M248_98/synprob/part4/org_chem_f.html
4 121 123 2 He + 51Sb→ 53 I
1 + 20 n
The usefulness of iodine123 wholebody scans in evaluating thyroid cancer http://tech.snmjournals.org/cgi/content/short/27/4/279 Clinical Pharmacology: Sodium Iodide is readily absorbed from the upper gastrointestinal tract. Following absorption, the iodide is distributed primarily within the extracellular fluid of the body. It is concentrated and organically bound by the thyroid and concentrated by the stomach, choroid plexus, and salivary glands. It is also promptly excreted by the kidneys. The normal range of urinary excretion in 24 hours is reported to be 3775% of the administered dose varying with thyroid and renal function. The iodideconcentrating mechanism of the thyroid, variously termed the iodide “trap” or “pump” accounts for an iodide concentration some 25 times that of the plasma level, but may increase to as much as 500 times under certain conditions. http://www.nuclearonline.org/PI/Nycomed%20I123%20Na%20I%20capsules.pdf
292
INDEX
TAP 527 2: Nuclear fission
This sequence shows how to calculate the energy changes as fission occurs.
Nuclear fission of uranium235
neutron comes towards U235 nucleus
U236 nucleus oscillates like liquid drop
U236 breaks into two pieces
electrical repulsion
neutron
neutron is captured
U235 nucleus U236 nucleus in excited state two or three neutrons set free
electrical repulsion
293
INDEX
Nuclear fission of uranium235
Fission takes nucleons down the binding energy valley 0
curve of binding energy as number of nucleons changes
U235 breaks into two unequal fragments of variable size
–7.6 about 0.9 MeV
235 133
Coulomb slope
–8.8
100
nucleon number A
Nuclear fission of uranium235
Energy from fission fissile nucleus about 0.9 MeV per nucleon fission products energy per nucleon = 202 MeV/235 nucleons = 0.86 MeV per nucleon energy per U235 fission event = 202 MeV
294
INDEX
295
INDEX
Practical advice
These diagrams are reproduced here so that you can use them for discussion with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 110O
296
INDEX
TAP 527 3: Chain reactions
Chain reaction and critical mass
Critical chain reaction escapes The chain reaction is selfsustaining at a steady rate if on average one neutron from a fission produces a further fission. absorbed escapes absorbed neutron from fission absorbed
Some neutrons escape from the surface of the reactor. Other neutrons are absorbed without causing fission. Subcritical mass Critical mass
escapes
Supercritical mass
all chains die out as neutrons are absorbed or escape
one new fission follows each fission, on average. Reaction goes at steady rate
several new fissions follow each fission: reaction grows rapidly
Rate of escape of neutrons ∝ surface area Rate of production of neutrons ∝ volume
ratio
volume increases with size surface area
297
INDEX
Practical advice
These diagrams are reproduced here so that you can use them for discussion with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 120O
298
INDEX
TAP 527 4: Fission analogues
1. Controlled energy release
Air filled balloons can be used to show the difference between the controlled release of energy and an uncontrolled explosion, to mimic the controlled chain reaction or the diverging chain reaction (used in a nuclear bomb). Inflate two balloons and tie the necks. On one stick a piece of sellotape about 5 cm long. When holding the balloon by the neck, have the sellotape facing upwards. Take a goodsized pin (a ray tracing optics pin is ideal). Burst one balloon with the pin – the uncontrolled energy release. To ham up the demo, now claim that by pushing the pin very carefully into the balloon it is possible not to burst the balloon and thus achieve a controlled energy release. Slowly push the pin into the sellotaped portion of the balloon. Stop when the pin is still sticking out of the balloon. Then remove the pin slowly. Keep checking during the rest of the lesson to monitor the slow deflation of the balloon.
2. Diverging chain reaction
Set up dominoes on edge in the form of a triangle, so that when a domino at the apex is pushed over, it hits two dominoes, they hit 3, which hit 4, and so on.
Alternatively:
Drill a piece of wood with a triangular array of small holes to hold matches, ‘live’ end upper most. Arrange the spacing so that one lighted match can ignite its neighbours in the next row. Ten rows are ample. Set the board upright, with the apex of the triangle at the bottom. Light the match at the apex, and see the diverging chain reaction.
!
Safety assessment!
Try it by yourself first to see what to expect. Have a fire extinguisher handy (it helps to hype up the demo). Beware any heat or smoke alarms that might be activated.
Extinguish by blowing out – ask if anybody in the audience has a birthday today, or close to the actual date, to volunteer. For a controlled chain reaction: use a simple line of dominoes or matches.
299
INDEX
Practical advice
These analogues are provided so you can make a choice of demonstration(s) or activities.
300
INDEX
TAP 527 5: Fission – practice questions
What these are for
These questions will give you some simple practice in handling the ideas and calculations that physicists meet in nuclear fission.
Try these
The process of fission in one type of nuclear reactor proceeds as follows: a nucleus of uranium 235 92 U captures a single neutron. The resulting nucleus is unstable and splits into two or more 90 144 fragments. These fragments could typically be a pair of nuclei, 36 Kr and 56 Ba for example. Neutrons are also ejected as a result of the fission. It is these neutrons that go on to cause subsequent fission events and maintain the chain reaction. 1. Write down two balanced equations (the first to the unstable uranium; the second to the final products) that represent this fission process.
2.
Calculate the total mass of the original uranium isotope and the neutron. The table gives the atomic masses (in atomic mass units) of the particles found in this question. (1 atomic mass unit (u) ≡ 931 MeV.)
Particle
1 0n 90 36 Kr
92 36 Kr 96 37 Rb
Mass (u) 1.008 665 89.919 528 91.926 153 95.934 284 137.911 011 137.905 241 143.922 941 235.043 923
138 55 Cs 138 56 Ba 144 56 Ba
235 92 U
301
INDEX
3.
Calculate the total mass of the four products.
4.
Calculate the change in mass. Does this represent energy gained or lost by the system?
5.
Convert the mass change into the energy released (in MeV) in the fission event.
6.
These particular barium and krypton isotopes are not the only products possible in nuclear fission. Repeat the calculation steps 1–5 with the following possible products caesium138 and rubidium96.
Hints
1. There are two equations, the first for the absorption of the neutron; the second for the splitting of the unstable nucleus formed in the absorption. Write down all the original nucleons on the lefthand side of the first equation (do not forget the original neutron). Put all the products on the righthand side. Check that all protons, neutrons and electrons balance. Energy is also an output of the reaction, call it Q. Add the atomic mass unit values for the uranium and the neutron together. Add the atomic mass unit values for the barium, krypton and two neutrons together. Use ΔE = Δmc2 to carry out this conversion. c2 = 9 x 1016 J kg–1.
2. 3. 5.
302
INDEX
Practical advice
This question set provides repetitive practice in handling nuclear mass changes and conversions between mass and energy. It is suitable for students meeting these ideas for the first time. There is an energy release / nucleon perspective here – a useful teaching point when students have completed this task
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2. 3. 4.
235 92 U
+
1 0n
=
236 92 U
=
90 36 Kr
+
144 56 Ba
1 +2 0 n + Q
m = 235.043923 u – 1.008665 u = 236.052 588 u m = 89.919528 u + 143.922941 u + 1.008665 u + 1.008665 u =235.859 799 u
Δm =236.052 588 u – 235.859799 u = 0.192 789 u; energy lost ΔE = 0.192 789 u × 931.3 MeV u–1 =179.49 MeV
m = 137.905241 u + 95.934284 u + 1.008665 u + 1.008665 u =235.856855 u
5. 6.
Δm = 236.052 588 u – 235.856855 u = 0.195733 u ΔE = 0.195733 u × 931.3 MeV u–1 = 182.2 MeV
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 250S
303
INDEX
Episode 528: Controlling fission
In this episode, you can look at the different features of the core of a nuclear reactor, and explain its operation using your students’ knowledge of nuclear physics.
Summary
Discussion: The construction of a nuclear reactor. (10 minutes) Discussion: Moderation (10 minutes) Discussion: Enrichment. (10 minutes) Discussion: Critical mass. (10 minutes) Discussion: Control rods and coolant. (10 minutes) Student questions: Power reactors. (30 minutes) Discussion: Nuclear fusion. (15 minutes) Student questions: Fusion calculations. (30 minutes)
charge face
boron control rod hot gas graphite moderator fuel element channel reactor core heat exchanger concrete steel
cold gas
(resourcefulphysics.org)
Discussion: The construction of a nuclear reactor
304
INDEX
Look at a diagram or animation of a nuclear reactor. Check what your students already know about the reactor’s construction. TAP 5281: Nuclear fission reactor
Discussion: Moderation
How can we make it more likely that a neutron will collide with a 235U nucleus? There are two ways, both used in nuclear power reactors: Slow down the fast neutrons to increase their chance of being captured by a fissile 235U nucleus. This process is called moderation. Concentrate the 235U compared to the 238U. This process is called enrichment. The speed of the fast fission neutrons is slowed down (‘moderated’) by allowing them to collide with a suitable moderator nucleus. Conservation of momentum tells us that the speed of a light neutron colliding with a massive nucleus will be little affected. We need a material with relatively light nuclei to absorb momentum and energy from the neutron. Look at the periodic table for some ideas: Hydrogen – i.e. protons. Virtually the same mass (great), but gaseous (not very dense) and explosive. Hydrogen in water maybe? Yes, pressurised water reactors use water as the moderator (as well as the coolant), but the protons are attached to the rest of the water molecule and have an effective mass of 18 times that of a free proton. Helium – inert (good) but gaseous, so not dense enough. Lithium – too rare (expensive), melting point too low anyway. Beryllium – possible but expensive. Boron absorbs neutrons. Carbon – mass equivalent to 12 protons, solid (good), flammable (bad). Used in the first generation of UK ‘Magnox’ reactors. So there are a number of possibilities, each with a balance of advantages and disadvantages.
Discussion: Enrichment
Nuclear power stations use uranium enriched to typically 2.5%  a factor of 2.5/0.7 = 3.6 times the proportion found in natural uranium. Ask your students how much 238U must be discarded to produce 1 tonne of enriched uranium, i.e. with the fraction of 235U increased from 0.7% to 2.5%. (You need 3.6 tonnes of natural uranium, so you discard 2.6 tonnes of 238U.) Bombs require 90% enrichment. Power station enrichment can be easily extended to get pure fissile 235U. Herein lies an easy route to the proliferation of nuclear weapons by countries that have nuclear power programs.
305
INDEX
Discussion: Critical mass
Extend your earlier discussion of chain reactions to introduce the idea of critical mass. At least one of the fission neutrons must induce a further fission to allow for a chain reaction. Some may simply escape from the fuel assembly; others may be absorbed by the 238U, by structural materials used in the construction, by the coolant, by the fission fragments etc. Fewer will escape if there is a smaller surface area to volume ratio. For enriched uranium, the critical mass is roughly the size of a grapefruit. Picture bringing two halfgrapefruit together to cause an explosion. Why would the critical mass be different for shapes other than a sphere? (A sphere has the lowest area to volume ratio. Other shapes with the same mass would have greater areas, so more neutrons would escape, making a chain reaction less likely.)
Discussion: Control rods and coolant
The chain reaction in a nuclear power stations must be controlled, which means that the number of neutrons must be continuously regulated to stop the chain reaction diverging or closing down. To do this control rods are moved into or out of the reactor core. They are made from a substance that absorbs neutrons (e.g. boron). A coolant carries energy away from the core. What are the desirable properties of the coolant? (It must not absorb neutrons; it must have high thermal conductivity, high specific heat capacity and high boiling point.)
Student questions
These questions compare Magnox and PWR reactors. TAP 5282: Fission in a nuclear reactor – how the mass changes
0 1
Binding energy per nucleon (MeV)
(resourcefulphysics.org)
2
Energy released by fusion
3 4 5 6 7 8
0
4
Energy released by fission
238 12 16
He C
85 56
U
O
Fe
Br
306
148
La
20
40
60
80
100 120
140 160 180
200
220 240
Mass number (A)
INDEX
Discussion: Nuclear fusion
You can now look at the process of nuclear fusion. (This will have been touched on when considering the graph of binding energy per nucleon.) Students should be able to calculate the energy changes from values of nuclide mass. Emphasise that the energy released per nucleon in fusion is larger than for fission. TAP 5283: Fusion
Student questions: Fusion calculations
Calculating the energy released in fusion reactions. TAP 5284: Fusion questions TAP 5253: Fusion in a kettle?
307
INDEX
TAP 5281: Nuclear fission reactor
A Magnox reactor
charge face
boron control rod hot gas graphite moderator reactor core heat exchanger concrete steel
fuel element channel
cold gas
308
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can use it for discussion with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Resourceful Physics
309
INDEX
TAP 5282: Fission in a nuclear reactor – how the mass changes
Some rather harder questions
These extended questions will test your ability to deal with calculations involving the physics of nuclear fission. Use the following conversions and values for some of the questions: 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J 1 atomic mass unit = 1.66 × 10–27 kg
c = 3 × 108 m s–1
• • •
Particle
235 92 U 1 1H
3 2 He 1 0n
Mass (u)
235.043 94 1.007 825 3.016 030 1.008 665
Try these
Magnox power stations produce about 20 TW h of electrical energy in the UK every year by fission of uranium. (This energy supplies roughly the electrical needs of Greater London.) 1 The overall efficiency of the process that converts the energy for heating released in the fission to the final electrical product is 40%. How much energy, in joules, is produced each second in the company’s reactors?
2
Each fission releases about 200 MeV of energy. How many atoms of 235 U need to 92 fission in each second to produce the heating energy you calculated in question 1?
3
What was the mass of these atoms before they underwent fission?
310
INDEX
4
What is the total mass change due to fission in Magnox reactors each second?
In the pressurised water reactor (PWR) the fuel rods do not contain pure 235 U . The uranium comes 92 from mined ore that contains a mixture of
238 92 U
and 235 U . The fuel delivered to the reactor contains 92
0.7% of 235 U . The fuel rod stays in the reactor for about 3 years and is then removed to allow 92 reprocessing. This time consider just one reactor with an output of 1 GW. 5 Calculate the number of uranium nuclei disintegrating every second.
6
Calculate the mass of
235 92 U
that undergoes fission every second.
7
Estimate the mass of
235 92
U required in the core for a 3 year cycle.
8
Estimate the total mass of both uranium isotopes required in the core for a 3 year cycle.
9
Is your estimate in question 8 likely to be an upper or a lower limit?
Hints
1 Remember the meaning of the term watthour. It corresponds to the amount of energy delivered at a rate of 1 joule per second for 1 hour. Do not forget to include the efficiency in your calculation. Convert to J from MeV. Use the nucleon number of the uranium and the conversion from atomic mass units to kilograms.
2 3
311
INDEX
4 7
Use ΔE = Δmc2 to calculate this. The information indicates that onethird of the fuel needs to be removed for reprocessing every year. Your answer to question 6 can be multiplied up to give the fuel usage in 1 year. This is onethird of the total. The answer to question 7 represents the fuel used, and this is 3% of all the uranium (both isotopes). Hence the total mass.
8
312
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions revise basic conversions between electron volts and joules and atomic mass units and kilograms. Students will need to be familiar with gigawatts (GW) and terawatts (TW) in powers of 10. The questions could be extended either verbally or in writing to ask students about the volume of uranium inside the core and about the equivalent volumes of coal or oil that might be required in a conventional power station. For example, 1 megatonne of coal is equivalent to 29 x 1015 J, 1 megatonne of oil is equivalent to 42 x 1015 J.
Social and human context
The questions provide an opportunity for debate about fission power generation.
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. energy = ((20 × 1012 Wh × 3600 J W h–1) / (3.16 × 107)) × (100 / 40) = 5.7 × 1019 J every second. number of atoms = (5.7 × 1019 J) / (200 × 106 eV × 1.6 × 10–19 JeV–1) = 1.8 × 1026 atoms. mass per second = 1.8 × 1026 s–1 × 235.04394 u × 1.66 × 10–27 kg u–1 = 7.0 × 10–5 kg s–1 mass change = (5.7 × 1019 J s–1)/ ((3 × 108)2 kg s–1) = about 5 g disintegrations per second = ((1 × 1019 J s–1)/ (200 × 106 MeV × 1.6 × 10–19 J eV–1)) × (100/40) = 7.8 × 1019s–1 6. 7. 8. 9. mass per second = 7.8 × 1026 s–1 × 235.04394 u × 1.66 × 10–27 kg u–1 = 3.0 × 10–5 kg s–1 mass = 3.0 × 10–5 kg s–1 × 3 years × 3.2 × 107 sy–1 = 2900 kg mass = 2800 kg × (100/0.7) = 400 000 kg Lower limit.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 270S
313
INDEX
TAP 5283: Fusion
Fusion in the Sun and on Earth
Fusion in the Sun: threestage process proton proton proton deuterium H2 helium He3 helium He3
deuterium H2
positron neutrino
helium He3 γ
helium He4
two protons
Two protons fuse, converting one to The deuterium H2 captures a neutron, to form deuterium H2. another proton, to form He3. Fusion on Earth: twostage process deuterium H2 tritium H3 neutron
Two He3 nuclei fuse, giving He4 and freeing two protons.
lithium Li6
helium He4
neutron
helium He4
tritium H3
Deuterium and tritium are heated to very high temperature. Neutrons from their fusion then fuse with lithium in a ‘blanket’ around the hot gases. Tritium is renewed.
Here you can compare what happens in the Sun with reactions on Earth.
314
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can use it for discussion with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 140O
315
INDEX
TAP 528 4: Fusion questions
Nuclear fusion is the process in which nuclei combine to give heavier elements. In one fusion reaction, two atoms of deuterium (hydrogen2) fuse together to give one atom of a helium isotope (helium3) together with one other particle. 1. Write out a balanced equation for this fusion process and say what the fourth particle is?
2.
Calculate the energy release in this equation. Values you need are in the table.
Particle
1 0n 2 1H
Mass (u)
1.008 665 2.014 102 3.016 050 3.016 030
3 1H
3 2 He
Another possible fusion process is represented by:
2 1H
+
1 0n
=
3 1H
(the formation of hydrogen3, tritium, by a nucleus of deuterium absorbing a neutron). This equation is certainly balanced. But can it occur in practice? 3. Calculate the change in mass in this reaction.
4.
Is the reaction possible or not?
316
INDEX
Practical advice
These questions revise basic conversions between electron volts and joules and atomic mass units and kilograms. Students will need to be familiar with gigawatts (GW) and terawatts (TW) in powers of 10. The questions could be extended either verbally or in writing to ask students about the volume of deuterium inside the core and about the equivalent volumes of coal or oil that might be required in a conventional power station. For example, 1 megatonne of coal is equivalent to 29 x 1015 J, 1 megatonne of oil is equivalent to 42 x 1015 J.
Social and human context
The questions provide an opportunity for debate about fusion power generation.
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2.
2 1H
+
2 1H
=
3 2 He
+
1 0n
mass of two hydrogen2 = 2 × 2.014102 u = 4.028204 u mass of helium3 plus neutron = 3.016030 u + 1.008665 u = 4.024695 u
Δm = 4.028204 u – 4.024695 u = 0.003509 u ΔE = 0.003509 u × 931.3 MeV u–1 = 3.27 MeV
3. mass of hydrogen2 plus neutron = 2.014102 u + 1.008665 u = 3.022767
Δm =3.022767 – 3.016050 u = 0.006 717 u.
The reaction can occur with a release ΔE = 0.006 717 u × 931.3 MeV u–1 = 6.26 MeV
4.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 18, 250S
317
INDEX
Episode 529: Preparation for X ray and neutron diffraction topic
Students can apply their understanding of diffraction to Xray and neutron diffraction studies of the structure of matter. This topic could extend a study of diffraction of waves, or be part of a study of material structures, or of atomic physics.
Episode 530: Xray diffraction Episode 531: Neutron diffraction
Main aims
Students will: 1. Relate diffraction effects to the spacing of gratings etc. and to the wavelength of the radiation involved. 2. State some uses of Xray and neutron diffraction. 3. Apply Bragg’s law.
Prior knowledge
Students should be familiar with diffraction due to a standard (transmission) grating (d sin θ = nλ), de Broglie’s formula λ = h/p. It will also help if they are aware that, at (absolute) temperature T, typical energy ~ kT.
Where this leads
This topic could lead into a study of the structures and properties of solid materials.
318
INDEX
Episode 530: X ray diffraction
Most schools will not have an Xray set, but there are plenty of effective analogue demonstrations using other types of waves (laser light, microwaves, and water waves). Note that students who are also studying chemistry may already have come across Bragg’s law.
Summary
Discussion + student questions: Students’ knowledge of Xrays. (30 minutes) Discussion: Diffraction and the limits of resolution. (20 minutes) Demonstrations: Diffraction of laser light; crystal models. (20 minutes) Discussion – optional: Deriving Bragg’s law. (20 minutes) Demonstration: Crystal spacing by Xrays. (30 minutes) Demonstrations: Various analogues of Xray diffraction. (30 minutes) Student activity: Chemical composition by Xray analysis. (20 minutes)
Discussion + student questions: Students’ knowledge of Xrays
Rehearse students’ assumed knowledge of Xrays. If a typical wavelength is λ = 1 nm, what is the frequency of such an Xray? (f = c/λ = 3×108 / 109 = 3×1017 Hz) Students can learn about how Xrays were discovered, and how they are used. TAP 5301: What are Xrays?
Discussion: Diffraction and the limits of resolution
The shortest wavelength of visible light ~ 450 nm (1 nm = 109 m) sets a limit for the smallest thing that can be ‘seen’ using visible light. This limit comes about because of diffraction effects, when the wavelength is comparable to physical dimensions. To investigate matter on a smaller scale requires that we ‘look at it’ using shorter wavelengths. Xray wavelengths are < 1 nm. The wavelengths of Xrays are comparable to the atomic spacing in solid matter. Hence Xrays will be diffracted by planes of atoms in crystalline solids. Show some Xray diffraction patterns. Emphasise the idea that, the narrower the spacing, the greater the diffraction. This means that diffraction patterns can be used to determine the arrangement of atoms within a solid, and their separations. You could also point out that a single crystal gives a pattern of discrete dots; a polycrystalline material or powder gives rings (because all orientations are present), and an amorphous material gives blurred rings or dots.
319
INDEX
Demonstrations: Diffraction of laser light; crystal models
Shine a laser beam at normal incidence onto a grating and note the separation of the diffracted beams. Now rotate the grating about a vertical axis. Observe that the separations of the diffracted beams increase as the effective slit width decreases. (Alternatively, use gratings with different spacing.)
Safety
Provided the laser is class 2 (less than 1 mW of visible light), the warning ‘Do not stare down the beam' is sufficient. Avoid specular reflections.
If you have crystal models handy (ask your chemistry department), look through in different directions. Many ‘planes’ of atoms reveal themselves, each with its own separation d.
Discussion – optional: Deriving Bragg’s law
You may have to derive Bragg’s law. Beware of potential confusion: students will have met the formula for diffraction by a (transmission) grating. In diffraction from crystals the angle is defined differently, and the crystal is acting as a reflection grating. Furthermore, the theory uses reflection rather than diffraction!
X ray beam
θ
θ
A
B
C
}
TAP 5302: Bragg reflection
d
Crystal atoms
320
INDEX
Demonstration: Crystal spacing by Xrays
There are problems with using Xrays in school. However, some schools do have Xray sets. A good alternative is to arrange a visit to a university department (Physics, Chemistry or Materials Science) to see one in use, and to learn about contemporary applications. You could arrange to show a determination of the crystal plane spacing in alkali halides.
Demonstrations: Various analogues of Xray diffraction
Here are some further analogues, for you to choose from (perhaps dependent on the equipment available). Using laser light and diffraction gratings: Two ‘crossed’ diffraction gratings represent the atomic planes, and give an array of diffracted spots. The fact that many solids are polycrystalline and are made up of many small crystallites orientated randomly can be simulated by slowly rotating the crossed gratings. The array of diffracted spots rotates too. What would the diffraction pattern look like if the crossed gratings were rotated quite quickly to simulate all the possible orientations? (A series of rings.) Rig up two crossed gratings with an electric motor to spin them round while diffracting the laser beam. This always makes a visual impact. LINKS TAP 5303: Simulating Xray diffraction Finding the structure of DNA is perhaps the bestknown use of Xray diffraction. The iconic ‘X’ shaped diffraction pattern from the helix can be simulated by diffracting a laser beam off a fine bolt thread. Using bolts of different pitches alters the angle of the ‘X’. (See School Science Review vol 85 (312) pp 1819.) Use a ripple tank TAP 5304: Diffraction with water waves Try using microwaves and /or a ripple tank with an array of pins LINKS TAP 5305: Diffraction by crystals
Student activity: Chemical composition by Xray analysis
An interesting use of the Bragg equation is to find the wavelength of Xrays emitted by a substance or object, so that information about its chemical composition can be found.
321
INDEX
TAP 3506: Where has it been?
322
INDEX
TAP 530 1: What are Xrays?
When Wilhelm Rőntgen first discovered Xrays in 1895, no one had any idea what this strange phenomenon was  hence the name Xrays (although they were referred to as Rőntgen rays for a while). Visits to Egypt to see the pyramids was very much in vogue for cultured people at this time, so it is perhaps not surprising that Xrays were soon used to `see inside' Egyptian mummies. Since then we have found out a great deal more about what Xrays are, how they are generated, their uses and their dangers. Try this short quiz to see just how much you know about Xrays.
Questions
1. Xrays are part of the electromagnetic spectrum, but where are they positioned when the spectrum is listed in increasing wavelengths?
2.
Xrays are frequently used to diagnose broken or cracked bones. How is this possible?
3.
There are a recommended maximum number of Xray examinations that a person should not exceed in a year. Why is it necessary to limit the number?
4.
At the dentist, a lead apron is often put onto the patient having a dental Xray. Why is this apron made of lead?
5.
Women having an Xray are always asked if they might be pregnant. Why should the radiographer be interested in this?
323
INDEX
Practical advice
`What are Xrays?' is mainly a recap of work done at pre16 level to remind students of the nature of Xrays, their uses and dangers.
Answers
1. Xrays are listed after gamma rays and before ultraviolet in the electromagnetic spectrum (in increasing wavelength). (Their wavelengths are typically 1010 m, compared with a bit less than 106 m for visible light.)
2.
Bones show up on an Xray photograph because the Xradiation passes through soft tissue but is stopped (absorbed) by the bones (bones are much denser). The photographic film is blackened by the Xrays going through the soft tissue and through the crack in the bone, while the bones show up as white where little Xradiation has gone through. So a better name for the ‘photograph’ is a shadowgraph When the Xrays pass through the body they affect the body tissues. In fact the Xrays have so much energy that they can kill cells on the way through or at least damage them. The more Xrays you have over a short period of time, the more damage is done to your body tissue from which it does not have enough time to recover.
3.
4.
The lead apron is to prevent Xrays entering the patient's body. The high density of lead and its high Z number prevents Xrays passing through it. (There are more dense metals  for example gold, but that would be a little expensive in an apron!) The danger of administering an Xray to a pregnant woman is that the growing embryo or foetus may be damaged by the Xrays passing through it. This is particularly important because the rate of cell division in a developing baby is extremely high, and if cells are damaged or mutated by Xrays then this might cause the baby to be deformed.
5.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DUTP, additional activity 3
324
INDEX
TAP 530 2: Bragg reflection
The diagram below shows Xrays being reflected from a crystal. Each layer of atoms acts like a mirror and reflects Xrays strongly at an angle of reflection that equals the angle of incidence. The diagram shows reflection from successive layers
If the path difference between the beams from successive layers of atoms is a whole number of wavelengths, then there is constructive interference. The path difference is the distance AB + BC as above: (AB + BC) = 2dsinθ The reflected beam has maximum intensity when 2dsinθ = nλ
325
INDEX
Practical advice
Some background information: von Laue's experiment In 1912, Max von Laue realised that Xrays were not charged particles as they were not deflected by electric or magnetic fields, but noone had succeeded in demonstrating that Xrays were waves by creating interference until von Laue realised that it was the extremely small wavelength which was causing the problem. He used the spaces between atoms in a crystal to diffract the Xrays and thus produced interference. In the same year, following von Laue's discovery, William and Lawrence Bragg (father and son) varied the experiment and used a crystal to reflect Xrays and also obtained diffraction patterns. It may be useful to remind pupils of: TAP 3225: Using a CD as a reflection grating
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DUTP, additional activity 8
326
INDEX
TAP 530 3: Simulating Xray diffraction
Introduction:
Basic Xray diffraction involves the transmission of Xrays through a thin sample. This can be simulated using a laser through Lycopodium powder/talcum powder or tree pollen sandwiched between two microscope slides
You will need:
lowpower laser screen pair of microscope slides (2) stand to support slides, e.g. retort stand powder (talc, Lycopodium) or tree pollen
Safety
Provided the laser is class 2 (less than 1 mW for visible light), the warning ‘Do not stare down the beam' is sufficient. Avoid specular reflections.
Allergic reaction
Class members may be allergic to pollen (e.g. Lycopodium), check before use.
What to do:
Make a film of powder sandwiched between microscope slides. For best results the film should be very thin. Blowing away the excess usually achieves this.
You have seen:
•
The pattern produced by Lycopodium powder will be a ring pattern due to the random orientation of the scattering centres which causes the maxima to occur as a cone of a particular angle. Talcum powder consists of larger particles so, although the pattern is due to diffraction, the pattern does not show the ring shape but simply a random arrangement of spots.
•
327
INDEX
Practical advice
Do not breath in the dust particularly Lycopodium powder.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DUTP, activity 15
328
INDEX
TAP 530 4: Diffraction with water waves
Crystal diffraction can be simulated using water waves.
You will need:
ripple tank (levelled) plane wave generator power pack 6 V rheostat to control speed of motor desk lamp for illumination barriers to provide at least 3 ‘holes’ hand held stroboscopes
What to do:
1. 2. 3. First set up the ripple tank with about 1 cm depth of water. Set up a line of small barriers 5 cm from the vibrator, as shown. There should be a gap of 2 to 3 cm between each. Start the motor at a low speed (4 rev/second).
Ask: ‘Can you see semicircular ripples emerging from the gaps? Further out, can you see waves moving out in slanting directions, as well as a wave moving straight ahead?’
Students should observe the diffraction pattern carefully, with and without stroboscopes. Keeping the barriers arrangement the same, gradually increase the motor speed.
Ask, ‘How does the diffraction pattern change?
!
Safety
Beware water on the laboratory floor. Make sure you have a sponge and bucket handy to mop up spills immediately. Place the power supply for the lamp on a bench, not on the floor by the tank
329
INDEX
Practical advice:
You should refer back to the work in Episode 322: Diffraction gratings and Episode 323: Diffraction and particularly: TAP 3231: Ripple tank diffraction The pattern produced with multiple gaps is less clear than the double gaps experiment but, with care in aligning the gaps, it is visible. It will help if students have first seen diagrams of sets of semicircles to represent a snapshot of waves proceeding from several gaps. Avoid very high motor speeds, which cause unwanted vibration of the barriers. The spacing of nodal lines will decrease as the wave frequency increases The following Applet can be set for a triple slit, (on the set up menu pick triple slit): http://www.falstad.com/ripple/index.html this may be simpler and easier to see than on the ripple tank
!
Safety
Beware water on the laboratory floor. Make sure you have a sponge and bucket handy to mop up spills immediately. Place the power supply for the lamp on a bench, not on the floor by the tank
Technical notes
You need 2 large barriers and 6 small barriers The hand stroboscope is a disc of hardboard or card with a simple pivot at its centre, so that the disc can be kept spinning by hand. The disc has a finger hole, offcentre, to enable the user to keep it spinning. It has narrow slits on its face, near the rim. The slits are evenly spaced and 12 slits are best This simple stroboscope enables students to 'freeze' repetitive motions – or to slow them down for closer study. For example, continuous ripples are easier to see by using a stroboscope, especially those ripples with higher frequencies. By viewing a vibrating object through the slits, students can calculate the frequency of a vibration. The stroboscopes are less likely to judder while rotating if the bearing is not too tight and the handle is held loosely.
330
INDEX
External references
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DUTP, activity 17 and http://www.practicalphysics.org/
331
INDEX
TAP 530 5: Diffraction by crystals
Introduction:
This effect of scattering from successive layers can be shown with the ripple tank and a `bed of nails'  optical pins in a 1 cm array glued into a matrix board and placed in a ripple tank. Microwaves can also be used to show the effect of adding layers
You will need:
ripple tank (levelled) plane wave generator power pack 6 V rheostat to control speed of motor desk lamp for illumination, a special ripple tank lamp is better: the filament can be set parallel to the ripples. bed of nails microwave transmitter and receiver wax lenses to concentrate beams polystyrene ceiling tiles
What to do:
This effect of scattering from successive layers can be shown with the ripple tank and a `bed of nails' i.e. optical pins in a 1 cm array glued into a matrix board and placed in a ripple tank. Plane waves should be incident on the nails at an angle, with the diffraction pattern appearing at the same angle on the opposite side of the bed of nails. The precise depth of water at which this works best depends on the thickness of the perspex and the nail length used. You will need to experiment. With microwaves, first show that a single polystyrene tile used as a mirror produces a moderate reflected signal irrespective of the angle of incidence. If a second tile is mounted parallel to the first and separated from it by a few cm, then there is a reasonable reflected signal at an angle that satisfies the Bragg equation, e.g. if d = 5 cm then n = 1, λ = 3 cm leads to sinθ = 0:3, y = 17:58O. The signal is noticeably weaker at other angles. Add further regularlyspaced tiles.
You have seen:
• • •
A regular array produces a diffraction pattern. Reflection from surfaces in parallel satisfies the Bragg equation. Adding further regularlyspaced tiles makes the reflected signal sharper.
332
INDEX
Practical advice:
The microwave equipment can be set up without the wax lenses, however, they will improve results if set up correctly.
Technician’s note:
To make the bed of nails, use a piece of plain matrix board about 10 cm to 15 cm with optical pins glued in at approx. 1 cm intervals to create a square matrix.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DUTP, activity 17
333
INDEX
TAP 350 6: Where has it been?
The Coppergate Helmet was subjected to Xray diffraction analysis (XRD) in order to determine what it was made from and the likely conditions in which it was buried. Study the relevant Xray diffraction spectra and write a short report on the deductions that can be made.
Xray diffraction spectra
Nowadays most Xray diffraction analysis is done with a goniometer, a device in which the variation of intensity of the diffracted Xradiation is measured by scanning an ionisation detector through a range of angles  usually 0O (straight through) to 100O  but photographic detection is still also used. The goniometer spectrum for iron (II) carbonate is shown in Figure (a) together with the photographic film equivalent in Figure (b). (The XRD spectra in this activity were kindly made available by English Heritage.)
Note that in Figure (b) the dark lines indicate a high intensity of diffracted Xradiation. Sometimes you will find white lines on a black background  it depends on whether the negative or the positive print is used. Be aware that diffraction information can be displayed in different ways. The records shown here involved scanning from just over 90O to 0O, but you may come across others which show spectra fro + 90O to 0O to 90O or more, symmetrical about 0O.
The Coppergate Helmet
As you might expect, all the metals on the helmet corroded to some extent while it was buried. The corrosion products revealed during XRD analysis provided evidence about the original materials
334
INDEX
and the conditions where the helmet had been buried. The diagram below shows the XRD spectra of some common corrosion products.
Bornite (Cu5FeS4)
This is a corrosion product of iron and copper alloy artefacts when buried on waterlogged sites.
Chalcopyrite (CuFeS2)
This is also a corrosion product of iron and copper alloy artefacts when buried on waterlogged sites.
Siderite (FeCO3)
This is a corrosion product of iron. It is found where there is, or has been at some time, a high concentration of carbonates in the water. Typical sources of these are plaster and mortar from earlier Roman buildings that have long since been demolished.
Vivianite (Fe3 (PO4)2 8H2O)
This is a corrosion product of iron which is found where the artefact has been buried alongside phosphates from bone and excreted waste. The XRD spectra in below are from two different parts of the Coppergate Helmet.
Use the XRD spectra for corrosion products and the two spectra A and B above to report
• •
on what those parts of the helmet were made of, together with the conditions in which it had been buried.
335
INDEX
Practical advice
Archaeologists examining the Coppergate Helmet used Xray diffraction (XRD) to investigate the conditions in which it had been buried. They used XRD to examine the corrosion products in small samples of the helmet, and compared their spectra with those of corrosion products produced in known conditions. Students are provided with Xray spectra from two samples of the helmet, and the spectra of four corrosion products together with information about the conditions that give rise to such products. Their task is to identify the corrosion products found in the helmet and hence to deduce the nature of the original materials and the conditions in which they had been buried.
Answers
Xray diffraction spectrum A on the Activity Sheet shows that the corrosion sample is made up of siderite and vivianite. This indicates that the material that had corroded was made of iron. It also shows that, at some time, it was buried alongside organic phosphates probably produced from bone or excreted waste. In addition, the ground water around it had, at some time, a high concentration of carbonates, possibly as a result of demolition of earlier Roman buildings that had been built with plaster and mortar. XRD spectrum B shows that the corrosion sample is made up of bornite and chalcopyrite. This indicates that the material that had corroded was an iron and copper alloy, and had been buried in a waterlogged area.
External reference
This activity is taken from Salters Horners Advanced Physics, section DUTP, activity 18
336
INDEX
Episode 531: Neutron diffraction
This episode takes a very brief look at the topic of neutron diffraction.
Summary
Discussion + worked example: de Broglie wavelength of a neutron. (15 minutes) Discussion: Sources and uses of neutrons. (15 minutes)
Discussion + worked example: de Broglie wavelength of a neutron
Neutrons are very penetrating, typically 10 cm in lead. Why might this be? (Neutrons have no electric charge, so they do not interact with the atomic electrons.) However, neutrons do have a magnetic moment that allows them to interact with magnetic nuclei. Neutron diffraction was proposed in 1934, to exploit de Broglie’s hypothesis about the wave nature of matter. Use de Broglie’s equation λ = h/p to calculate the momentum and KE of a neutron whose wavelength is comparable to atomic spacing, say 1.8 × 1010 m. p = h/λ = 6.6 × 1034 / 1.8 × 1010 = 3.7 × 1024 kg m s1 Ek = p2/2m = [3.7 × 1024]2 / (2 × 1.67 × 1027) = 4.0 × 1021 J = 1/40 eV If we equate this energy to kT, we get:
T = 4.0 × 1021 / 1.38 x 1023 = 290 K
which is roughly ‘ambient temperature’. (It is useful to be able to recall that 1/40 eV is the typical energy of a particle at room temperature.) The neutrons released in nuclear fission are ‘fast’ neutrons, i.e. much more energetic than this. Will graphite moderator
thermal neutron
fast neutrons their wavelengths be greater or less than atomic dimensions? (Less) So we need to slow down the fast neutrons to ‘thermalise’ them. How is this achieved in a nuclear power reactor? (By including a moderator.)
337
INDEX
Discussion: Sources and uses of neutrons
Neutrons – where do we get them from? (Nuclear reactors; spallation sources, which use accelerators to crash ions into heavy nuclei.)
What can they tell us?
For elastic interactions where the neutron energy is not changed, the Bragg equation allows the determination of the separation of atomic planes. In an inelastic process, the neutron gives energy to, or receives energy from, the vibrating ions that make up the crystal lattice. This leads to information about the forces between atoms in the crystal lattice. The interaction of magnetic moments gives information about magnetic properties of materials – e.g. the position of the domain boundaries, their size and orientation, the magnetic moments of the atoms etc.
338
INDEX
Episode 532: Preparation for the particle physics topic
It is important to avoid turning this entire topic into ‘stamp collecting’. The underlying themes to develop here are that discoveries in nuclear physics, accelerating during the middle of the twentieth century, resulted in a need to classify the particles discovered. The key to this classification was the application of conservation laws, some of quantities already well established (charge, baryon number), some modified from earlier versions (mass/energy) and some new (lepton number) or even bizarre (strangeness is the one met here, but there are also parity, isospin and hypercharge). The other aspects developed are: antiparticles, the explanation of particle interactions in terms of exchange particles (vector bosons), and the development of the standard model of three generations of quarks and leptons to explain and simplify the ‘particle zoo.’
Episode 533: The particle zoo Episode 534: Antiparticles and the lepton family Episode 535: Particle reactions Episode 536: Vector bosons and Feynman diagrams
Advance warning
The first topic makes use of activities based on card sorting and arranging. The baryon, meson and lepton cards suggested here have been constructed for this project, but other excellent examples have been published, and it is well worth your considering the following: A resource for particle physics teaching in schools, Ken Zetie, Physics Education, March 2003, 38, p 107 with sets of online resources Playing with Particles – a teaching approach for Alevel (post16) particle physics, David Brown, School Science Review, December 2002, 84 (307), pp 118123 For more wideranging resources on the teaching of particle physics at this level, see the TRUMP Particle Physics project from York University (www.york.ac.uk/org/seg/trump/parthome.htm).
Main aims
Students will: Use the terms baryon, meson, hadron and lepton. Know that, for each particle, there exists an antiparticle. Apply conservation rules to particle interactions, including particle annihilation and creation. Know that interactions between fundamental particles (quarks and leptons) are due to the exchange of other particles (vector bosons), and that these are (virtual) photons for the electromagnetic interaction and W+, W and Z0 particles for the weak interaction. Construct and interpret Feynman diagrams showing interactions.
339
INDEX
Prior knowledge
Students should know about the constituent particles of the atom (protons, neutrons, electrons). They should be familiar with the ideas of conservation of mass, energy and electric charge.
Where this leads
The first topic deals with the fundamental particles that students have already met, and how their number proliferated in the second half of the twentieth century. Classification of the different sorts of fundamental particles then leads to use of conserved quantities (some rather bizarre) to establish rules for particle reactions. Students will learn that particles can be classified as hadrons – baryons and mesons – and leptons, each with its antiparticle, and they should know that interactions between these particles can be described in terms of transfer of other particles known as vector bosons. Once the ground rules for particle interactions have been established, students can go on to learn that there is a finer level of structure to mesons and baryons.
340
INDEX
Episode 533: The particle zoo
Protons, neutrons and electrons are familiar particles of matter. However, students are likely to have heard of other particles, and this episode introduces some of these.
Summary
Discussion: Establishing prior knowledge. (15 minutes) Discussion: Conservation of charge and mass. (20 minutes) Discussion: Units of mass. (10 minutes) Student activity: Classification of hadrons. (30 minutes) Student activity: Research task. (30 minutes)
Discussion: Establishing prior knowledge
Brainstorm to review prior knowledge. What’s in an atom, and how do we know? Establish with the students that the atom contains: 
•
electrons (discovered by J J Thomson in 1897, Cavendish Lab, Cambridge, though he called them negative corpuscles, the name electron was ‘coined’ by G. Johnstone Stoney in 1891 ) nuclei (Rutherford, Geiger and Marsden, 1911) it was soon realised that nuclei contained multiples of the nuclei of hydrogen atoms (i.e. protons; Rutherford suggested the name proton in 1920) that the simple picture was completed with Chadwick’s discovery of the neutron (predicted by Rutherford) in 1932.
• • •
At this point, you may find it useful to ask how students think how a neutral particle such as a neutron may be detected. You can tell them that sub atomic particle detection in 1932 relied on ionisation (as in a GM tube, or in a photographic film), and that this only detects charged particles. They should realise that the neutron must do something to some other matter that then produces some ionising radiation. (For Chadwick, the ionising radiation consisted of protons emitted from paraffin wax when neutrons hit the nuclei of hydrogen atoms. The neutrons came from beryllium that had been bombarded with alpha particles. [J Chadwick, The Existence of a Neuron, Proceedings Royal Society of London, 1932]
Discussion: Conservation of charge and mass
Use alpha and beta decay to show conservation of charge and baryon number (see below). Use the equations for one example of each, e.g.:
341
INDEX
220 216 4 86 Rn→ 84 Po + 2 He
14 14 0 6 C → 7 N + −1 e
to show conservation rules in action: the fact that the bottom numbers add to give the same total each side shows conservation of charge, while the fact that the top numbers do likewise shows that the number of nucleons (neutrons and protons) is also conserved. Introduce the term baryon (heavy particle) for these two particles, so that these processes also conserve baryon number. It is worthwhile giving each student an example to do, as this is confidence building, and it is a simple skill that is often examined.
Discussion: Units of mass
It may help your students, before embarking on a discussion of the various families of particles, if they have an idea of the different units used for mass. All those powers of 10 are very inconvenient; hence, it is easier to work in energy units, particularly the MeV (mega electron volt). Although it is useful to have met E=mc2, this is not essential. All that is needed here is that students appreciate that mass and energy can be interconverted in nuclear reactions (such as fission and fusion, which students should be familiar with), and that the energy that would be released if the entire mass of a particle were transferred into energy is used as a measure of its mass in particle physics. Rather than define an electronvolt in terms of charge and pd, you may prefer to state that it is a convenient ‘atomic size’ energy unit where 1 MeV = 1.6 × 1013 J equivalent to 1.783 × 1030 kg. It is useful to have a poster in your lab/ teaching room with different mass units on it. TAP 5331: Mass units for particle physics
Student activity: Classification of hadrons
Hadrons, is a collective term for both mesons and baryons; mesons are less massive than baryons.
This activity is a cardsorting exercise. Helpfully, this slows down the pace compared with teacher exposition or question and answer. Introduce the activity by explaining that, following the discovery of the neutron, many other particles were discovered, including some strange ones: these seemed to be created in pairs, encouraging the physicist Murray GellMann to allocate ‘strangeness numbers’ to some of these particles. In these reactions, strangeness was conserved. This is a kinaesthetic exercise using cards for a collection of hadrons. It is best to print up several sets of the two hadron card sheets, on card rather than paper. There is a similar sheet of lepton cards – they can be added to or simplified as you wish. It is best to use a different colour for the lepton cards. You may consider laminating them.
N
N P
P
ν
342
e
e e
ν
INDEX
For the first exercise, use the first sheet of hadron cards (omitting some mesons and all antibaryons), cut into individual cards. Ask your students to sort particles by mass and to note the charge and baryon number. Mesons are those hadrons, mostly of lower mass, which have baryon number of 0. Later, the cards can be used, together with genuine particle reactions, to check on conserved quantities. TAP 5332: Hadron cards TAP 5333: Lepton Cards
Student activity: Research task
Conclude this episode with some questions for students to research, leading to the next episode:
• • • • • • • • •
What is a positron? Who suggested it must exist? Who discovered it? What is a muon? When was it discovered? Who said, ‘Who ordered that?’ What is a neutrino? Who suggested it must exist? Who discovered it?
TAP 5334: Positron, muon, neutrino
343
INDEX
TAP 533 1: Mass units for particle physics
Atomic mass unit: MeV/c2 Some rest masses mass (kg)
electron proton neutron 9.109 × 1031 1.673 × 1027 1.675 × 10
27
u = 1.661 × 1027 kg 1 MeV/c2 = 1.783 × 1030 kg
mass (u)
5.486 × 104 1.009 1.007
mass (MeV/c2)
0.5110 938.3 939.6
344
INDEX
TAP 533 2: Hadron cards
neutron proton
n
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 939.6 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number +1 pi minus Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 938.3 Charge (e) +1
p
Baryon number +1 K zero Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0
π
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 140 Charge (e) 1

K0
Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 498 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0 sigma minus Lepton number 0 Strange ness +1
Baryon number 0 K plus
K
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 494 Charge (e) +1
+
Σ
Baryon number 0 lambda
Lepton number 0
Strange ness +1
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1198
Charge (e) 1
Baryon number +1 sigma zero
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 1
Λ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1116 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number +1 pi plus Lepton number 0 Strange ness 1 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1192 Charge (e) 0
Σ0
Baryon number +1 K minus Lepton number 0 Strange ness 1
π
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 140 Charge (e) +1
+
K
Baryon number 0 sigma plus
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 494
Charge (e) 1
Baryon number 0 delta zero
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 1
Σ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1189 Charge (e) +1
+
Δ0
Lepton number 0 Strange ness 1 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1232 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number +1 delta plus Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0
Baryon number +1 omega minus
Ω
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1673 Charge (e) 1

Δ+
Baryon number +1 xi minus
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 3
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1232
Charge (e) +1
Baryon number +1 pi zero
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 0
Ξ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1321 Charge (e) 1

π0
Lepton number 0 Strange ness 2 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 106 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0 xi zero Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0
Baryon number +1 delta minus
Δ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1232 Charge (e) 1

Ξ0
Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1315 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number +1 Lepton number 0 Strange ness 2
Baryon number +1
345
INDEX
eta zero
phi zero
η
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 549 Charge (e) 0
0
φ0
Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1020 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0 antilambda Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0
Baryon number 0
antisigma minus
Σ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1198 Charge (e) +1

Λ
Lepton number 0 Strange ness +1 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1116 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 1 Lepton number 0 Strange ness +1
Baryon number 1 J/psi
antidelta minus
0
J/ψ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 3097 Charge (e) 0
Δ
Baryon number 0 antineutron
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1232
Charge (e) +1
Baryon number 1 antiproton
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 0
n
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 939.6 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 1 antiK zero Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 938.3 Charge (e) 1
p
Baryon number 1 Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0
antisigma zero
K0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 498 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0 rho minus Lepton number 0 Strange ness 1 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1192 Charge (e) 0
Σ0
Baryon number 1 antixi zero Lepton number 0 Strange ness +1
ρ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 770 Charge (e) 1

Ξ0
Lepton number 0 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1315 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 1 antixi minus Lepton number 0 Strange ness +2
Baryon number 0
antiomega minus
Ω
Ξ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1673
Charge (e) +1
Baryon number 1 antidelta zero
Lepton number 0
Strange ness +3
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1321
Charge (e) +1
Baryon number 1
Lepton number 0
Strange ness +2
antisigma plus
Δ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1232 Charge (e) 0
0
Σ+
Baryon number 1 antidelta plus
Lepton number 0
Strange ness o
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1189
Charge (e) 1
Baryon number 1 rho plus
Lepton number 0
Strange ness +1
Δ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 1232 Charge (e) 1
+
ρ+
Baryon number 1
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 770
Charge (e) +1
Baryon number 0
Lepton number 0
Strange ness 0
346
INDEX
TAP 5333: Lepton Cards
electron
e
electron neutrino
νe
Lepton number +1 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 0 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0 Lepton number +1 Strange ness 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 0.511
Charge (e) 1
Baryon number 0 positron
e+
electron antineutrino
νe
Lepton number 1 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 0 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0 muon Lepton number 1 Strange ness 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 0.511
Charge (e) 1
Baryon number 0 antimuon
μ
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 106 Charge (e) +1
+
μ
Baryon number 0 muon neutrino
Lepton number 1
Strange ness 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 106
Charge (e) 1
Baryon number 0
Lepton number +1
Strange ness 0
muon antineutrino Lepton number +1 Strange ness 0 Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 0 Charge (e) 0 Baryon number 0
Mass 2 (MeV/c ) 0
Charge (e) 0
Baryon number 0
νμ
νμ
Lepton number 1
Strange ness 0
347
INDEX
TAP 533 4: Positron, muon, neutrino
Practical advice:
This is just an outline. Your students will probably be much more forthcoming. They should be encouraged to put ideas into their own words rather than copy chunks from websites. (Some chunks are below.) It is good practice for them to fully reference their sources. It is possible that there is some conflict with different web sources; an example is given with the muon answers. Episode 534 gives the basic outline that all students should have.
Outline answers What is a positron?
Anderson saw an example of antielectrons, “positrons” in photographs of cosmic rays passing through a cloud chamber. (Pictures are provided at the site below) The discovery of the positron http://www.physics.ubc.ca/~waltham/p400/presentation/asgeirsson.pdf [Accessed 14 October 2005]
Who discovered it?
A direct quote from Anderson’s 1933 paper: “On August 2 1932 during the course of photographing cosmicray tracks produced in a vertical Wilson chamber (magnetic field 15,000 gauss) designed in the summer of 1930 by Prof R A Millikan and the writer the track shown in fig 1was obtained which seemed to be interpretable only on the basis of a particle carrying a positive charge but having the same mass of the same order of magnitude as that normally possessed by a free electron.” Anderson Carl D, The positive electron, Physical Review, Vol 43 pp 491494 15 March 1933 http://www.hep.man.ac.uk/babarph/babarphysics/positron.html puts the discovery as 1933 but as Anderson’s paper shows the observations were made in 1932
Who suggested it must exist?
“In the 1920's, Paul Adrien Maurice Dirac, a British physicist, developed a quantummechanical wave equation which was able to explain the origin of the electrons magnetic moment and spin. There was only one problem, the relativistic equation would only be satisfied if there were solutions for it which corresponded to negative energy states, and in the case of the electron, an electron with a positive charge.” The above is quote from: http://www.upei.ca/~phys221/mmh/
348
INDEX
Another suitable source is: http://www.infoplease.com/ce6/sci/A0804257.html “The existence of antiparticles for electrons was predicted in 1928 by P. A. M. Dirac's relativistic quantum theory of the electron. According to the theory both positive and negative values are possible for the total relativistic energy of a free electron. In 1932, Carl D. Anderson, while studying cosmic rays discovered the predicted positron, the first known antiparticle.” Or “Paul Dirac: Relativity and antiparticles Paul Dirac set himself the task of repairing the big problem with Schrödinger’s wave theory: that it didn’t agree with the theory of relativity. What he found in 1928 was totally unexpected. If relativity was included the theory necessarily predicted that every particle must have a ‘mirror image’ particle, exactly the same but opposite in all properties except mass. These pairs of particles could annihilate one another. This interpretation wasn’t clear at first to Dirac, but it gradually became a second cornerstone of quantum physics. If particles can be created or destroyed they have to come in such pairs. Otherwise quantities like electric charge won’t be conserved. Soon afterwards, in 1933, the creation of pairs of electrons and antielectrons was observed by Carl Anderson. By the way, as a bonus, Dirac’s theory explained the existence of spin too.” Advancing Physics chapter 18 40T Anderson was given 1936 Nobel Prize for Physics for this discovery
What is a muon?
The muon is a lepton that decays to form an electron or positron. It carries a charge of the same size as that on an electron but is much more massive, more than 2000 times that of an electron
When was it discovered?
“The muon was discovered in 1937 by J. C. Street and E. C. Stevenson in a cloud chamber. The discovery was published in "New Evidence for the Existence of a Particle Intermediate Between the Proton and Electron", Phys. Rev. 52, 1003 (1937).” http://hyperphysics.phyastr.gsu.edu/hbase/particles/muonhist.html However “Muons were discovered 60 years ago, by Carl Anderson and Seth Neddermeyer at Caltech. Muons live for about 2.2 microseconds, and often survive to ground level, before changing into electrons and invisible neutrinos. In 1947, ten years after the muon discovery, Cecil Powell's group at Bristol University discovered that the muons are produced by other particles  pions  which live for only a few hundredths of a microsecond. In this image, pions fly out from a collision in the streamer chamber.” http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~kaxiras/decay.html But muons had been predicted by Yukaya:
349
INDEX
Yukaya Hideka, On the Interaction of Elementary Particles 1, Proceedings of the PhysicoMathematical Society of Japan (3) 17, 48, pp 139148 (1935). (Read 17 Nov 1934) “It seems natural to modify the theory of Heisenberg and Fermi in the following way. The transition of a heavy particle from neutron state to proton state is not always accompanied by the emission of light particles. The transition is sometimes taken up by another heavy particle”.
Who said, ‘Who ordered that?’
The muon was discovered accidentally in 19361937 in the hunt for a particle predicted by Yukaya. At the time it seemed to serve no purpose in particle physics. I I Rabi asked, "Who ordered that?", when he was told of it. http://www.everything2.com/index.pl?node_id=92185&displaytype=printable&lastnode_id=92185
What is a neutrino?
“Three types of neutrinos are known; there is strong evidence that no additional neutrinos exist, unless their properties are unexpectedly very different from the known types. Each type or "flavour" of neutrino is related to a charged particle (which gives the corresponding neutrino its name). Hence, the "electron neutrino" is associated with the electron, and two other neutrinos are associated with heavier versions of the electron called the muon and the tau (elementary particles are frequently labelled with Greek letters, which confuses the layman)”. “Neutrinos are similar to the more familiar electron, with one crucial difference: neutrinos do not carry electric charge”.
Who suggested it must exist?
“1931  A hypothetical particle is predicted by the theorist Wolfgang Pauli. He based his prediction on the fact that energy and momentum did not appear to be conserved in certain radioactive decays. Pauli suggested that this missing energy might be carried off, unseen, by a neutral particle which was escaping detection. 1934  Enrico Fermi develops a comprehensive theory of radioactive decays, including Pauli's hypothetical particle, which Fermi coins the neutrino (Italian: "little neutral one"). With inclusion of the neutrino, Fermi's theory accurately explains many experimentally observed results” Who discovered it? 1959  Discovery of a particle fitting the expected characteristics of the neutrino is announced by Clyde Cowan and Fred Reines. Source for the above: http://www.ps.uci.edu/~superk/neutrino.html
350
INDEX
Episode 534: Antiparticles and the lepton family
The purpose of this episode is to introduce the lepton family, and also to bring in the idea of antiparticles, which annihilate when they meet particles. If you have had students research the questions at the end of Episode 533, time must now be allowed for them to feed back what they have found. You may need to supplement their finding with some of the details mentioned below.
Summary
Student presentations: Information about leptons. (15 minutes) Discussion: PET scans. (10 minutes) Student activity: Examining particle tracks. (10 minutes) Discussion: Summarising the main points. (5 minutes) Student activities: Readings. (20 minutes)
μ
e e e+ e+ e+
ν ν
μο
μ
Student presentations: Information about leptons
Your students should present their findings in response to the questions posed at the end of Episode 533. Important points to establish:
Positron e+
Dirac’s theoretical prediction of the antiparticle to the electron is too difficult to elaborate here, but Carl Anderson’s discovery of it in cosmic rays – he discovered the muon a few years later in the same way – is worth describing. The original cloud chamber track of Carl Anderson’s positron is shown in this famous photograph (Projecting this using a digital projector makes for more dramatic discussion.):
351
INDEX
TAP 5341: Anderson’s positron photograph The particle is moving up the photograph. It has been slowed down by passing through the lead plate across the centre, and the curvature of the path is caused by a magnetic field. At this stage, it’s enough to say that the particle is curved more when it is slower because the particle spends longer in the magnetic field. Anderson could deduce, from the direction and magnitude of the curvature and the length of the particle track, that the particle was positive and had a mass not more than twice that of an electron. The positron was the first antiparticle discovered: since then it has been found that every particle has its antiparticle.
Muon
The muon quote (‘Who ordered that?’) was from physicist Isadore Rabi – it’s whimsically supposed to be the sort of thing you say in a Chinese restaurant when you get some strange dish you don’t recognise. The muon was a problem because it had exactly the mass predicted for Yukawa’s meson (episode 534), but it didn’t undergo strong nuclear interactions at all, which the meson had to do (that was its job, after all!). It turned out to be a heavy type of electron. Like the electron, it has an antiparticle (the antimuon, μ+) which is positively charged.
Neutrinos ν
The problems with beta decay are worth describing in detail. Reactions such as carbon14 → nitrogen14 + β were expected to produce beta particles with identical kinetic energy: this is what happens in alpha decay. This does not happen in beta decay; sometimes a lot of the energy seems to be missing. In 1930 Wolfgang Pauli suggested, in a famous letter to fellow physicists starting ‘Dear Radioactive Ladies and Gentlemen’, in which he wrote ‘I’ve done something terrible: I have predicted an undetectable particle’. He suggested that the ‘lost’ energy was carried away by a new particle,
352
INDEX
which must be chargeless and have virtually no mass. Enrico Fermi developed the theory of this new particle, which he called a neutrino, but it wasn’t until 1951 that Reines and Cowan discovered it at the Savannah River nuclear reactor. Current (2005) thought is that the mass of the electron neutrino is in the range 0 < mass < 3 eV/c2 (compare with the electron, me = 0.511 MeV/c2). Like the electron and the muon, neutrinos have antiparticles. Furthermore, there are different neutrinos associated with the electron and the muon. Because these light particles do not experience the strong force of hadrons, they form a different category of particle and given the name leptons. There are now a total of 12 leptons: the electron, the muon, and a superheavy version called the tau (τ); a neutrino for each of these three; and six antiparticles for these six particles. The six leptons each have a lepton number of +1, while the six antileptons each have a lepton number of 1.
Discussion: PET scans
Take a look at PET scans and how they are made. When a positron meets an electron, they annihilate to produce a pair of gamma ray photons, each of energy 511 keV. (Both the electron and the positron have a mass of 511 keV/c2.) This principle is used in medicine, in PositronElectron Tomography (PET) scans. A radiochemical emitting positrons is injected into the body. When the chemical reaches the organ of interest, positrons emitted very soon meet electrons and annihilate. The scan reveals exactly where the radiochemical is by looking for a pair of gamma photons travelling in opposite directions. You may like to ask students how they think radiochemicals which emit positrons are made: they can be led to realise that the unstable nuclei lose positive charge when a positron is emitted, and so have too many protons. This suggests that you have to fire protons into the nucleus, which is one way this is actually done. TAP 5342: Making PET scans
Student activity: Examining particle tracks
Examining particle tracks: This can be done as class discussion with a digital projector, as suggested for the Anderson photograph of the positron track shown above, or students can work individually or in pairs, using printed copies of the images or looking at them on computer screens. If you adopt the latter approach, give a little more time for the activity: it could be a homework activity. The questions positron are intended for students late in the Post16 level nucleus course, so you should concentrate on simple patterns: Gamma photons are not very ionising, so tend not to leave tracks in bubble chambers or cloud chambers.
gamma ray electron 353
INDEX
Gamma photons of enough energy (2 × 511 keV) can produce an electronpositron pair (provided they are near nuclei at the time: don’t emphasise this point) Particles and antiparticles – protons and antiprotons in this case – can annihilate with production of energy, and also ‘new’ mass in the case of big particles In a magnetic field, charged particles follow curved paths, with opposite charges curving in opposite directions
TAP 5193: Particle tracks TAP 5343: Annihilation and pair production: Bubble chamber pictures
Discussion: Summarising the main points
Establish the main points of this episode: The electron is one of a small family of fundamental particles called leptons, which are quite different from the nuclear particles (hadrons) of Episode 533. Particle have antiparticles, with opposite value of charge, lepton number and (by implication) baryon number and strangeness as well).
Student activities: Readings
Here are a number of supplementary readings that you may care to use to broaden students’ background knowledge: The discovery of beta decay. TAP 5345: The discovery of beta decay Three poems about particles. TAP 5346: Three poems about particles Tracking particles. TAP 5193: Particle tracks
354
INDEX
355
INDEX
TAP 534 1: Anderson’s positron photograph
“On August 2 1932 during the course of photographing cosmicray tracks produced in a vertical Wilson chamber (magnetic field 15,000 gauss) designed in the summer of 1930 by Prof R A Millikan and the writer the track shown in fig 1was obtained which seemed to be interpretable only on the basis of a particle carrying a positive charge but having the same mass of the same order of magnitude as that normally possessed by a free electron”.
356
INDEX
External reference
The original reference is: Anderson Carl D, The positive electron, Physical Review, Vol 43 pp 491494 15 March 1933
357
INDEX
TAP 534 2: Making PET scans
Making PET scans
A pair of gamma rays are emitted in opposite directions as a result of electron/positron annihilation inside the patient Scintillator – captures gamma ray photon and emits lower energy photons into photomultiplier tubes
signal processing
γ
Photomultiplier – incoming photon creates a cascade of electrons, giving an electrical pulse output
γ
One pair of detectors will respond almost simultaneously. This near coincidence shows that the two gamma rays came from a common source. The tiny time difference between the two signals is then used to work out where they came from along the line between the detectors.
γ
γ
Scintillators are arranged in a grid on the inside surface of the scanner. In any short period of time many detectors will respond to gamma rays from many different annihilations inside the body. A computer produces a slicebyslice map of activity in the brain.
358
INDEX
Practical advice
This diagram is reproduced here so that you can discuss it with your class.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 20O
359
INDEX
TAP 534 3: Annihilation and pair production: bubble chamber pictures
Pair production: The original image
A processed image, with some tracks removed, and (below) the tracks coloured by curvature:
360
INDEX
Both images can be interpreted by assuming two photons to be entering from the top of picture, leaving no track. One (top) has created a positron / electron pair and a ‘knock on’ electron from within an atom. The other has simply produced a positron / electron pair. To think about:
• • •
is there a minimum photon energy required to produce a positron / electron pair? what feature of the picture shows this? what is the physical reason for this?
The pair produced in the lower event carry considerably more kinetic energy than the upper pair:
361
INDEX
This image above shows pair production of electrons and positrons as a stream of photons enters a bubble chamber. The photons leave no track, so that the particles appear to come from nowhere. How many of these events can you identify?
Proton–antiproton annihilation
Here an antiproton (coming in from the bottom left) strikes a proton. Mutual annihilation leads to four pairs of pions (π+ and π–). These curve in opposite directions in the magnetic field. To think about:
• •
the antiproton is being deflected slightly to the right. In which plane is the magnetic field? can you identify the π+ and π– particle tracks?
362
INDEX
Practical advice
These pictures may be used to illustrate annihilation and pair production. They might be printed out or made into OHP transparencies, with suitable captions. Use the questions as you see fit.
Answers and worked solutions Pair production
The minimum photon energy required to produce a positron / electron pair is 2mc2. The feature that shows higher speed is less curvature. Initial photon had greater energy.
Proton–antiproton annihilation
The magnetic field is directed “into the page” (NB antiproton has a negative charge) The π+ and π– particle tracks are red and green respectively (the π  will deflect the same way as the antiproton)
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, display material 10S
363
INDEX
TAP 534 5: The discovery of beta decay
This reading is about an important discovery made in the early days of the study of radioactivity. It involves many of the most famous nuclear scientists of the day and led to an amazingly bold prediction of the existence of a small neutral particle, eventually called the neutrino. The theory also meant that physicists had discovered a hitherto unknown force in nature – the weak force. Radioactivity – the emission of mysterious ‘rays’ from certain rare elements – was discovered in 1896 by the French physicist Henri Becquerel. The emissions were soon classified in terms of how penetrating they were as alpha, beta and gamma rays. The alpha rays – soon found to be massive particles, helium nuclei – left a particular source with a definite kinetic energy that was a characteristic identifier of the source. In the early days it was assumed that beta rays, identified as highspeed electrons, also left the source with a characteristic energy. Indeed early experiments carried out between 1907 and 1914 seemed to confirm this assumption. But they were wrong: the detection relied on photographic techniques that were too insensitive to reveal that some beta particles from a particular source had less energy than others.
Constant energy produces a line spectrum
Early experimenters were looking for patterns in the outputs of the various radioactive elements that were being discovered. It was possible to identify elements from the spectrum of the light they gave out when heated. It should be possible to do much the same for radioactive sources using these newer emissions. What they were beginning to realise at this time was that a good emitter like radium was changing into other radioactive elements with each emission, and it would be nice to be able to identify these from the emission they gave out. To start with it had been thought that the new elements were all forms of the original source, and they were named radium B, radium C, radium D, uranium X, etc. The idea that elements could change was against all the beliefs about atoms and elements so carefully built up in the nineteenth century. The energy of beta particles was found by making them move through a strong magnetic field before landing on a photographic plate. The slower less energetic ones were deviated more. These experiments showed that many beta emitters produced definite lines on the plate, where betas with a particular speed congregated. But the line spectra produced were ‘messy’. For some emitters it was hard to detect the betas with a discrete and definite energy against the noisy background in the exposed plates. In Berlin, Lise Meitner and Otto Hahn were two of several scientists across Europe investigating this problem. Remember that nobody realised that all these effects were due to changes in the nucleus – the nucleus had not then been discovered. The worst of all the emitters investigated by Meitner and Hahn was named radium E, which we now know is a radioactive isotope of bismuth (210Bi). In 1911 Otto Hahn (with Lise Meitner, one of the discoverers of nuclear fission – but that was yet to come) wrote to Ernest Rutherford: RaE is the worst of all. We can only obtain a fairly broad band. We formerly thought that it was as narrow as the other bands [as found in other emitters], but that is not true. It looks as if secondary … effects had a maximum influence on rays of a medium velocity like RaE. Hahn was thinking that there might be some secondary process inside the atom which somehow altered the energy distribution and smoothed things out, especially effective with lowenergy (soft) beta rays. Then later: The trouble with the soft rays [from RaE] is very great and we do not feel sure that we can overpass the difficulties to obtain good lines. But even the great Rutherford at this time was not too worried, and replied:
364
INDEX
The continuous βray spectrum observed for uranium X and radium E may be ultimately resolved for a number of lines. The problem was that there were two effects happening at the same time. Electrons from beta decay do always produce a continuous spectrum – the vital fact that was to lead to so much. But several beta emitting nuclei also emit gamma rays, which like alpha particles have single definite energies. These gamma rays can then give their energy to an electron in the outer part of the atom, knocking it out of the atom so that it looks like a beta particle from the nucleus, but one with a single definite energy. It was too attractive to physicists looking for a pattern to put more emphasis on the nice line spectra than on the vague and inexplicable continuous one. And when such lines occurred they were much easier to see on the photographic plates used than was the vaguely darkened background due to the continuous spectrum. Remember also that sharp line spectra were what physicists expected to see; that was what they were used to, and what theory told them ought to happen. So they saw what they expected.
Why is a continuous energy spectrum a problem?
So what was so important about the continuous spectrum anyway? It is always annoying for a scientist or a detective to discover that the interesting clues they are looking for are in fact far less important than the messy stuff that just seems to get in the way. But as the evidence for a continuous range of energies being carried away from a radioactive source grew, the very small numbers of what were to be called ‘nuclear physicists’ began to get more and more worried. The decisive evidence was coming not from hardtoread photographic plates but from the new generation of detectors using an electrical discharge produced by the ionising radiations. In April 1914 a young 23yearold physicist called James Chadwick was given a scholarship to do research and chose to join Hans Geiger in Berlin. Using a primitive form of what was later to be called a Geiger counter Chadwick obtained clear evidence for the continuous spectrum of beta particle energies – and not just with radium E. Chadwick was to become famous in 1932 for discovering the neutron, but choosing to go to Berlin in 1914 was not one of his better ideas. He spent the war years in an internment camp.
Is the law of conservation of energy true?
This was the question raised by the continuous spectrum of beta particle energies. To avoid answering the question with a ‘NO!’, physicists had to postulate a completely new particle that had no charge and negligible or zero mass. It was not shown experimentally to exist until 1956, and required a new fundamental force in nature to explain it. The problem was simple: if some beta particles leave a nucleus with less energy than others, what has happened to the ‘missing’ energy? It was seriously considered in the 1920s that maybe the law of conservation of energy just didn’t apply to the strange world of the quantum and the relativistic equivalence of mass and energy. In 1930 the distinguished physicist Niels Bohr said in a lecture: At the present stage of atomic theory we have no argument, either empirical or theoretical, for upholding the energy principle in βray disintegrations, and are even led to complications and difficulties in trying to do so. Then the rather eccentric Austrian physicist Wolfgang Pauli came to the rescue with a very brave idea indeed. In December 1930 he wrote a letter to a meeting of physicists at Tubingen University: Dear radioactive ladies and gentlemen, I have come upon a desperate way out regarding … [some fairly obscure data], as well as to the continuous βspectrum, in order to save …. The energy law. To wit, the possibility that there could exist in the nucleus electrically neutral particles, which I shall call neutrons, which have spin ½ and satisfy the exclusion principle and which are further distinct from lightquanta in that they do not
365
INDEX
move with light velocity. The mass of the neutrons should be of the same order of magnitude as the electron mass and in any case not larger than 0.01 times the proton mass. … The continuous βspectrum would then become understandable from the assumption that in βdecay a neutron is emitted along with the electron, in such a way that the sum of the energies of the neutron and the electron is constant. Some theoretical calculations pointed to Pauli’s neutral particle having zero rest mass. The word neutron seemed to too big for such a tiny, if important, object. The Italian physicist Enrico Fermi started calling it the little neutral one – or neutrino. This became the accepted name when in 1932 Chadwick discovered a much larger neutral component of the nucleus that better deserved to be called the neutron.
366
INDEX
Practical advice
This reading is designed as an extra to support the episode. It adds some personal context to the hard to accept discovery of the continuous energy spectrum associated with beta decay. It is interesting that one of the first challenges thrown up by the comparatively simple observation of a continuous beta energy spectrum should throw doubt on one of the most fundamental laws in physics, the conservation of energy.
Social and human context
The problem of the continuous beta spectrum shows how even the greatest physicists of the day were confused by what was being discovered, and found it hard to accept. When the observations were accepted they seemed to shake one of the most basic laws of physics.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 10T
367
INDEX
TAP 534 6: Three poems about particles
For many centuries, scientific ideas have inspired poets with raw material. These poems all deal with elementary particles, portraying everyday experiences and commenting on the scientific imagination.
Cosmic Gall
Neutrinos, they are very small. They have no charge and have no mass And do not interact at all. The earth is just a silly ball To them, through which they simply pass, Like dust maids down a drafty hall Or photons through a sheet of glass. They snub the most exquisite gas, Ignore the most substantial wall, Coldshoulder steel and sounding brass, Insult the stallion in his stall, And, scorning barriers of class, Infiltrate you and me! Like tall And painless guillotines they fall Down through our heads into the grass. At night, they enter at Nepal And pierce the lover and his lass From underneath the bed – you call It wonderful; I call it crass. by John Updike From: John Updike 1964 Telephone Poles and Other Poems (London: Andre Deutsch)
Nomad
The particle scientist is more or less happy. He has no home. All his ladders
368
INDEX
go straight down and claim the nameless. by Anthony Piccione From: Anthony Piccione 1977 Anchor Dragging Poems (BOA Editions)
Little Cosmic Dust Poem
Out of the debris of dying stars, this rain of particles that waters the waste with brightness; the seawave of atoms hurrying home, collapse of the giant, unstable guest who cannot stay; the sun’s heart reddens and expands, his might aspiration is lasting, as the shell of his substance one day will be with frost. In the radiant fields of Orion great hordes of stars are forming, just as we see every night, fiery and faithful to the end. Out of the cold and fleeing dust that is never and always, the silence and the waste to come – this arm, this hand, my voice, your face, this love. by John Haines From Bonnie Bilyeu Gordon 1985 Songs From Unsung Worlds (Boston, MA: Birkhauser)
369
INDEX
Practical advice
Each in their own way, these poets reflect on the success of the scientific imagination. Is their aim to grasp the incredible ideas better through the language of poetry? Certainly they link astronomical and nuclear scales to the human scale of reality.
External references
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 20T These poems, and many others inspired by science, are published in: Carey J (ed.) 1995 The Faber Book of Science (London: Faber & Faber) Ferris T (ed.) 1991 The World Treasury of Physics, Astronomy and Mathematics (Boston, MA: Little, Brown)
370
INDEX
Episode 535: Particle reactions
This episode considers both hadrons and leptons in particle reactions. Students must take account of both conservation of lepton number and conservation of baryon number.
Summary
Student activity: Applying conservation rules. (20 minutes) Discussion: Identifying conservation rules. (10 minutes) Student questions: Questions on conservation rules. (30 minutes)
Student activity: Applying conservation rules
Students should first check on the conservation of (electric) charge, baryon number, lepton number and strangeness in real reactions. They should also note that the mass/energy of products should be less/equal to the mass/energy of reactants. Use the first sheet of hadron cards from the previous episode and the four leptons from the ‘lepton cards’ document to decide which particle is needed to complete several reactions. TAP 5351: Applying conservation of baryon and lepton number You should expect some ambiguity as to which neutrino or antineutrino is involved: after all, this ambiguity was not resolved until recently. Ask students what they would expect, from symmetry, in each case. Now add the second sheet of cards from the ‘hadron cards’ document, containing all the antibaryons and some more mesons. TAP 5352: Particle card student activities A quick sort of all cards should reveal that all baryons and leptons have their antiparticles, all with obvious names except electron/positron. Tell students that all mesons – those with baryon number and lepton number of zero – have antiparticles, but that some are their own antiparticles; they can then sort out which is which. Students are now able to check whether reactions can proceed according to the conservation rules met so far.
Discussion: Identifying conservation rules
Invite students to sum up what they now know about particles and particle reactions. Look for the following points.
371
INDEX
Baryon number is always conserved (Electric) charge is always conserved Lepton number is always conserved Mass on the left hand side of the equation must be bigger than the mass on the right hand side. Strangeness may be conserved, but not always. (In weak interactions it can change by 1).
Student questions: Questions on conservation rules
Here are some suggestions for questions that could be given as student exercises at this point. TAP 5353: Things that don’t change Questions about creation and annihilation (but note that this question uses E = mc2; however, you may find that more mathematical students will accept mass values quoted as e.g. 939.6 MeV/c2 once they have done a calculation of this sort. TAP 5354: Creation and annihilation Questions about creation from annihilation. (To reduce the demand, you may wish to delete all the text from ‘Exotic forms of matter can occur fleetingly…’ and dropping questions 7 to 11.) TAP 5355: Creation from annihilation
372
INDEX
TAP 535 1: Applying conservation of baryon and lepton number
Use the hadron and lepton cards to decide which particle is needed to complete each of the following reactions. Assume that electric charge, baryon number and lepton number are all conserved in each reaction, and that the mass of the reactants cannot be less than the mass of the products. 1. n
→
+
p n
+
e
+ ……
…… + e
2. …… 3. π+ 4. p
→
→ →
μ+
n +
+
……
νe
+
e+
373
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
1. n 2. νe e3. π+ 4. p
→
+ +
p n n
+
ep n
+ + +
νebar
ee is also a correct answer!
allow any antineutrino.
→ →
+ +
allow any antineutrino, and of course the scattering
→ →
μ+
n
νμ νe
+ e+
allow any antineutrino allow μ+
374
INDEX
TAP 535 2: Particle card student activities
1. Sorting particles and antiparticles. Apart from the positron, all the antiparticles of baryons and leptons have obvious names. Not so for mesons! The mesons have baryon number 0 and lepton number 0. Some of them are antiparticles of others, but three of the mesons in these cards are their own antiparticles. Can you identify all these? 2. (a) Decay reactions. Use the particle cards to check that the following decay reactions are all possible. The rules are: Mass/energy is conserved. In practice, this means that the mass on the left hand side of the equation must be more than the mass on the right hand side if the reaction is to go. (Electric) charge is conserved Baryon number is conserved Lepton number is conserved Strangeness may be conserved, or may change by 1 (The symbol γ refers to a gamma photon.)
• • • • •
Κ+ → μ+ + νμ Λ → p + π− μ → e + νebar + νμ Ω− → Ξ0 + π− Σ0 → Λ + γ
(b) Here are some impossible decay reactions. For each one, use the particle cards to find why the reaction is not possible. n → p + e + νe
Δ+ → π+ + π0 Ξ0 → p + π0 Σ+ → p + K0
375
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
1. The particle – antiparticle pairs are: (π+, π−), (K+, K), (K0, K0bar), (ρ+, ρ ) and the particles which are their own antiparticles are: π0, η0, φ0 and J/ψ0.
2. (b) n → p + e + νe lepton number not conserved baryon number not conserved charge not conserved mass/energy not conserved
Δ+ → π+ + π0 Ξ0 → p + π0 Σ+ → p + K0
376
INDEX
TAP 535 3: Things that don’t change
Checking on conserved quantities
Try these questions, which require you to notice quantities that are conserved. Change, and no change Here is the equation for the reaction in which a neutron decays to a proton p, an electron e and an antineutrino ν :
1 0n
→ 1p + 1
0 ? e
+ 0 ν.
0
1.
How does the equation show that the total number of nucleons remains the same?
2.
How does the equation show that the total electric charge remains the same?
3.
Which symbols show that the electron and antineutrino are not nucleons, but leptons with zero nucleon number?
4.
An electron is a lepton. An antineutrino is an antilepton. Explain how in this reaction the lepton number is conserved, even though it creates two leptons.
Here is the equation for an electron interacting with a proton to produce a neutron and a neutrino:
0 ? e 1 + 1p → 0 n + 0 ν. 1 0
5.
How does the equation show that the total number of nucleons remains the same?
6.
How does the equation show that the total electric charge remains the same?
377
INDEX
7.
How does the equation show that the total lepton number remains the same? Why is this neutrino not an antineutrino?
56 49 The stable iron nucleus is 26 Fe ; ‘lightweight’ iron 26 Fe decays emitting a positron and a neutrino. 62 ‘Heavyweight’ iron 26 Fe decays emitting an electron and an antineutrino. Here are the reactions:
49 26 Fe
→
49 25 Mn
+
0 1e
+
0 0ν
62 26 Fe
→
62 27 Co
+
0 1e
+
0 0 ν.
8.
In the first equation, what values show that the nucleon number stays the same?
9.
In the second equation, what values show that the nucleon number stays the same?
10.
How can you see from the first equation that charge is conserved?
11.
How can you see from the second equation that charge is conserved?
12.
In the first equation, the positive electron (positron) is an antilepton. How does the equation show that total lepton number is unchanged even though two are produced?
13.
In the second equation, why is an antineutrino emitted?
378
INDEX
14.
In both equations, how does the reaction change the chemical element involved?
379
INDEX
Practical advice
These are intended as simple practice questions, on conservation principles for particles. The most difficult point is that an antielectron plus a neutrino or an electron plus an antineutrino do not change the total number of leptons (a lepton and an antilepton in each case).
Social and human context
Particle physics involves creating meaningful categories, such as ‘lepton’ and ‘nucleon’, to form families. These come from thought, not ‘directly’ from experiment.
Answers and worked solutions
1. 2. 3. 4. The upper numbers (nucleon number) add up to the same on the left and right: 1 = 1 + 0 + 0. The lower numbers (charge number) add up to the same on the left and right: 0 = 1 + (– 1) + 0. The upper (nucleon) number is zero for both (even though an electron has some mass). The reaction produces one lepton and one antilepton. The electron has lepton number 1. The antineutrino has lepton number – 1. Together, they add to zero. The total lepton number is zero before and after. The upper numbers (nucleon number) add up to the same on the left and right: 0 + 1 = 1 + 0. The lower numbers (charge number) add up to the same on the left and right: – 1 + 1 = 0 + 0. An electron (a lepton) vanishes on the left. A neutrino (also a lepton) is created on the right. The total lepton number remains equal to 1. If the neutrino were an antineutrino the lepton number would go from + 1 to – 1, and not be conserved. The total nucleon number 49 remains constant: 49 = 49 + 0 + 0. The total nucleon number 62 remains constant: 62 = 62 + 0 + 0. The electric charge on the nucleus is decreased, the charge being carried away by the positron: 26 = 25 + 1 + 0. The positive electric charge on the nucleus increases, a negative charge being carried away by the electron: 26 = 27 + (– 1) + 0. A lepton–antilepton pair is produced, so the lepton number does not change. The antineutrino ‘cancels’ the increase in lepton number due to producing an electron. The charge on the nucleus changes. So the number of electrons around the nucleus changes, altering the chemical properties of the atom
5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 10S
380
INDEX
TAP 535 4: Creation and annihilation
Using Erest = m c 2
These questions give practice in using Erest = m c 2 to calculate photon energies and masses of particles created or annihilated.
Energy and mass
The energy of a particle at rest is all due to its mass. This energy is called the rest energy. The rest energy in joules of a particle with mass m measured in kilograms is given by Erest = m c 2, where c is the speed of light in metres per second. An energy in joules can be converted to electron volts by dividing by 1.60 × 10–19 J eV–1. The mass of an electron or positron is 9.11 × 10–31 kg. The speed of light is 3.00 × 108 m s–1. 1. Show that the rest energy of an electron is 8.2 × 10–14 J.
2.
Use the answer to question 1 to show that the rest energy of an electron is 0.51 MeV.
3.
Write down the rest energy of a positron (antielectron).
4.
An electron and a positron which meet annihilate one another. By how much does the rest energy decrease in total? Express the answer in MeV.
5.
The annihilation of an electron and a positron at rest produces a pair of identical gamma ray photons travelling in opposite directions. Write down in MeV the energy you expect each photon to have
381
INDEX
6.
A single photon passing near a nucleus can create an electron–positron pair. Their rest energy comes from the energy of the photon. Write down the smallest photon energy that can produce one such pair.
7.
Cosmic rays can send highenergy photons through the atmosphere. What approximately is the maximum number of electron–positron pairs that a 10 GeV photon can create?
8.
24 22 The isotope 12 Mg is stable. The light isotope 12 Mg emits positrons and gamma rays including a photon of energy 1.28 MeV. How can decays of this nucleus result in both annihilation and creation of electron–positron pairs?
9.
A photon can create particle–antiparticle pairs of greater mass than electrons and positrons. Approximately what energy must a photon have to create a proton–antiproton pair? (The mass of a proton is 2000 times the mass of an electron).
10.
Why do the photons from the annihilation of an electron–positron pair not themselves go on to create new electron–positron pairs?
382
INDEX
Practical advice
These are intended as simple practice calculations on energy changes in particle–antiparticle creation and annihilation.
Alternative approaches
You might start in the context of PET scans, which use positron annihilation.
Social and human context
The existence of the creation and annihilation of matter makes for a profound shift in the way the world has to be imagined. Its permanence is undermined.
Answers and worked solutions
1.
Erest = mc2
Erest = 9.11×10−31 kg× 3.00×108 ms–1
(
)
2
= 8.2 ×10−14 J.
2. Energy in eV is energy in joules divided by 1.60 × 10–19 J eV–1:
8.2 × 10 −14 J 1.60 × 10 −19 J eV −1 = 5.1 × 10 5 eV = 0.51 MeV
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
0.51 MeV since electrons and positrons have identical mass. 1.02 MeV. Two particles, each of rest energy 0.51 MeV, are annihilated. 0.51 MeV each. The two photons share the total 1.02 MeV. 1.02 MeV. The photon has to create the rest energy of two particles, each 0.51 MeV. Approximately 104 pairs. Each pair requires approximately 1 MeV = 1 × 106 eV and 10 9 GeV = 10 × 10 eV is available. The 1.28 MeV photon has enough energy to create an electron–positron pair. The positron from the decay can annihilate with any nearby electron. Approximately 2 GeV. The rest energy of a proton–antiproton pair is 2000 times greater than the roughly 1 MeV rest energy of an electron–positron pair. Their 0.51 MeV energy is too small (minimum 1.02 MeV).
External references
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 30S
383
INDEX
TAP 535 5: Creation from annihilation
Colliding electrons and positrons
The passage below is from The New Physics, edited by Paul Davies. Read the passage, in which some phrases or words are highlighted in bold. Write a fuller explanation of what is meant by each highlighted word or phrase. Questions to guide you are offered, but you can go further if you wish.
Electron–positron annihilation
Electrons colliding with positrons provide one of the most exciting ways of learning about bizarre varieties of matter…. The key feature is that positrons are the antiparticles of electrons. When matter and antimatter meet, they can mutually annihilate. The energy in their masses has been unlocked: Erest = mc2 at work. What is the point of this? Destroying the electrons and positrons is just the start. The aim is to watch what happens when their energy ‘recongeals’ into new forms of matter and antimatter. It can return whence it came, into electron and positron, but more interestingly it may produce new forms of matter with their corresponding antimatter. The hunt is on for those occasions when new forms of matter, not previously seen on Earth, emerge from the encounter. Exotic forms of matter can occur fleetingly in the heat of stars, and when we temporarily simulate that heat on Earth, so that we can capture these new varieties in earthbound laboratories. This continuous destruction of matter and antimatter was common in the brief heat of the primordial Big Bang. By annihilating electrons and positrons in the laboratory we are reproducing conditions similar to those that occurred a split second after the Big Bang. We can create matter and antimatter, built for example of quarks and antiquarks, to order. 1.
Positrons: what are they?
2.
Antiparticles: what’s the relation between a particle and antiparticle?
3.
Antimatter: what is antimatter? Where can it be found?
4.
Mutually annihilate: what happens? What vanishes and what does not vanish?
384
INDEX
5.
Erest = mc2: give an example of how to use this equation.
6.
It can return whence it came, into electron and positron: what is happening here?
7.
Emerge from the encounter: what emerges?
8.
The heat of stars: why does it matter how hot the stars are?
9.
Temporarily simulate that heat: how is this temporary simulation done? By heating stuff up?
10.
Primordial Big Bang: what is this?
11.
By annihilating electrons and positrons in the laboratory: how?
385
INDEX
Practical advice
This passage comes from a book intended for a wide audience, but an audience with considerable knowledge of physics. Suggest to students that they should write enough to help a friend who is not studying physics at Alevel at least to make sense of the passage. Remind them that this often means saying the same thing in one or two other ways. Examples always help, too, so encourage that.
Alternative approaches
You could choose a different passage, for example from a text about medical applications of particle physics.
Social and human context
New ideas often need new words. Learning physics is sometimes like learning a new language.
Example answers
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Positrons: are antiparticles of electrons, they have the same mass but positive charge. Antiparticles include the fact that antiparticles have all properties except mass opposite to those of their particle counterparts. Antimatter: is made of antiparticles. No bulk antimatter is known in the Universe, but antiparticles can be produced in accelerators. Mutually annihilate: the opposite properties of particle and antiparticle all cancel, and the rest energy (mass) goes into kinetic energy of a photon (which has zero mass). Erest = mc2: you could show that the mass of an electron corresponds to 0.5 MeV approximately. Or give an example from nuclear reactions. It can return whence it came, into electron and positron: a photon (near a nucleus) can create an electron–positron pair. Emerge from the encounter: pairs of particles and antiparticles emerge. The heat of stars: because the stars are hot, particles have a lot of random thermal energy per particle. This may be enough to cause an event in a collision. Temporarily simulate that heat: accelerated particles are collided, so that their kinetic energy is available in the collision event. Primordial Big Bang: the hypothetical origin of the Universe, when space and time were created and a hot fireball of space, time and matter exploded. By annihilating electrons and positrons in the laboratory: the best way is to make accelerated particles collide head on, to get the maximum energy into the products of the collision.
External references
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 50C
386
INDEX
Episode 536: Vector bosons and Feynman diagrams
You need to check your own specification here for details of what students will need to do in examinations, and to look at past papers: although Feynman diagrams give clarity to particle interactions, they are not required by all specifications.
e

Summary
Demonstration: Exchange particles. (5 minutes) Discussion: Interactions of different types. (15 minutes) Demonstration: Model Feynman diagrams. (15 minutes) Discussion: Rules for Feynman diagrams. (10 minutes)
e

virtual photon
e

e

Student activity: Constructing Feynman diagrams. (20 minutes)
Demonstration: Exchange particles
Yukawa’s theory of an exchange particle to explain repulsive and attractive forces in nuclei is worth demonstrating with two students and a football or other large object. If two students throw (gently) a heavy object such as a schoolbag or football to each other, each will report feeling an outwards force both on throwing and on catching (Why? Conservation of momentum). If the rules are changed so that, instead of throwing, each student pulls the object from the other’s hands in turn, then each will report feeling an inwards force both on gaining and on losing the particle.
Discussion: Interactions of different types
This crude model in the demonstration above will illustrate the idea of an exchange particle originated by Yukawa, who suggested that a nuclear exchange particle (it turned out to be the pion) could explain the strong interaction between protons and neutrons. In the last episode, it will be clear that a similar fundamental exchange works at a level that is more fundamental than mesons and baryons. The electromagnetic interaction, which consists of just the wellknown attractions and repulsions of static electricity (pre16 level), is a different interaction, much weaker than the strong interaction. Here the exchange particle is the photon. The weak interactions, which are harder to classify, and are similar in strength to the electromagnetic interactions, are associated with changes in the nature of particles.
387
INDEX
Demonstration: Model Feynman diagrams
Feynman diagrams can be introduced via a physical model that can be twisted to show different interactions. The key aspects – direction of time, transfer of the forcecarrying boson, difference between particles and antiparticles – can be quickly illustrated for an electromagnetic interaction. As an example of these points (including the last), you may wish to use a simple physical model. It is quick and easy to use cheap coat hangers linked by their hooks, with triangles of card attached midway across the ‘shoulder’ of each. The supporting ‘shoulders’ of the coat hangers are the interacting particles, while the interlocked hooks constitute the vector boson. With one twist each time, it is possible to go from electronelectron interaction to electron positron interaction to positronpositron interaction to electronpositron annihilation. For these electromagnetic interactions, the particle exchanged is a photon. For the weak interaction, there are three particles, depending on the changes in charge taking place. If you deal with quark interactions later, the exchange particle is the gluon. Some teacher notes: TAP 5361: Feynman diagrams TAP 5362: Coathanger Feynman diagrams
Discussion: Rules for Feynman diagrams
If your specification requires Feynman diagrams, you will need to emphasise the rules for drawing them. These are not consistent from source to source! In this episode, the following conventions are followed. Time goes vertically up the diagram (many sources have time horizontal). Sidetoside displacement in the diagrams has no meaning other than to show separate particles. If two paths are heading outwards, it does not imply that particles are repelling each other. Particles are shown by ‘normal’ arrowheads, while antiparticles are shown by reversed arrowheads (remember that the direction of time is upwards), so a collision between a proton and an antiproton can be represented as:
388
INDEX
From any vertex, such as the collision point of the proton and antiproton, a boson can be drawn. This can be a photon (wavy line), a weak interaction boson (a dotted line) A Feynman diagram – certainly the simple ones in this episode – can be pivoted about any of the vertices to produce another valid diagram.
Student activity: Constructing Feynman diagrams
Students are supplied with cards from which they can construct Feynman diagrams. They use the different ‘lefthand sides’ of the diagrams with the single vector boson and the appropriate ‘righthand side’ to produce the different possible weak interactions, and then to label the boson with W+, W or Z0 as appropriate. TAP 5363: Feynman diagram student activities TAP 5364: Feynman weak interaction cards
389
INDEX
TAP 536 1: Feynman diagrams
Teacher notes
A Feynman diagram is not a picture in space of the paths of actual particles. It is a picture of the structure of one of the terms that contributes to the total “quantum amplitude” for a process. A ‘process’ here is an event in which definite particles enter and definite particles leave. A ‘quantum amplitude’ is a measure of the likelihood of the process happening. For example, scattering of a pair of electrons has two electrons enter and two leave. Here are some of the terms that Feynman diagrams keep track of and all of which have to be taken into account to obtain the final amplitude:
indistinguishable
No photon exchanged. The amplitude for these terms just contains an expression for an electron propagating from one place to another. Here we have included terms obtained by interchanging the indistinguishable electrons. Both have to be counted in.
indistinguishable
One photon exchanged. The expression for the amplitude is now a product of four expressions for electrons going from place to place, one expression for a virtual photon going from place to place, and two couplings of electron to photon.
390
INDEX
A further term (omitting ones which involve interchanging electrons). Here an electron emits a virtual photon and absorbs it again.
e+ e–
Photon emits an electronpositron pair, which then recombines. This term has four couplings of electron (or positron) with a photon. Each introduces a factor of the electronic charge into the product giving the amplitude. Doing the adding up
The expression for each diagram has to be integrated over all spacetime positions for the particles and where they interact. They are also integrated over all possible energies and momenta. This gives a total quantum amplitude (‘arrow’) for each diagram. Finally, the arrows for all computed diagrams are added to give a final arrow.
391
INDEX
Practical advice
We strongly recommend that you read Feynman’s ‘QED: The Strange Theory of Light and Matter’, particularly chapters 3 and 4. It gives a very clear picture of the nature of Feynman diagrams, and the calculations made using them, without technical detail. A careful reading will amplify several of the teaching notes above
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, further teaching notes
392
INDEX
TAP536 2: Coathanger Feynman diagrams
One way of showing Feynman diagrams is by using coathangers and cardboard triangles.
Electronelectron interaction
Electronpositron interaction
393
INDEX
Positronpositron interaction
Electronpositron annihilation
394
INDEX
395
INDEX
TAP 536  3: Feynman diagram student activities
This is the Feynman diagram for an electron interacting with another electron by the electromagnetic interaction.
In a Feynman diagram, the electromagnetic interaction is shown by the exchange of a photon. The ‘left hand’ electron emits a photon, and changes direction. The ‘right hand’ electron absorbs the photon, and also changes direction. In a Feynman diagram,
• •
Time goes upwards. (This is not consistent. Some particle physicists prefer to have time going sideways.) Particles are shown by arrows going upwards
Antiparticles are shown by arrows going downwards, so the electromagnetic interaction between two positrons (the antiparticles of electrons) is
The outwards movement after emitting or absorbing a photon just shows a change in direction. It does not mean that they particles are repelling each other. As an example, the attraction between an electron and a positron is
396
INDEX
The photon (wavy line) in the electromagnetic interaction is called a vector boson.
• •
Vector – carries the interaction Bosons – the type of particles that carry interactions.
In the weak interaction, there are three vector bosons: the W+, W and Z0 bosons. On Feynman diagrams, these are shown by dotted lines. The first two weak interaction bosons are charged, and are emitted when the ‘left hand’ particle changes its charge. If a proton turns into a neutron, for example, it emits a W+.
You have the following cards
Four ‘left hand’ cards, similar to the electron in the third example above One ‘middle’ card to serve as the vector boson (dotted) Four ‘right hand’ cards, similar to the similar to the positron in the third example above. Three vector boson labels: W+, W and Z0 to put on top of the ‘middle’ card. 1. Use these cards to construct four possible weak interactions. Make sure that your reaction conserves charge as well as baryon number and lepton number. Label each diagram with one of these titles:
2.
• • • •
3.
Betaminus decay Betaplus decay Electron capture Neutrinoneutron collision For each one, write the equation.
397
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
2. Betaminus decay
Betaplus decay
Electron capture
Neutrinoneutron collision
398
INDEX
It is worth emphasising how the diagrams show conservation of baryon number (upward arrow head before and after the vertex on the baryon path), conservation of lepton number (upward arrow head before and after the vertex for the electron capture and the neutrinoneutron collision, or no lepton becoming and upward and a downward arrow after for the two beta decays) and conservation of charge, including the vector boson, reading from left to right. 3. n → p + e + νebar p → n + e++ νe p + e → n + νe
νe + n → n + νe
399
INDEX
TAP 536  4: Feynman weak interaction cards
400
INDEX
Episode 537: Preparation for the deep scattering and quarks topics
Episodes 538 and 539 of this topic give clear evidence for the size of the nucleus, and for the fact that nucleons are not fundamental particles but contain different parts. This leads onto GellMann & Zweig’s quark model.
Episode 538: Electron scattering Episode 539: Deep inelastic scattering Episode 540: Quarks and the standard model
Main aims
Students will: 1. Know that Rutherford’s experiment, using alpha particles, cannot probe the nucleus because the alpha particles will interact with the nucleus by the strong nuclear force. 2. Know that electrons, being leptons, do not ‘feel’ the strong nuclear force, and so can probe the nucleus. 3. Use electron wavelength and scattering data to calculate the size of the nucleus. 4. Understand that the complex scattering from a nucleus reveals that nucleons are not simple points, but are themselves composed of smaller particles. 5. Describe how hadrons are made from two or three quarks. 6. Deduce the properties of a hadron from the properties of its constituent quarks. 7. Draw Feynman diagrams involving quarks and gluons.
Prior knowledge
Rutherford’s experiment, diffraction, and the quantum nature of electrons (‘waveparticle duality’). If you have not covered diffraction already, you will have to modify the suggested approach to take account of this.
401
INDEX
Episode 538: Electron scattering
This could follow work on Rutherford scattering, where alpha particles are used to identify the nucleus as the region of the atoms containing all the positive charge and most of the mass. Calculation of closest approach of alpha particles gives an estimate of nuclear size, but more direct experimental evidence is given by scattering of electrons.
Summary
Student experiment: An optical analogue. (10 minutes) Discussion: Diffraction graphs. (10 minutes) Worked example: Calculating nuclear diameter. (10 minutes) Student questions: Further examples. (20 minutes)
Student experiment: An optical analogue
When waves pass through a collection of spheres, which ‘look’ like circles to the oncoming waves, they diffract around them in the same way as through holes of the same size. This means that they produce a diffraction pattern with a minimum at roughly the angle given by the singleslit diffraction equation sinθ = λ/d (it should really be sinθ = 1.22λ/d for a circle; you could use that form, but the familiar equation is close enough here). Look at a point source of light (a small circuitry lamp is fine) through a pinhole made in aluminium foil – the smaller the hole the better, so use a fine sewing needle or else pull thin copper wire until it snaps, and push the workhardened tip through the aluminium foil. A diffraction pattern consisting of a circle with a surrounding ring (more than one if you’re lucky) should be visible. If you look at the point source through a microscope slide dusted with lycopodium powder (cornflour will work, but is not as good, because the particle sizes vary more) you see a similar pattern. You may like to refer to the halo seen around the Moon in the winter, which is due to similar scattering by ice crystals in the upper atmosphere. The point here is that waves encountering round (spherical) objects will give a diffraction pattern, involving a central maximum, and then a minimum before the secondary maximum of the surrounding ring.
Discussion: Diffraction graphs
The graph below compares a typical electron diffraction pattern with the Rutherford alpha scattering pattern and the single slit pattern. Show this graph, and identify the differences.
402
INDEX
TAP 5381: Rutherford alpha scattering pattern and the single slit pattern The electron scattering clearly shows features of both Rutherford scattering (due to electrostatic interaction: the fact that the force is attractive rather than repulsive is not important) and diffraction. Concentrating on the minimum, it suggests that the nucleus is behaving as a circular object of diameter d.
Worked example: Calculating nuclear diameter
The nuclear diameter d can be calculated from the electron scattering data. If your students can cope with the maths, you can work through a sample calculation. (The virtue of the approach is not that students should be able to reproduce the mathematics, but that they should be able to see that a systematic application of the mathematics related to diffraction and the wave nature of the electron can give the size of the nucleus.) Electron beam energy = 100 MeV = 100 × 106 × 1.6 × 1019 J = 1.6 × 1011 J Momentum p = E/c = 1.6 × 1011/3.0 × 108 = 5.3 × 1020 kg m s1 de Broglie relationship λ = h/p = 6.6 × 1034/5.3 × 1020 = 1.2 × 1014 m The first diffraction minimum occurs at about 22°, so using the single slit diffraction equation sinθ = λ/d we have d = λ/sinθ = 1.2 × 1014 m /sin (22°) = 3.3 × 1014 m
Student questions: Further examples
A structured question will allow your students to follow through this logic for themselves. It should be covered here if you did not do so in Episode 522.
403
INDEX
TAP 5226: Electrons measure the size of nuclei.
TAP 5381: Rutherford alpha scattering pattern and the single slit pattern
404
INDEX
Practical advice
The graph is reproduced here for use in the classroom.
405
INDEX
Episode 539: Deep inelastic scattering
At higher electron energies, two things happen:
• •
The electrons penetrate deeper into the nucleus and scatter off subunits within protons and neutrons. The electrons lose energy (they undergo inelastic collisions); this energy is ‘converted’ into mass as a jet of pions is produced.
Hence higher energy electrons give us information about the structure of nucleons.
Summary
Student experiment: Analogue of electron scattering by quarks. (20 minutes) Discussion: Deductions from electron scattering. (10 minutes)
Student experiment: Analogue of electron scattering by quarks
Magnets are concealed in a box. These represent ‘charges’ which are probed using a freelysuspended magnet. The important point here is that each of the ‘charges’ represented by the magnet poles will affect the trajectory of the target ‘charge’ of the moving magnet pole in a more complex way than a single one would. TAP 5391: Probing arrangements
Discussion: Deductions from electron scattering
Students should appreciate that the necessarily complex analysis of particle paths from deep electron scattering indicates that the neutron and proton are not simple point charges but contain simpler structure within them. Electrons must be given very large kinetic energies to penetrate nuclei. Those energies can be sufficiently great that some of the energy can be converted (via E = mc2) into the mass of new particles. This results in the electrons losing energy – this is why the scattering is inelastic – to produce pions. Jets of pions are typical of the ‘events’ seen in particle accelerators colliding protons and antiprotons. At this stage you could ask the open question: if, as indicated by deep inelastic scattering, neutrons and protons are each made of three particles called quarks, what’s the smallest number of quarks you need? Obviously you could have any number of quarks, but there must be more than one, or else neutrons and protons would not be different. The simplest model would have two different types.
406
INDEX
Assuming there are just two types of quark, then possibilities could be AAA and BBB (chargeless A and +e/3 for B) or AAB and BBA, which is actually correct, with A being d (e/3) and B being u (+2e/3). The latter (correct) version also explains other particles.
407
INDEX
TAP 5391: Probing arrangements
Trajectories show structure
Probing unknown regions of space by tracking probes can show what lies in the volume of space. If a charged probe is used then expect to be able to tell where the charged particles are in that space (or perhaps were – the nature of the interactions will depend on the mass of the target charges, as well as the probes). A further potential difficulty is that the charges within the probed volume may not themselves be stationary, even before the probe arrives. And often you can usually only see where the probes enter and leave the volume, not track them through the volume. However, there are usually few alternatives available. Highly inferential knowledge gained in precisely this way forms a major part of what is known about the subatomic world. Here the northseeking poles of magnets are used, to model repulsive interactions.
You will need:
target box three bar magnets cylindrical magnet mounted on 1 m of dowel retort stand, boss and clamp
A model of highenergy collisions
Set up the probe to swing freely. Set up a number of magnets in the target volume of space:
height of magnets
15 cm 15 cm
Then challenge a partner to discern what is in that space – using the probe! Keep it to fairly simple distributions.
408
INDEX
Suspend the probe so that the centre of the swing is over the centre of the box. Place the aiming card over the centre of the box. Then probe. Make a good model – don’t cheat!
In probing you might try:
1. 2. Altering the initial kinetic energy of the probe. Altering the aiming error of the probe.
Suggest reasons for your choice of what is under the box. Change roles and try again.
You have
1. 2. 3. Used a model of highenergy probing of a volume of space. Seen the effect of probe energy on the ability to resolve what is in the space. Found some of the difficulties in interpreting trajectories to infer the existence of particles.
409
INDEX
Practical advice
The apparatus is simple enough, and variations may suit local conditions. The box will need to be of a suitable inside height to allow the magnets to stand inside the box, just reaching to the top.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 70E
410
INDEX
Episode 540: Quarks and the standard model
The quark model, justified by the results of deep inelastic electron scattering, creates relative order out of the chaos of particle classification. Quarks have three ‘colour’ charges, and the rule for stability is that combinations must be colourless.
Summary
Discussion: Rules for quarks. (15 minutes) Student activity: Making nonstrange hadrons with quark triangles. (15 minutes) Student questions: Making strange hadrons with quark triangles. (15 minutes) Discussion: Gluons and the force between quarks. (15 minutes) Student activity: Constructing Feynman diagrams. (20 minutes) Discussion: Summing up. (10 minutes)
Discussion: Rules for quarks
Students need to be informed of the rules for combining quarks. Where the electromagnetic interaction is due to the property of electric charge, which can be positive or negative, quark interaction is due to a property which can have three different states. This has been called ‘colour’ charge, because the three primary colours red, green and blue add to give white, a colourless combination. These threequark combinations are the baryons. Antiquarks have an anticolour; you may wish to think of the complementary colours to the three primary colours, so antired is cyan, antigreen is magenta and antiblue is yellow. Three antiquark combinations are the antibaryons. By combining a quark with an antiquark of the appropriate anticolour, a twoquark hadron can be produced. These twoquark combinations are the mesons.
Student activity: Making nonstrange hadrons with quark triangles
The quark triangle are constructed so that they can be fitted together in threes, with the 120° vertices together, with the combination red, blue and green giving a baryon. A similar arrangement with antired, antiblue and antigreen gives an antibaryon. By taking one quark and fitting an antiquark of the appropriate anticolour alongside it so that the two long sides coincide, a meson can be constructed. TAP 5401: Quark triangles TAP 5402: Quark models
411
INDEX
The document contains two versions of each antiquark: one version uses the same colours as the related quarks, but with the white and coloured regions of the triangles reversed. The second version has the same pattern of colours on the triangles as the related quarks, but the complementary colours are used instead of red, blue and green: thus antired is cyan, antiblue is yellow and antigreen is magenta. You can choose whichever form you prefer! Using only u (+2/3 e) and d quarks ( 1/3 e) and their antiquarks, u bar and d bar, in all possible colours, students can quickly use the threecolour rule to construct four possible baryons (n, p and the unstable Δ− and Δ++) together with their antiparticles. Other nonstrange baryons are high energy states of these four, e.g. the Δ and Δparticles are uud and udd respectively, and can decay to the proton and neutron by emitting the extra energy as a gamma photon Δ+ → p + γ
Δ → n + γ
They should also be able to construct four different mesons, all pions. Two of these are, in fact, the same particle (u + u bar = d + d bar = pi zero). Issue the strange quarks, s and s bar, at this point, with the explanation that they are heavier versions of d and d bar, and that they have strangeness of 1 and +1 respectively. This allows the construction of all the particles in the baryons decuplet and meson octet.
Student questions: Gluons and the force between quarks
These questions use the u and d quark triangles and their antiquark triangles. TAP 5403: Putting quarks together Further questions take a similar approach to explain the baryon decuplet and meson octet. These questions can be used to structure the student activity, or else as homework to consolidate the learning afterwards. TAP 5404: Strange quarks
Discussion: Gluons and the force between quarks
Just as pions (Yukawa’s mesons) are the particles that bind baryons, the quarks in a baryon are bound by exchanging a particle. The particles here are gluons, and we envisage the transfer as exchanging the colour of the two quarks concerned: e.g. a red quark will change into a blue quark by emitting a redantiblue gluon, which is then absorbed by a blue quark that becomes red.
Student activity: Constructing Feynman diagrams
412
INDEX
If your specification requires it, the Feynman diagrams used for the weak interaction can now be extended to the strong interaction, and the ‘n’ and ‘p’ of the weak interactions replaced by‘d’ and ‘u’ quarks respectively. TAP 5405: Feynman diagrams with quarks
Discussion: Summing up
This is a conclusion to the entire particle physics sequence. It should be realised that normal matter we see around us consists of two quarks and two leptons, and their antiparticles. Larger mass versions, which are not stable, occur in two generations. The muon and strange quark have already been met, and, together with the muon neutrino and the heavier version of the u quark, the charm quark (c), form the second generation. There is only one more generation, so all matter, whether stable or not, can be described in terms of 6 quarks and 6 leptons.
413
INDEX
TAP 540 1: Quark triangles
TAP 5402: Quark models
414
INDEX
415
INDEX
416
INDEX
417
INDEX
418
INDEX
419
INDEX
420
INDEX
421
INDEX
422
INDEX
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 60P
423
INDEX
TAP 540 2: Quark models
Hadrons and quarks
This simple physical model allows construction of baryons (hadrons containing three quarks) using the basic up (u) and down (d) quarks or antiquarks (the same letters with bars above them – here called ubar or dbar quarks) to form equilateral triangles containing red, green and blue. The antiquarks have the same colours in opposite arrangement on the models. Quarks and antiquarks can combine to give mesons (hadrons containing two quarks). Quarks aren’t really 'coloured' of course. But each has a property that is an analogue of colour with a rule that says that to make a valid particle these properties must combine to give a colourless (white) result. No one can see these colours – or even investigate the properties of single quarks because they can’t exist on their own. The colours have to be worked out 'backwards' – from seeing what combinations actually exist in nature to make hadrons. Historically, the names baryons, mesons and leptons are descriptions of observed particles in terms of their masses. Baryons are heavy, leptons are light, and mesons are inbetween. It was later realised that leptons (electrons and neutrinos) were fundamental particles, while both baryons and mesons were combinations of smaller particles — quarks. This led to the introduction of the term hadrons (‘dense particles’) for both baryons and mesons.
You need
Triangular models of the six possible u and d quarks and their six possible antiquarks. Each triangle labels the quark (u or d), whether it is a quark or an antiquark, gives its charge and its colour. TAP 5401: Quark triangles
Rules of the game: building up hadrons from quarks
When quarks combine to form stable matter they have to satisfy two basic conditions:
• •
the net electric charge must be zero or a whole number of the electronic charge e; the final colour must be 'white'
Physicists knew that three primary colours make white: red, blue and green. Each of the primary colours has it complementary colour, which when added also makes white: yellow and blue make white because yellow is a combination of red and green. Yellow is sometimes called antiblue for this reason. The other two complementary colours are magenta (antigreen) and cyan (antired). This means that to make a stable combination of quarks we have one of three possibilities. 1. 2. 3. Three quarks of different primary colours, one red, one blue and one green. Three antiquarks of different complementary colours, one antired, one antiblue and one antigreen. (The antiquarks each have a bar above the letter u or d) A quark and an antiquark of the primary colour and its complement: e.g. red and antired.
The threequark and threeantiquark combinations each form triangles with circles at their centres. The quark–antiquark combinations are made by placing the long edges together.
424
INDEX
What to do
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Produce threequark combinations (baryons) with charge 0 (a neutron) and with charge +e (a proton). What are the charges of the antiparticles to these two baryons? Are there any other different combinations of three quarks? What is the resulting charge of each hadron? Now produce quark–antiquark combinations (mesons) with charge 0, +e and –e. Can you make or think of any other different combinations of quark and antiquark that make viable hadrons? Do they actually exist – or have they been discovered in experiment?
You have seen that
1. Deep inelastic scattering experiments showed that the proton and neutron have a substructure – they are made of smaller particles. With this simple model it can be seen that different combinations of two quark ‘building blocks,’ with charges of +2/3 e and –1/3 e, give the expected proton and neutron. The quark–antiquark combinations give the pions (π mesons). Two of the possible combinations give the neutral π0, while the other two combinations give the π + and π – particles. Other combinations of three quarks are possible: the ddd combination, with charge –e and uuu with charge +2e are predicted. These particles are the unstable Δ− and Δ++.
2.
3.
425
INDEX
Practical advice
The six possible u and d quarks and their six possible antiquarks are best printed on card and laminated. Teachers may choose between two versions of the antiquarks: in one, each antiquark has the same colours as the quark but in the opposite sections of the triangle, whereas in the other, the same section is coloured but with the complementary colour, cyan for red, magenta for green, and yellow for blue. These could be backed if wished (each antiquark on the reverse of its quark), which does emphasise their complementary nature, but it will restrict the production of mesons, so extra sets will be needed. Note that there is a choice of two antiquark styles as detailed in the requirements section above. Have handy a table of discovered particles so that students may check what it is they have constructed. Although this model can readily be extended to strange and charmed hadrons, this is likely to extend it beyond its value, and to give undue emphasis to a ‘stampcollecting’ approach to particle physics. A more useful extension could be to explain the creation of pions in high energy interactions via the creation (ΔE = Δmc2) of quark–antiquark pairs, e.g. in the decay Δ++ → p + π+ where (u+u+u) becomes (u+u+d) + (dbar+u). This would involve starting with a hadron, and adding an extra (quark + its antiquark) pair to make new combinations using the colour combination rules.
External resources
Useful additional information can be gleaned from PPARC materials. http://www.pparc.ac.uk/ Frank Close 1983 The Cosmic Onion (London: Heinemann)
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 60P
426
INDEX
TAP 540 3: Putting quarks together
Three quarks for Muster Mark
The American physicist Murray GellMann gave the name ‘quarks’ to the particles he proposed as the basic building bricks of other particles. The name refers to a line in the novel Finnegans Wake by James Joyce, who was famed for his word play. The line is: ‘Three quarks for Muster Mark’. His colleague George Zwieg wanted to call the particles ‘aces’, but GellMann’s choice won out. In spite of the rhyme suggested by Joyce’s line, the word ‘quark’ is generally pronounced ‘quork’. The word is also German slang for ‘nonsense’ and the trade name for a type of yoghurt! These questions ask about how quarks go together to make other particles.
Two kinds of quark
The simplest particles, including all the ones that everyday matter is made of, are built from two kinds (‘flavours’) of quark: ‘up’ and ‘down’. The most peculiar thing about them is that their electric charges come in multiples of 1/3 of the charge on an electron. On a scale where the charge on an electron is –1e, with e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, the charges on the quarks are:
• •
Up quark u: charge + 2/3 e. Down quark d: charge – 1/3 e.
Making massive particles
Relatively massive particles like the proton and neutron are made of combinations of three quarks. 1. What is the charge on the combination uuu?
2.
What is the charge on the combination uud?
3.
What is the charge on the combination udd?
4.
What is the charge on the combination ddd?
427
INDEX
There are four compound particles here.
5. Which combination has the right charge to be a proton?
6.
Which combination has the right charge to be a neutron?
7.
There is a particle called the Δ– which has a charge of –1e. Which quark combination could be the Δ–?
8.
There is a particle called the Δ++ which has a charge of + 2e. Which quark combination could be the Δ–?
9.
A neutron can be changed to a proton if one quark changes ‘flavour’. What change is needed? What charge must be carried away if this happens?
Making mesons
Other, lighter ‘middleweight’ particles called mesons can be made from pairs of quarks. But they have to be made from a special combination: a quark and an antiquark. There are now four particles to play with:
• • • •
10.
Up quark u: charge +2/3 e Down quark d: charge –1/3 e. Antiup quark u : charge –2/3 e. Antidown quark u : charge + 1/3 e. What is the charge on the combination u u ?
428
INDEX
11.
What is the charge on the combination d d ?
12.
What is the charge on the combination u d ?
13.
What is the charge on the combination d u ?
14.
Which combination could be the π+ meson?
15.
Which combination could be the π– meson?
16.
Which could be the neutral π0 meson?
429
INDEX
Practical advice
These practice questions run through the various quark combinations, and the quark–antiquark combinations. They are intended to help students get familiar with how the combinations work, so that only integer multiples of the electronic charge appear.
Alternative approaches
Perhaps a game with cards could be devised?
Social and human context
It was extremely difficult for physicists to accept that there could be fractional charges. The origin of the number 3 in particle physics (number of colours, number of generations) is still far from clear.
Answers and worked solutions
1. uuu has charge
2 2 2 + 3 e + 3 e + 3 e = +2e.
2.
uud has charge
=
2 3 2 1 e + 3 e − 3 e = +1e.
3.
udd has charge
=
4.
2 3
1 1 e − 3 e − 3 e = 0.
ddd has charge
1 1 1 − 3 e − 3 e − 3 e = −1e.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Proton has charge +1e so could be uud. Neutron has charge 0 so could be udd.
Δ– has charge –1e so could be ddd. Δ++ has charge +2e so could be uuu.
A down quark, charge –1/3 e changes to an up quark, charge +2/3 e, so the charge carried away must be –1 e if charge is to be conserved. u u has charge +2/3 e –2/3 e = 0. d d has charge –1/3 e + 1/3 e = 0. u d has charge +2/3 e + 1/3 e = 1e. d u has charge –1/3 e – 2/3 e = –1e. The π+ with charge + 1e could be u d .
430
INDEX
15. 16.
The π– with charge – 1e could be d u . The neutral π0 could be either or both of u u and d d . In fact it is an equal mixture of the two.
External reference
This activity is taken from Advancing Physics chapter 17, 110S
431
INDEX
TAP 540 4: Strange quarks
An early classification of strange baryons by Murray GellMann and Yuval Ne’emen gave this arrangement, called the baryon decuplet. The diagonal rows show baryons of the same charge. The Δ0 and Δ+ particles are more massive versions of the neutron and proton respectively
ΔΣ
Δ0 Σ0 ΞΩ
Δ+ Σ+ Ξ0
Δ++
strangeness 0 strangeness 1 strangeness 2 strangeness 3
The Ω was, in fact, predicted by Gellmann from a gap in this pattern in much the same way as Mendeleyev predicted missing elements from gaps in his table. The subsequent discovery of the Ωconfirmed that particle physicists were on the right track with this classification, which led Gellmann and Zweig to the quark theory. The strange quark s is a more massive version of the down quark d, and has the same charge (e/3). The presence of a strange quark gives a baryon or meson a strangeness of 1. 1. The Δ0 and Δ+ particles are more massive versions of the neutron and proton respectively. Underneath each particle in the first row, write the three quarks that make up that baryon. The strange quark s is a more massive version of the down quark d, and has the same charge (e/3). How many strange quarks must there be in the Σ particles?
2. (a)
(b)
the Ξ particles?
(c) 3.
the Ω− particle? Write under all the strange baryons the three quarks they must contain.
432
INDEX
The strange mesons fit a similar pattern: K0 K+ strangeness +1
πK
π0
K0
π+
strangeness 0 strangeness 1
4.
If the strange quark s has a strangeness of 1, what is the strangeness of its antiquark, sbar?
5.
Each of these seven mesons consists of a u, d or s quark and a ubar, dbar or sbar antiquark. Write down under each meson the quark and antiquark it contains.
433
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions
An early classification of strange baryons by Murray GellMann and Yuval Ne’emen gave this arrangement, called the baryon decuplet. The diagonal rows show baryons of the same charge. The Δ0 and Δ+ particles are more massive versions of the neutron and proton respectively. 1. and 3.
Δddd
Δ0
udd
Δ+
uud
Δ++
uuu strangeness 0
Σdds
Σ0
uds
Σ+
uus strangeness 1
Ξdss
Ξ0
uss strangeness 2
Ωsss strangeness 3
2. (a) (b) (c) 4. 5. K0 d sbar K+ u sbar strangeness +1 1 2 3 +1
π−
d ubar
π0
d dbar u ubar ssbar K
–
π+
u dbar strangeness 0
K0 s dbar strangeness 1
s ubar
434
INDEX
TAP 5405: Feynman diagrams with quarks
Feynman diagrams can be used for strong interactions as well as weak and electromagnetic interactions. Quarks interact by the exchange of bosons called gluons. On Feynman diagrams, these are shown by curly lines. When a quark emits a gluon, it changes colour, and the quark absorbing it changes colour in the opposite way. Thus a red quark can change into a blue quark by emitting a red  antiblue gluon. When a blue quark absorbs the red  antiblue gluon, it turns into a red quark. Use the quark and gluon cards to construct Feynman diagrams for the interactions binding quarks together in baryons.
435
INDEX
436
INDEX
437
INDEX
438
INDEX
Answers and worked solutions Feynman quark solutions
The key point is that, taking this first solution as an example, a redantiblue gluon carries the colours red and antiblue, so on leaving a red quark it carries away the red colour and leaves the absence of antiblue, i.e. blue, so the red quark it has left become blue. When it reaches a blue quark, the antiblueness of the gluon cancels the blueness and the redness of the gluon makes the target quark red.
439
INDEX
440
INDEX
441
INDEX
442
INDEX
443
一些历史反应堆照片： Below are several schematic diagrams of a Boiling Water Reactor Pressure Vessel. This unit is about four stories all:
The above image is from a Nuclear Mafia web site.
 The above image is from: The Silent Bomb: A Guide to the Nuclear Energy Controversy, Edited by Peter Faulkner, page 85,Vintage Books, NY, July, 1977 (colorization by this author).
Below is a schematic drawing of a GE BWR:
 The above image is from: The Silent Bomb: A Guide to the Nuclear Energy Controversy, Edited by Peter Faulkner, page 283,Vintage Books, NY, July, 1977 (colorization by this author). The reactor cores remain radioactive for about a million years after their brief use in the reactor (two to six years). The waste must be carefully isolated from humans and other living things during this entire time. NO EXCEPTIONS. 
Below are schematic diagrams for PWR and BWR reactors, the two types used in the United States:
 The above image is from: The Bridgeport (Connecticut) Telegram, April 30th, 1980, page 38 (colorization by this author). Many ideas for how to safely store the waste have been suggested, but none have been successfully implemented, and none solve the problem of transportation accidents along the way to the final repository, whatever it might be.
 The above image is from: Northeast Utilities (Connecticut Yankee) Information Brochure, June, 1973, pages 1011 (adjusted for the Internet and additional colorization by this author). 
 The above image and subtitle is from a magazine article about nuclear power, probably 1956. (Title colorized by this author; juxtaposition was apparently unintentional.) 
Here are the reactor designs shown in the article from the 1950's:
 The above images are from a magazine article about nuclear power, probably 1956.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
Use one of your book credits to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.